Home

Roland JUNO-Gi User's Manual

1. Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Selecting Live Sets On the JUNO Gi Live Sets are the units of sound that you select and use The JUNO Gi s Live Sets are divided into the following groups Live Set Group 1 Group Explanation Edit Write These live sets cannot be rewritten You can edit one of PRESET these and save the edited result in the User group These are high quality live sets that were carefully created specifically for the JUNO Gi You can edit one of these and save the edited result the User group A live set you edit can be saved USER in this group v d About the LIVE SET PLAY Screen When you power up the JUNO Gi the LIVE SET PLAY screen will appear Live Set Group LIVEE SPECIAL lick Bells 2 in Catesory S7YHiI synth Pade Str Live Set Category Lock Category Number Name Function buttons 22 By holding down the SHIFT button and pressing a function button you can turn each layer on off or access an edit screen 3 ZFECIRL Bai Buick Bells m I Dp e Button Explanation Page SHIFT 1 U1 Upper 1 Layer On Off SHIFT 2 U2 Upper 2 Layer On Off SHIFT 3 L1 Lower 1 Layer On Off Ps SHIFT 4 L2 Lower 2 Layer On Off SHIFT 5 LIVE SET Access the LIVE S
2. 1 Use the RHYTHM PATTERN slider to adjust the volume Adjusting the Digital Recorder s overall volume 1 Use the MASTER slider to adjust the volume Parameter Value Explanation Adjusting the Pan Reverb and EQ TRACK SETTING In the TRACK SETTING screen you can adjust the pan and reverb of tracks 1 8 and the Rhythm Pattern 1 Inthe RECORDER screen press the 4 SET button Switching V tracks V Track The TRACK SETTING screen will appear High Gain 12 12 dB Gain of the high range High Freq 400 Hz 16 kHz Frequency of the high range The digital recorder Track Number Explanation provides eight tracks Each track consists of eight V Track8 5 R Rhythm Patt i e UM virtual tracks V tracks and V Track7 A 1 8 Track 1 8 you can select of these V tracks for playback and V Track 4 recording V Track 2 Es V Track 1 D In other words you can use 12345678 8 8 64 tracks to record 5 your performance and n choose eight of these for 5 playback 3 1 In the TRACK SETTING screen change the value for V Track 74 LLL m Function Buttons Explanation The status of the V track is shown in the screen indicates that data mm 1 EQ SET Accesses the equalizer setting screen EQ SETTING exists lt 2 ST LINK Enables Stereo Link A a 2 Usethe cursor buttons t
3. 45 xipuaddy 32 2 BAND CHORUS A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges L in Hin Parameter Split Freq Low Pre Delay Low Rate Low Depth Low Phase High Pre Delay High Rate High Depth High Phase Balance Level Value 200 8000 Hz 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 33 2 BAND FLANGER A flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Lin R Parameter Split Freq Low Pre Delay 60 Y High Band Flanger High Band Feedback Y Low Band Flanger B L out H out Explanation Frequency at which the low and high ranges will be divided Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the low range chorus sound is heard Rate at which the low range chorus sound is modulated Modulation depth for the low range chorus sound Spaciousness of the low range chorus sound Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the high range chorus sound is heard Rate at which the low range chorus sound is modulated Modulation depth for the high range chorus sound Spaciousness of the high range chorus sound Volume balance of the original soun
4. 95 Manual Punch In Out 95 Auto Punch OUt cessus a secte EY 95 Repeatedly Recording the Same Region Loop Recording 96 Canceling a Recording Editing Undo Redo 96 Reverting to the Previous State 96 Canceling the Undo 96 Putting Multiple Tracks Together BOUNCE Mode 97 Bounce Recording 97 Listening the Result of the 97 5224 9 Selecting the RECORDER 98 SONG EDIT 98 TRACK EDIT week 98 TRACK EDIT Menu Editing Track 98 Track Copy Copying Data 98 Track Move Moving 99 Track Erase Erasing 100 Track Exchange Exchanging 100 Track Import Importing an Audio 101 Track Export Exporting Track Data to an Audio File 102 SONG EDI MO 103 DONG SECC T e 103 Create New 103 MOMA 103 dax
5. 157 53 h3 legato will be applied tothelayerwhenyou Parameter Value Explanation ON Lune m iue ci i cos c eL n play single notes Vib Rate 64 e 64 For each layer adjust the vibrato speed TONE The legato setting of the tone assigned to the a Vibrato Rate 63 layer will be used Depth 64 For each layer this adjusts the depth of the OFF Portamento will not be applied Portamento Q Vibrato Depth Tum ON Portamento will be applied Portamento a Delay 64 For each layer this adjusts the time delay until Switch TONE The portamento switch setting of the tone 4 Vibrato Delay 63 the vibrato assigned to the layer will be used ee 0 127 Time over which the pitch change will occur when using portamento 3 VELOCITY Portamento Time The portamento time setting of the tone TONE assigned to the layer will be used The layer sounded when you sounded when you play softly Ond 5 RX FLTR Velocity Level 2 Q y lt rr Here you can specify whether specific MIDI messages will On or will not Off be received by each layer Velocity Fade Lower Velocity Fade Upper Velocity Range Lower Velocity Range Upper Parameter Value Explanation m zh Bd Receive Bender A Paramete
6. 123 Editing a Pattern PATTERN EDIT 124 Displaying the PATTERN EDIT screen 124 About the PATTERN EDIT screen 124 INIT Initializing a 124 SETUP Specify the Time Signature and Length 124 SCALE Specify the Scale of the Grid 124 NOTE SETUP Specify The Note s Type Duration and Velocity 124 Entering lt 125 Deleting a 125 WRITE Saving a Pattern 125 Importing SMF on Your Computer to a Rhythm Pattern IMPORT 2 2 soie RESP AER ER 126 USB Memory Song Player Playing Song Files from USB Memory 128 Copying Song Files from Your Computer to Usb Memory 128 Song files that can be played 128 Insert the USB 128 Playing Along with an Song File from USB Memory 128 Adjusting the Volume of the Song 129 Center lt 129 Detailed Settings for Center 129 Detailed Settings for lt 129 Using the Included USB Memory Prot
7. 82 System Menu screen 80 system lt 80 system settings 80 temperament 27 32 122 TEMPO button eene n 32 Tempo 83 The LAYER SPLIT screen 26 Time Keyfollow 40 41 42 2 RAS 25 TONE soo os ee oe 36 Tone Control Source 38 Tone Ctrl 1 4 Source 38 Tone 25 36 Tone Number 36 Tone 25 36 TRACK 1 45 81 88 TRACK 1 5 4 8 buttons 88 Track COPY PM 98 TRACK EDIT menu 98 Track 100 Track Exchange 100 Track 102 Track 1 101 TRACK MIXER 1 5 4 8 sliders 88 Track Move 99 TRACK 5 89 track to 94 Transmit Active Sensing 82 Transmit Bank Select 82 Transmit Edit Data 82 Transmit Program 82 lt 27 TRANSPOSE button 27 TREMOLO 114 troubleshooting 140 TVA 43 TVA 42
8. UNE TEVEL DIGITAL RECORDER RECORDER VIEW REC SOURCE SELECT AUDIO PEAK UNDO hebo KEYBOARD INPUT j K MIXER SOUND MODIFY REVERB LOW MID 2 3 CUTOFF RESONANCE 4 HIGH ON OFF QU Roland 0 D D spunos gt suompunj Za lt 2 fD v N D Lm sbhuljjas 42410 3 3 14 2 Japsoray 23161 1293 1 k ejd DUOS Kiowa 9sn gt D 5 gt lt Overview of the JUNO Gi Broadly speaking the JUNO Gi consists of three sections Synthesizer Digital Recorder and USB Memory Song Player The explanations in this manual are also organized according to these sections You can use the index tabs at the right edge of each page to jump to the section you want to read USB Memory Song Player Synthesizer About the Synthesizer The synthesizer section lets you select sounds and play them from the keyboard Live Sets and Tones What s a Live Set On the JUNO Gi Live Sets are the units of sound that you select and use Live Se
9. 27 System Menu 2 KBD CTRL 81 31 3D STEP FLANGER 59 System Menu 3 MID SYNO 23 32 2 6 60 System Menu 4 CLICK PLAYER System Menu 5 D BEAM 83 34 2 BAND STEP 60 System Menu 6 INFORMATION 35 OVERDRIVE css e eres 61 36 61 37 VS OVERDRIVE 61 38 VS 5 61 39 GUITAR AMP 62 40 COMPRESSOR 62 41 1 2 22 2224 63 42 6 4 63 43 2 2 2 63 44 LONG 4 64 45 SERIAL 64 46 MODULATION DELAY 64 47 3TAP PAN 65 Digital Recorder 1 Recording Playing Editing s6 Displaying the Digital Recorder Screen 86 Displaying the RECORDER 5
10. gt E gt oO La 1 Ua ES E lt Japsoray 123JJ3 u1 d FEY CIP 950 xipuaddy 08 AUTO WAH Cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre L in Auto Wah 2 Band EQ L out R in Auto Wah Parameter Filter Type Manual Peak Sens Polarity Rate Depth Phase Low Gain High Gain Level 2 Band EQ Value Type of filter LPF BPF 0 127 0 127 0 127 H out Explanation The wah effect will be applied over a wide frequency range The wah effect will be applied over a narrow frequency range Adjusts the center frequency at which the effect is applied Adjusts the amount of the wah effect that will occur in the range of the center frequency Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be affected Adjusts the sensitivity with which the filter is controlled Sets the direction in which the frequency will change when the auto wah filter is modulated UP DOWN 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 127 09 HUMANIZER Adds a vowel character to the sound making it similar to a human voice Lin Hin Parameter Drive Sw Drive Vowel1 Vowel2 Rate Depth Input Sync Sw Input Sync Threshold 52 Overdrive Value OFF ON 0 127 0
11. 86 About the RECORDER Screen 86 PIAVING SOR 87 Selecting and Playing a Song Song Select 87 Changing the Current 5 87 MUMMO TICK REFERS Ep aor very pari ace a 88 Adjusting the Volume of the Tracks 88 Adjusting the Pan Reverb and EQ TRACK SETTING 89 Switching V tracks 89 Controlling the Parameters of Two Tracks Simultaneously Groo LNK o 225252224065 RU REPRE RR ES OS SE 89 Playing Back Repeatedly REPEAT 90 Specifying the 90 Using the A B SETTING Screen To Specify the Repeat hizo prr 90 SUC IHAERKERREV EVER NERIS NM ME 91 Song Production FOW sese xr 91 Creating a New Song Create New Song 91 Connecting the Equipment to Record and Adjusting the Input 92 Selecting an Instrument to Record REC SOURCE SELECT 93 Selecting the Sound of the Synthesizer KEYBOARD 93 Selecting the Sound of the External Audio Input escondida basadas cde peque 93 Recordi ieni reke Ee 94 Re Recording Over a Mistake
12. Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Rear Panel Connections The JUNO Gi does not contain an amp or speakers In order to produce sound you ll need to connect the rear panel OUTPUT jacks to an audio device such as an amplified speaker system subsequently referred to as speakers or use headphones AUDIO INPUT jacks MIDI connectors Connect the equipment that you ll be recording on the For connecting MIDI device Digital Recorder PEDAL jacks HOLD jack Here you can connect a pedal switch such as one from the DP series sold separately and use it as a Hold pedal CONTROL jack Here you can connect an expression pedal EV 5 sold separately and use it to control various parameters or functions Use the LINE jacks to connect your audio player or audio device Connect your microphone or guitar to the GUITAR MIC jack as shown in the illustration To adjust the level use the LEVEL knob located at the left of the jacks 1912 Adjust the knob so that the front INPUT l panel PEAK indicator lights orange during the loudest passages If this indicator lights red input overload has occurred Useonly the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Na DIO INPUT meee LL LEVEL GUITAR MIC PHANTOM IN CONTROL HOLD If y
13. range to be affected 15 15dB 400Hz 16kHz High Gain Gain of the high range High Freq System Menu 2 KBD CTRL 1 KBD Frequency of the high range Parameter Explanation Velocity value that will be transmitted when you play the keyboard Velocity REAL Actual keyboard velocity will be transmitted 1 127 A fixed velocity value will be transmitted regardless of how you play Parameter Keyboard Velocity Curve Keyboard Velocity Sens 2 PEDAL Parameter Control Pedal Assign Control Pedal Polarity Hold Pedal Polarity Value LIGHT MEDIUM HEAVY 63 63 BEND UP BEND DOWN AFTERTOUCH OCT UP OCT DOWN USB SONG START RECORDER START RECORDER REC TAP TEMPO PROGRAM UP PROGRAM DOWN FAVORITE UP FAVORITE DOWN ARP SW CHORD SW INSERT FX CTRL STANDARD REVERSE Explanation This sets the keyboard to a light touch You can achieve fortissimo ff play with a less forceful touch than MEDIUM setting so the keyboard feels lighter This setting makes it easier for children whose hands have less strength This sets the keyboard to the standard touch This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch You have to play the keyboard more force fully than MEDIUM setting in order to play fortissimo ff so the keyboard touch feels heavier This setting allows you to add more expression when playing dynamically Makes fine adju
14. 79 SD card protector 15 Sensitivity 83 SETUT ea od 124 Een 18 SP 33 126 128 SMF 83 Soft 82 SOLO SYNTH button 28 87 91 83 SONG CLICK OUT jack 13 83 Song Click Output Level 83 Song 103 SONG EDIT menu 103 Song Name Edit 103 Song Optimize 104 Song Player Level 83 Song 104 Song Remove 103 Song 87 Song 104 SOUND 80 Sound Generator 80 SOUND MODIFY knob 29 Source 82 special live 8 SPECIAL LIVE SET button 23 rec COPS 26 split point 26 Split Point 5 38 Split Setting 38 Split 5 38 STEP RESET function 49 stereo 89 stereo lt 94 Sub Channel 82 Switch 1 Switch 2 Assign 38 Switch 1 Switch 2 Type 38 sp ar 83 Synchronizing with MIDI 134 TU ME 83 Sys Ctrl 1 4
15. ES 31 3 14 2 1 p102 23161 12 43 1 Kiowa 950 xipuaddy 21 ROTARY The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often used with the electric organs of the past Since the movement of the high range and low range rotors can be set independently the unique type of modulation characteristic of these speakers can be simulated quite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ Tones L in Hin Parameter Speed Woofer Slow Speed Woofer Fast Speed Woofer Acceleration Woofer Level Tweeter Slow Speed Tweeter Fast Speed Tweeter Acceleration Tweeter Level Separation Level Value gt L out gt R out Explanation Simultaneously switch the rotational speed of the low frequency rotor and high frequency rotor SLOW FAST 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 15 0 127 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 15 0 127 0 127 0 127 22 VK ROTARY This type provides modified response for the rotary speaker with the low end boosted further Slows down the rotation to the Slow Rate Speeds up the rotation to the Fast Rate Slow speed SLOW of the low frequency rotor Fast speed FAST of the low frequency rotor Adjusts the time it takes the low frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower value
16. Lr 102 7 07010 This instrument is equipped with balanced XLR TRS type rum jacks Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below Make connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other LENO ERa COLD 79 SLEEVE GND equipment you intend to connect e To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections e When connection cables with resistors are used the volume level of equipment connected to the inputs AUDIO INPUT jacks may be low If this happens use connection cables that do not contain resistors e Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by 1 Changing the orientation of the microphone s 2 Relocating microphone s at a greater distance from speakers 3 Lowering volume levels 92 Selecting an Instrument to Record Selecting the Sound of the External Audio REC SOURCE SELECT Input AUDIO INPUT If you want to record the sound from a guitar microphone line input or USB audio select the desired sound as follows Here s how to select the instrument you ll be recording SOURCE SELECT 1 Press the AUDIO INPUT button The AUDIO INPUT SELECT window will appear AUDIO PEAK KEYBOARD INPUT 6 HLUDIO INPUT SELECT EO InPut Level 5 revere 4 4 GUITAR e M Inpu
17. gt MITTEN 197159 3yj3 bunip3 E gt M Ua lt Japsoray 23161 SPITE 1 4 owdW JSN xipuaddy 67 OVERDRIVE gt FLANGER L in Hin Parameter Overdrive Drive Overdrive Pan Flanger Pre Delay Flanger Rate Flanger Depth Flanger Feedback Flanger Balance Level 68 OVERDRIVE gt DELAY L in Hin Parameter Overdrive Drive Overdrive Pan Delay Time Delay Feedback Delay HF Damp Delay Balance Level 72 Overdrive Overdrive Balance D e L out Feedback Balance W 5 Flanger e out Balance D Value Explanation 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume L64 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Adjusts the delay time from 0 0 100 msec when the direct sound begins 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 98 98 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Balance D ETA Feedback until the flanger sound is heard Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the flanger W and the sound that is not sent through the flanger D Output Level L out J Balance W
18. 0 1000 msec note 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 0 127 Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Volume of each delay sound Pre LPF Level Feedback Delay Rate Depth Send Level to Reverb 76 0 7 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 Cuts the high frequency range of the sound coming into the chorus Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies Volume of the chorus sound Adjusts the amount of the chorus sound that is fed back into the effect Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Adjusts the amount of chorus sound that will be sent to the reverb If you specify the delay time as a note value slowing down the tempo will not change the delay time beyond a certain length This is because there is an upper limit for the delay time if the delay time is specified as a note value and you slow down the tempo until this upper limit is reached the delay time cannot change any further This upper limit is the maximum value that can be specified when setting the delay time
19. 42 TVF 43 TYF ENVELOPE sees cas x err 41 TVF PARAMETER 40 82 84 U 96 114 doi 132 USB 132 USB Audio Level 80 USB Audio To Computer 80 USB COMPUTER connector 132 USD 132 USB memory 9 79 128 USB Memory Format 79 USB memory protector 130 USB memory song player 127 USB MIDI 82 132 5 1 82 USB Song Sync Mode 83 User 78 User lt 78 78 UTILITY MENU window 78 V VALUE Bid cs ex rado c pd 18 Velocity s isa dade eU ERU OS cor 81 VELOCI Y ao sspe 37 Velocity Curve 37 Velocity Fade Lower 37 Velocity Fade Upper 37 Velocity Range Lower 37 Velocity Range Upper 37 Velocity Sens Offset 37 37 Vibrato 37 Vibrato 37 Vibrato Rate 37 135 vocoder 30 Voice lt 36 VOLUME knob
20. Lin L out CY Balance W 25 STEP FLANGER This is a flanger in which the flanger pitch changes in steps The speed at which the pitch changes can also be specified in terms of a note value of a specified tempo Parameter Filter Type Cutoff Freq Pre Delay Rate Depth Phase Feedback Low Gain High Gain Balance Level 9 a o Balance D Value Type of filter OFF LPF HPF 200 8000 Hz 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 98 98 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 H out Explanation No filter is used Cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Freq Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Center frequency when using the filter to cut a specific frequency range Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Spatial spread of the sound Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Output Level Balance D UN LL 9 Step Flanger Balance W Feedback Feedback Hin O R out Balance D Parameter Value Explanation Type of filter OFF No filter is used Filter Type LPF Cuts the frequency range above the Cut
21. 1 Kiowa 950 xipuaddy PHASER Parameter Type Rate Depth Resonance FLANGER Parameter Rate Depth Manual Resonance TREMOLO Parameter Rate Depth Wave Shape 114 Value 4 STAGE 8 STAGE 12 STAGE BI PHASE 0 100 BPM 0 100 0 100 Value 0 100 BPM 0 100 0 100 0 100 Value 0 100 BPM 0 100 0 100 Explanation Selects the number of stages that the phaser effect uses This is a four phase effect A light phaser effect is obtained This is an eight phase effect This is the most common phaser effect This is a twelve phase effect A deep phase effect is obtained This is the phaser with two phase shift circuits connected in series This sets the speed of the effect This sets the richness of the effect This sets the intensity of the effect Explanation This sets the speed of the effect This sets the richness of the effect Adjusts the modulation frequency of the flanger effect This sets the intensity of the effect Explanation This sets the speed of the effect This sets the richness of the effect Adjusts changes in volume level A higher value will steepen wave s shape ROTARY Parameter Rate Slow Rate Fast Depth Speed Select UNI V Parameter Rate Depth Level PAN Parameter Rate Depth Wave Shape Value 0 100 BPM 0 100 BPM 0 100 SLOW FAST Value 0 100 BPM 0 100 0 100 Val
22. 18 About the FUNCTION Buttons sc side ved ums a Eu reu E xs 18 The SHIFT Button FUlCUOllS 18 Editing d 18 MOVING the CUISOE AG TU 18 Charging usua edere Tr RC EET sa nurse d OE eta 18 Entering a Value INUMERIC Button 19 The MENU Button FUNCTION 19 Assigning a 19 Listening to the Demo Song 20 Synthesizer 1 Selecting Sounds Selecting Live 22 About the LIVE SET PLAY Screen 22 Selecting Live Sets from 5 22 Using the VALUE Dial to Select a Live 23 Selecting Live Sets by Number NUMERIC Button 23 Selecting Special Live Sets SPECIAL LIVE SET Button 23 Auditioning a Live Set PREVIEW Button 23 Registering and Calling Up Favorite Live Sets FAW ORME cus uuo 24 Registering a Favorite Live 24 Calling Up a Favorite Sound soos 24 Registering Calling Up or Editing Favorites in aList 24 Selecting Tones LAYER SPLIT
23. FEY CPUs Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Troubleshooting Problem Items to check Action Power turns off by itself Display backlight turns off by itself Power won t turn on No sound Check the system setting Auto Power Off p 80 The JUNO Gi s power will automatically be switched off if no operation has been performed for a certain length of time with the factory setting the power will turn off after 240 minutes Check the system setting Power Save Mode p 80 The JUNO Gi will automatically turn off the display backlight if no operation is performed for a certain length of time with the factory settings the backlight will turn off after five minutes Are the included AC adaptor and power cord correctly connected to an outlet and to the JUNO Gi Could the batteries have run low Are the batteries installed in the correct polarity Have the connected amp or speakers been powered up Could the volume of a connected device have been lowered Could the VOLUME knob be set to the minimum level Are your amp speakers headphones etc connected correctly Can you connect headphones and hear sound through them Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor If you want the power to remain on constantly set the system setting Auto Power Off p 80 to OFF If you want the backlight to remain on constantly set the system setting Power Save Mode p 80 to OFF
24. HIGH ON OFF Low MID CUTOFF RESONANCE Rola nd i MOBILE SYNTHESIZER WITH DIGITAL REC REVERB 4 spunos gt suonpunj Za lt 2 F fD v N D Lm 2 5 1 12410 PITE u1 d gt 2 0 Lam jake xipuaddy Displaying the Digital Recorder Screen Displaying the RECORDER Screen 1 Press the RECORDER VIEW button so it s lit RECORDER VIEW RECORDER screen will appear To return to Synthesizer screen LIVE SET PLAY press the RECORDER VIEW button to turn off its illumination or press the EXIT button Synthesizer screen Digital Recorder screen LIVE SET PLAY RECORDER EIE SET PI MY SPECIRL Buick Bells Category SYNISynth Pad str Ge Sees Mac 1 2 81 00 68 88 88 EM 123 MEE EB TRE SET Ente a 5 6 7 Mum Name Explanation ber Indicates the current location within the song From the left the numbers indicate measure beat 1 Measure clock When there are more than 999 measures an is shown for the hundreds place 2 Song name Indicates the name of the song The current location within the song is shown as hours minutes seconds fra
25. Ora L out Balance W CY Balance W H out Balance D Explanation Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Modulation frequency of the chorus effect Modulation depth of the chorus effect Volume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Modulation frequency of the flanger effect Modulation depth of the flanger effect Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the flanger W and the sound that is not sent through the flanger D Output Level 78 SYMPATHETIC RESONANCE 79 VOCODER On an acoustic piano holding down the damper pedal allows other strings to resonate Mic Mix in sympathy with the notes you play creating rich and spacious resonances This effect L out simulates these sympathetic resonances MIC INPUT L in L out L in R out ym Resonance R in Synth Level F D D R in 9 R out TR 2 Mic Sens 0 127 Input sensitivity of the microphone i Parameter Value Explanation Synth Level 0 127 Input level of the instrument 2 Depth 0 127 Depth of the effect Amount of microphone audio Depth to which the damper Mic Mix 0 127 added to the output of the 2 Damper 0 127 pe
26. 1 Select the user live set that you want to initialize Eeit ang then pressed button 5 The LIVE SET EDIT screen will appear P 2 Pressthe MENU button 4 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the 5 COPY F 3 Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select button 1 Live Set Edit and press the ENTER button il 5 Usethecursor buttons to move the cursor and use the i aM VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the copy T 4 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the 6 INIT source and copy destination layers gt button Display Explanation A confirmation message will appear 5 Source Layer Copy source layer a 5 Press the 5 EXEC button to initialize the live set Eu Destination Layer Copy destination layer 2 cancel press the 6 CANCEL button If you press the 4 EXCHG button to add a check mark the layers you specified as the source and destination layers will be exchanged 6 Press the 6 EXEC button A confirmation message will appear 7 Press the 5 EXEC button to exchange the layers To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button un lt e N D Lm 1 m 5 ue D A rt 3 3 14 2 Saving a Live Set WRITE Changes you make are temporary and will be lost when you turn off 5 Press the 6 WRITE button the power or select another live set If you want t
27. Explanation Edit the value The value will change more quickly if you press one button while holding down the other button The value will change in larger steps if you press one of these buttons while holding down the SHIFT button Move the cursor position up down left right Edits the value The value will change more quickly if you turn the VALUE dial while holding down SHIFT By pressing this in combination with another button you can access the corresponding setting screen Returns you to the previous screen or closes the open window In some screens this halts the function that s being executed Confirms a value or executes an operation This button is also used to display a list of Live Sets or Tones Here you can make settings for the Digital Recorder Accesses the Digital Recorder screen Cancels Undo or re executes Redo an operation of the Digital Recorder Selects the source for recording Press the KEYBOARD button to record the JUNO Gi s keyboard sound or press the AUDIO INPUT button to record the sound of the external input Indicates the level of the input to the AUDIO INPUT jacks LINE GUITAR MIC on the rear panel Adjust the LEVEL knob on the rear panel so that this lights in orange when the loudest volume occurs If this lights red the maximum level has been exceeded Returns you to the beginning of the song Rewinds the song while you continue holding down the button Fast forwards the song whi
28. Use the cursor 4 V buttons to move the cursor to Scale Tune Switch or Patch Scale Tune for Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired value For details on the parameters and values that you can assign refer to Scale Tune p 80 If you want to keep your settings press the 6 WRITE button Press the EXIT button a number of times to return to the previous screen 27 spunos gt 197159 sp y4 6un p E gt Ua ES gt Ce 31 3 14 2 Japsoray 23161 FEY CIP xipuaddy Controlling Your Performance The D Beam controller can be used simply by waving your hand over it It can be used to apply various effects depending on the function that is assigned to it On the JUNO Gi the D Beam controller can be used not only to modify the sounds but also to control the pitch of a monophonic solo synthesizer sound Da M 1 Press either the D BEAM SOLO 98 SYNTH EXPRESSION ASSIGNABLE button to turn on the D Beam ASSIGNABLE controller Button Explanation You can play a monophonic synthesizer by moving your hand above the D Beam controller SOLO SYNTH button EXPRESSION button Lets you add expression ASSIGNABLE button controller 2 While you play the keyboard to p
29. 0 127 0 180 deg D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Lin L out Balance D J Balance W Tremolo Chorus R H out Balance D Parameter Value Explanation Adjusts the delay time from the Pre Delay 0 0 100 msec direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Modulation feguencyorthe chorus effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation depth of the chorus effect Modulation frequency of the tremolo effect Spread of the tremolo effect Spread of the tremolo effect Volume balance between the direct sound D and the tremolo chorus sound W Output Level 29 3D CHORUS This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound The chorus sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right ul 3D Chorus __ H R out Parameter Value Explanation Type of filter OFF No filter is used Filter Type Cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Freq HPF Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Center frequency when using the Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz filter to cut a specific frequency range Adjusts the delay time from the Pre Delay 0 0 100 msec direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Modulation depth of the chorus effect Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound The optimal 3D effect will be achieved Output Mode SPEAKER When using speakers PHONES When using headphones Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low ra
30. 1 TONE Parameter Type Tone Type will play the sound of a different instrument Group Tone Group and models Number Tone Number Value Explanation Tone type of each layer Tone Rhythm These are instruments such as piano or strings All keys will play the sound of the same instrument These are instruments such as drum sets Each key Tone group of each layer PRST GM 001 2 LV amp PAN Parameter Level Pan Left right position of each layer Sw Layer Switch This setting specifies the number of voices that Voice Voice Reserve of waves used in the tones Value 0 127 L64 0 63R OFF ON 0 63 FULL 3 PITCH Parameter Octave Octave Shift Coarse Pitch of the layer s sound in semitones 4 octaves Coarse Tune Fine in 1 cent steps one cent is 1 100th of a semitone Fine Tune Bend Pitch Bend Range be used 36 Value 3 43 48 448 50 450 0 24 TONE These are the tones unique to the JUNO Gi These are tones compatible with the GM2 specification which was created as a common standard for MIDI devices across manufacturers Tone number of each layer Explanation Volume of each layer This setting s main purpose is to adjust the volume balance between layer Layer on off setting will be reserved for each layer when more than 128 voices are played simultane
31. 16 volume of the tracks 88 V Track 89 113 128 WRITE button 35 USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About N WARNING and N CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger NWARNING Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets N CAUTION The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained
32. 44 Key Fade 36 Move in steps of measures beats 87 7 8 79 ENHANCER 116 Key Fade Upper 36 Move to the beginning of PAN OUR C MRNA eee 89 37 DIESODgsss eee 87 EE batteries 14 EQ ON OFF BUON 29 Kev Ranae Lower 36 Move to the end of the song 87 EQ SETTING 89 y Range Lower 198 BATTERY indicator 14 i Key Range Upper 36 42 MGR EO 81 212 i FOUALIZER 111 MM NN 46 Bias Level 42 error message NSU 138 L multi effect control 46 peus EAP 84 multi effects parameters 48 Bias 42 EXPRESSION button 28 te EDEN 25 a8 4 LAYER SPLIT screen 05 JnHUndHaehereretesetetedo asd gt BOUNCE ind entres 97 Layer SWICK amos does 36 N S ae LCD CONTRAST knob 17 bounce recording 97 78 pons 52 i M 19 sri 87 Legato 5 37 NOISE SUPPRESSOR 111 a eese s eor o ERE
33. Di D 3 A3 C4 F 4 B3 D4 GA F F3 A3 EA 64 FS CA EA G G7sus4 9 13 G2 Gi 6472 53 DA F4 A A2 C GA Aft C7 on Bb A 2 G3 CA E4 B B 7 b5 B2 A3 D4 F4 03 Jazz 1 Assign Key Chord Name Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C C69 C3 D4 EA D 29 YS C4 Dit 7 9 D 3 G3 C 4 F 4 E E 7 9 E3 G 3 D4 G4 F F3 A3 EA G 7 9 A 3 E4 A4 62 4 G 7 13 G 2 F 3 C4 F4 A 2 G3 C4 Da Aft Bb9 A 2 G 3 C4 D4 B B 7 11 B2 A3 D4 E4 04 Jazz 2 Assign Key Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C3 E3 D4 C C 3 F3 B3 D 4 D 9 PRAM Dit D 3 G3 C 4 E E 9 D4 F 4 F F2 GE DEA GA F 7 b5 F 2 A3 C4 E4 G G7 b13 G2 F3 B3 D 4 Gi G 7 13 G 2 F 3 C4 F4 A A7 b13 A2 G3 C 4 F4 A Bb7 13 A 2 G 3 D4 G4 B B 7 11 B2 A3 D4 E4 05 Jazz 3 Assign Key Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C3 G3 B3 D4 Ci C 3 G 3 C4 D 4 D Dmaj9 D3 F 3 A3 C 4 E4 E G 3 B3 D 4 F 4 F F3 3 CA E4 GA F F 3 A 3 C 4 F4 G 4 G G3 B3 D4 F 4 A4 G G 3 C4 D 4 G4 A 4 A C 4 E4 G 4 B4 A A 3 D4 F4 A4 C5 B B3 D 4 F 4 A 4 C 5 136 Assign Key Chord Name Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C C C3 D 4 G4 C5 C Db C 3 C 4 G 4 D Ddim D3 D4 F4 G 4 D Eaug D 3 D 4 G4 B4 E E E3 E4 G4 B4 F F F2 C4
34. Do not use any AC adaptor or power cord other than the supplied items Doing so will cause malfunctions Check the remaining battery power p 14 Open the battery case and make sure that the batteries are installed in the correct polarity Turn on the power of the connected amp or speakers Adjust the volume of the connected equipment Adjust the VOLUME knob Correctly connect your amp speakers and headphones p 12 If you hear sound through your headphones it may be that there is a broken con nection cable or that your amp or mixer have malfunctioned Check your connection cables and equipment once again Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor No sound A specific Layer is not heard No sound from a specific range of keys Sound is distorted Pitch is wrong Notes are broken off Notes remain sounding when you play the keyboard Sound stops when you switch Live Sets 140 If pressing the keyboard does not produce sound could the Local switch be turned off Could the Layer level setting be too low Are the effect settings correct Could the volume have been lowered by a pedal operation a D Beam controller operation or a MIDI message volume or expression received from an external MIDI device Could the REC SOURCE SELECT KEYBOARD button be turned on Could the Layer level be set too low Could the Layer Switch p 36 be turned off Could key range settings have be
35. Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter that you want to edit and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to edit the value For details on each parameter refer to Insert Effects Parameters 109 If you want to save the current effect settings press the 6 WRITE button For the save procedure refer to Saving Insert Effects Settings WRITE p 107 When you ve finished editing 6 When you ve finished editing press the EXIT button Saving Insert Effects Settings WRITE Here s how to assign a name patch name to the effect settings you ve edited and save them as a new effect patch In the INSERT FX EDIT screen press the 6 WRITE button The INSERT FX PATCH NAME screen will appear Assign a name For details on how to enter a name refer to Assigning a Name p 19 When you ve finished assigning a name press the 6 NEXT button A screen will appear allowing you to select the save destination Press the 1 USER or 2 SONG button to select the save destination group Group Explanation USER Patches saved in internal memory SONG Patches saved for each song Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the bank and patch number into which you want to write your edited patch Press the 6 WRITE button A confirmation message will appear Press the 5 EXEC button to write to the patch To can
36. measures that contain data 3 Toclose the setting window press the 6 CLOSE button or the EXIT button SCALE Specify the Scale of the Grid This specifies the scale of the grid 1 Inthe PATTERN EDIT screen press the 5 SCALE button The grid s scale will change each time you press the button Scale 16th notes 32nd notes 8th note triplets 16th note triplets NOTE SETUP Specify The Note s Type Duration and Velocity Here s how to specify the type duration and velocity of the notes you ll be entering 1 Inthe PATTERN EDIT screen press the 2 NOTE SET button 2 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to the item that you want to edit and use the VALUE dial or DEC INC to edit the value Parameter Value Explanation Refer to note Note T ote Type p 49 Selects the type of note to enter Selects the gate time duration of the note message to enter as a proportion of the note value you selected in Note Type Selects the velocity volume of the note message to enter Gate Time 5 200906 Velocity 1 127 If this is On you ll be able to enter notes using the keyboard e The sixteen white keys from the right are used to enter notes the black keys are ignored Input by Keyboard i e The velocity you use when pressing a key will be entered as the note on velocity 3 Toclose the setting window press the 6 CLOSE button or the EXIT button WRIT
37. spunos gt S B In order to record you ll need to unlock the SD card If the SD card is locked the JUNO Gi won t be able to perform recording or NOTE backup operations Make sure to unlock e Keep the removed screws and SD card protector out of the reach of the SD card before inserting it small children so that they won t be swallowed accidentally be unlocked suonpunj 1971594 3jj3 bunip3 e Never insert or remove a SD card while this unit s power is on Doing so may corrupt the unit s data or the data on the SD card 2 Remove the included SD card insert your SD card into the slot and then reattach the SD card protector Removing an SD card Press the SD card inward Ey RECORDER BACKUP uh 2 Grasp the card and pull it out toward yourself e gt iM et Carefully insert the SD card all the way in until it is firmly in place emo 31 3 14 2 Japsoray 6 spay SD card capacity and recording time The following table shows the total amount of recording time that is available with one SD SDHC card when only one track is used If you use a high capacity SD SDHC card you ll be able to save a larger number of samples The JUNO Gi supports SDHC SD cards up to a capacity of 32 GB Capacity Recording Times Capacity Recording Times 1 GB Appr
38. 2 Track Edit Track Import p 98 Turn the VALUE dial to select the audio file you want to import e By pressing the 5 PREVIEW button you can audition the selected audio e You can also select audio files that are in the SD card s ROLAND EXPORT folder These are shown in the list as EXPORT file name e If you decide not to import press the EXIT button Press the 6 NEXT button Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the import destination Target Track and Target V Track Choose the track on which the audio data will be recorded If you select Track 1 8 the data will be imported monaural and if you select Track 1 2 7 8 the data will be imported in stereo For example if you select Track 1 2 the left channel of the audio file is imported into Track 1 and the right channel of the audio file is imported into Track 2 If you want to listen to these Tracks in stereo after it has been imported set the pan for Track 1 to 64 and set the pan for Track 2 to R63 p 89 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the time or measure To at which you want to import the data and press the 6 EXEC button The display will ask Import OK If you re sure you want to import press the 5 EXEC button If you decide to cancel press the 6
39. Gi uses two knd of tempo the Keyboard and the recorder tempo The keyboard tempo is used for the synthesizer s arpeggio etc and the recorder tempo is the tempo of the digital recorder Gn e Use the cursor V buttons to select the tempo that you want to change Keyboard Tempo Recorder Tempo If you press the 5 LINK button to assign a check mark the keyboard tempo will match the recorder tempo This is convenient when you want to play arpeggios in time with the tempo of the recorder s song If you use the USB memory song player to play back MIDI data SMF when the 5 LINK button is off the keyboard tempo will be set to the tempo of the SMF data You can save the current keyboard tempo by pressing the WRITE button while the TEMPO window is displayed If the 5 LINK button Tempo Link is on the JUNO Gi cannot synchronize to an external MIDI device p 134 3 Toclose the TEMPO window press the 6 CLOSE button or the EXIT button Arpeggio Settings 1 Press the ARPEGGIO button so it s lit Alternatively hold down the SHIFT button and press the ARPEGGIO button The ARPEGGIO STYLE screen will appear By holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the ARPEGGIO button you can access the ARPEGGIO STYLE screen without turning the arpeggio function on off N Use the cursor buttons to select a parameter 3 Usethe VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons
40. MIDI IN connector Here s how to synchronize the JUNO Gi s USB Memory Song Player with an external MIDI device The JUNO Gi s Digital Recorder cannot synchronize with an external MIDI device If the Tempo Link p 83 is on the JUNO Gi cannot synchronize to external MIDI device Press the MENU button Use the VALUE dial or the cursor button to select 4 System and press the ENTER button Press the 3 MIDI SYNC button Press the 4 SYNC button Use the cursor buttons to select the parameter you want to edit Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to edit the value For details on these settings refer 4 SYNC p 83 To save the settings press the WRITE button Transmitting Synchronization Data If you want an external MIDI device to synchronize to the operation of the JUNO Gi s USB Memory Song Player make the following settings Parameter Value USB Song Sync Mode MASTER MIDI Clock Output ON Behavior upon reception of GM System On or GS Reset When the JUNO Gi receives a GM System On or GS Reset message via MIDI it will switch to MIDI controller mode p 133 At this time the volume will be set to the value specified by SMF Level p 83 When the JUNO Gi receives a GM System Off message it will exit MIDI controller mode Using the Keyboard to Control Images V LINK V LINK 437 M JA 4 is a function that allows music and images to
41. Pinta eA SOR KRLRNARAKREE BAF CEBIER AC TEE AC ai y HEL TR B PU X Arts Cr VD saaw J x o o eram O x o o o o BIRIKA PBDE SSI SJ T11363 2006 X RIP EVE SJ TI1363 2006 AY BR e Countries e e Q o o e EH S BUE RRK A FE This symbol indicates that in EU countries this product must be collected separately from household waste as defined in each region Products bearing this symbol must not be discarded together with household waste Dieses Symbol bedeutet dass dieses Produkt in EU Landern getrennt vom Hausm ll gesammelt werden muss gem den regionalen Bestimmungen Mit diesem Symbol gekennzeichnete Produkte d rfen nicht zusammen mit den Hausm ll entsorgt werden Ce symbole indique que dans les pays de l Union europ enne ce produit doit tre collect s par ment des ordures m nag res selon les directives en vigueur dans chacun de ces pays Les produits portant ce symbole ne doivent pas tre mis au rebut avec les ordures m nag res Questo simbolo indica che nei paesi della Comunit europea questo prodotto deve essere smaltito separatamente dai normali rifiuti domestici secondo la legislazione in vigore in ciascun paese I prodotti che riportano questo simbolo non devono essere smaltiti insieme ai rifiuti
42. Portamento Mode 39 Portamento Start 39 Portamento Switch 37 Portamento Time 37 Portamento Type 39 16 Power Save Mode 80 POWER switch 16 Power Up 80 80 Preview 1 4 Note Number 80 Preview 1 4 Velocity 80 PREVIEW button 25 PREVIEW button 23 Preview Mode 80 Preview Octave 38 Preview 38 Preview 38 PRO EDIT screen 39 punch in out 95 R Rand Pitch Depth 39 83 Range 84 Range 84 Rale onien ie un nanea 43 Receive Bank Select 82 Receive Bender 37 Receive Breath Type 37 Receive Channel Press 37 Receive Effect Send 37 Receive Envelope Offset 37 Receive Exclusive 82 Receive Expression 37 Receive Filter Offset 37 Receive Foot Type 37 Receive GM2 System On 82 Receive GM System On 82 Receive GS 82 Receive Hold 1 37 Receive Modulation 37 Receive Poly
43. Post Filter Cutoff W P Noise Type W P Noise LPF W P Noise Level Disc Noise Type Disc Noise LPF Disc Noise Level Hum Noise Type Hum Noise LPF Hum Noise Level Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Value 1 9 Type of filter that follow OFF LPF HPF 200 8000 Hz WHITE PINK 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 0 127 LP SP RND 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 0 127 50 Hz 60 Hz 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Explanation Degrades the sound quality The sound quality grows poorer as this value is increased s the LoFi effect No filter is used Cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Center frequency of the filter Switch between white noise and pink noise Center frequency of the low pass filter applied to the white pink noise BYPASS no cut Volume of the white pink noise Type of record noise The frequency at which the noise is heard depends on the selected type Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter applied to the record noise If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Volume of the record noise Frequency of the hum noise Center frequency of the low pass filter applied to the hum noise BYPASS no cut Volume of the hum noise Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct
44. QR D RIDE 103 Song 103 DONO CODY a cou ode an RE 24025 01545 103 Song E EUR ERUNT KEEPER E 104 Song Optimize Saving space on the SD card 104 Saving the Current Settings to the Song Song Write 104 fer Effects in the Recorder Section 105 Insert Effect Banks and 105 Using Insert lt 106 Displaying the Recorder s Effects Screen 106 Turning each Effect 5 106 Selecting an Insert 106 Turning the Insert Effect Algorithms On Off 106 Editing the Insert Effects Settings EDIT 107 Saving Insert Effects Settings 107 Changing the Location of the Insert Effects LOCATION 108 Insert Effects Parameters 109 225 TST EEN 109 GUITAR Bankes EP 109 d 109 DINE cm 109 AMP m 110 FOUA 111 NOISE SUPPRESSOR REIR CURAS 111 PA qc 112 112
45. Selecting the RECORDER MENU TRACK EDIT Menu Editing a Track 1 Inthe RECORDER screen press the 3 MENU button These operations let you change the structure of your song by copying track data or moving it to another location The Recorder Menu screen will appear MEMO Track Copy Copying Data You can also access the Recorder Menu screen from the RECORDER screen by pressing the MENU button This operation copies data from the specified region of a track or the 2 Usethe VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select the menu entire track to another location You can copy the track data just once and press the ENTER button or copy the specified region of data several times in succession to the specified destination un Explanation Page If you want to use a phrase that s already been recorded on a track or 1 Song Edit Song function menu p 98 if you want to use the same phrase repeatedly you can use the Copy 2 Track Edit Track editing function menu p 98 operation to assemble your song efficiently 3 Utility Back up data format a card etc 78 Example 1 Copying twice to the same track 3 Usethe VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select the item and press the ENTER button For details on the items in each menu refer to the page references below START TO Tim SONG EDIT Menu END Menu Explanation Page Example 2 Copying twice to a different track Song Select Selects a song p 87 C
46. ZIS Y U 3jj3 bunip3 e P gt Ma ie Japsoray 1293 JSN xipuaddy Using the Included USB Memory Protector You can use the included USB memory protector to prevent theft of NOTE the USB memory connected to the JUNO Gi e You must use the included screws e You must use the included Allen wrench to tighten or remove the screws Using a tool that does not match the screw heads will damage them e Be careful not to over tighten the screws Doing so may damage the screw s head causing the wrench to rotate uselessly e To tighten the screws turn the Allen wrench clockwise To loosen the screws turn the Allen wrench counter clockwise loosen tighten e Keep the removed screws out of the reach of small children to ensure they are not swallowed accidentally e Never allow foreign objects e g coins wires to enter the USB memory box 130 Appendix COMPUTER MIDI CHORD ARPEGGIO MEMORY TEMPO TRANS OCTAVE POSE DOWN UP MIN MAX RECORDER KEYBOARD PHANTOM GUITAR MIC DEC INC OOO lt gt 0o00 SHIFT EXIT ENTER OOO LIST AUDIO INPUT LEVEL UNE TEVEL DIGITAL R
47. and press the ENTER button The System Menu window will appear Press the 2 KBD CTRL button Press the 2 PEDAL button Use the cursor 4 V buttons to select the Control Pedal Assign Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired value For details on the values that you can assign refer to Control Pedal Assign p 81 If you want to keep your settings press the 6 WRITE button Press the EXIT button a number of times to return to the previous screen Performing with a Microphone Vocoder Connecting a microphone and adjusting the Input level Connect your microphone and adjust the input level as described in Connecting the Equipment to Record and Adjusting the Input Level p 92 Using the Vocoder The JUNO Gi uses MFX to simulate a vocoder 1 Select PRESET 621 VOCODER Ens as the live set For details on how to selecta live set refer to Selecting Live Sets p 22 2 While you play the keyboard vocalize into the microphone The vocoder is applied to the sound from the microphone There will be no sound if you only play the keyboard without vocalizing into the microphone Gen Even for live sets other than the one listed above you can apply the vocoder effect by selecting 79 VOCODER as the effect Changing the Vocoder Settings 1 Select PRESET 621 VOCODER Ens as the live set 2 Press the MENU button 3 Usethe VALUE dial or
48. e 9 water or juice to enter this product Doing so may cause short circuits faulty operation or other malfunctions joe ee gt unplugged from the outlet Z N WARNING Immediately turn the power off remove the AC adaptor from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page when e The AC adaptor the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or e If smoke or unusual odor occurs e Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or e The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has become wet or e The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with
49. ejd DUOS Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Listening to the Demo Song The SD card included with the JUNO Gi contains demo songs for the Demo son list Digital Recorder The first time that you turn on the power the demo en 9 song in song data format will be loaded automatically Si REN nie adden 1 p the gt PLAY butt Song Name Composer Copyright ress tne utton 1 GonnaWantlt Scott Tibbs 2010 Roland Corporation The demo song will begin playing 9 gin praying 2 FARAWAY Mitsuru Sakaue 2010 Roland Corporation RECORDER 3 Late Nite Scott Tibbs 2010 Roland Corporation VIEW REC SOURCE SELECT AUDIO PEAK KEYBOARD INPUT O REPEAT lt lt lt lt gt gt 4 gt gt PLAY You can move the current location within the song in any of the following ways Operation Explanation Fast forward The song will fast forward while you hold down the P button Rewind The song will rewind while you hold down the 44 button Move to the begin ning of the song Press the 14 button 2 Press the Bl STOP button to stop The SD card contains three demo songs For details on how to select songs refer to Selecting and Playing a Song Song Select 87 e Use of the demo song supplied with this product for any purpose other than private personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder
50. which the delay time will not change USB memory is not detected Song files are not displayed Song files are not shown Audio files on USB memory won t play Not all the tracks of an SMF format 1 file are played Can t hear playback Sound from USB Audio is strange No sound from an external MIDI device Exclusive messages are not received When using sequencer software operating knobs or other controls does not affect the sound Could the effect switch be off Is each layer s Output Assign set to Check the send level to each effect Settings such as the delay time have an upper limit Check the format of your USB memory The JUNO Gi can use USB memory that is formatted as FAT Normally when you purchase USB memory it will be formatted as FAT so you can start using it immediately However USB memory that was formatted by a computer or other device as something other than FAT e g NTFS will not be recognized by the JUNO Gi Are the songs located in the USB memory s root directory The audio file s file type might not be a file type that can be played on the JUNO Gi The audio file may be damaged Could there be too many tracks In the case of SMF Format 1 some tracks may not play correctly if there are more than 16 tracks Check the following points Could Center Cancel p 129 be ON Does the JUNO Gi s MIDI transmit channel match the connected device s MIDI receive chan
51. you may still hear some sound when the power is switched on but this is normal and does not indicate a malfunction 3 Turnon the power of your speakers 4 Use the VOLUME knob to adjust the volume appropriately If you don t want the power to turn off automatically turn off the Auto Power Off setting The JUNO Gi will automatically turn off when no operation has been performed for certain length of time With the factory settings the power will turn off after 240 minutes When the power turns off any unsaved modifications that you ve made in the settings will be lost If you want to keep the setting changes you ve made make sure to save them beforehand If you want to leave the power on at all times turn off the Auto Power Off setting as described below Press the MENU button Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select 4 System and then press the ENTER button Press the 1 GENERAL button Use the cursor buttons to select Auto Power Off Use the VALUE dial to change the setting to the OFF setting Press the 6 WRITE button to save the setting About the Display Adjusting the Display Contrast Turning the Display Backlight On Off NTRAST Knob To reduce battery consumption you can turn off the displ
52. 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 OFF ON 0 127 The filter will change toward a higher frequency The filter will change toward a lower frequency Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Adjusts the degree of phase shift of the left and right sounds when the wah effect is applied Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Output Level Explanation Turns Drive on off Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Selects the vowel Frequency at which the two vowels switch Effect depth LFO reset on off Determines whether the LFO for switching the vowels is reset by the input signal ON or not OFF Volume level at which reset is applied Parameter Manual Low Gain High Gain Pan Level 10 SPEAKER SIMULATOR Value 0 49 50 51 100 15 15 dB 15 15 dB L64 63R 0 127 Explanation Point at which Vowel 1 2 switch Vowel 1 will have a longer duration Vowel 1 and 2 will be of equal duration Vowel 2 will have a longer duration Gain of the low frequency range Gain of the high frequency range Stereo location of the output Output level Simulates the speaker type and microphone settings used to record the speaker sound Lin Parameter Speaker Type Mic Setting Mic Level Direct Level Level Specifications of each Speaker Type Value 1 2 3 0 127 0 127 0 127 See the table right L out Explanation Type o
53. 1 be performed together By using MIDI to connect two or more V LINK compatible devices you can easily enjoy performing a wide range of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music 2 performance For example if you use the JUNO Gi in conjunction with EDIROL P 10 3 you ll be able to do the following things e Use the JUNO Gi s keyboard the far left octave to switch images e Use the JUNO Gi s pitch bend lever to control the image playback speed e You can use the JUNO Gi s knobs to control the brightness and hue of the image When V LINK is ON the keys in the leftmost octave of the keyboard cannot be used to produce sound Connection example As an example we will use a setup in which the JUNO Gi is connected 4 to the EDIROL P 10 Use a MIDI cable to connect the JUNO Gi s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of the EDIROL P 10 MIDI OUT connector You can t perform V LINK communication via USB Turning the V LINK ON OFF 1 Press the V LINK button so it s lit The V LINK screen will appear and the V LINK setting will be on Operations on the JUNO Gi By operating the JUNO Gi s keyboard and knobs you control the image along with your performance on the JUNO Gi Keyboard Knob Lever Explanation Keys leftmost octave CUTOFF knob RESONANCE knob REVERB knob Pitch Be
54. 25 Selecting Tones or Rhythm lt 25 Dividing the Keyboard into Two Areas to Play Separate TONGS SPLIT 26 Changing the Tone or Volume the LAYER SPLIT Screen 26 Changing the Split Point 26 Synthesizer 2 Performance Functions Changing the Keyboard Settings 27 Changing the Pitch in One octave Steps OCTAVE DOWN UP BUttON ace cate 27 Transposing the Pitch Semitone Steps TRANSPOSE Button 27 Adjusting the Keyboard 27 Changing the Temperament to an Arabian or Other Scale eic 27 Controlling Your 28 D Beam RR 28 D Beam Controller 05 28 DURON oes suae so ERE EE EEEE VENEESEEN E 28 Pitch Berid Modulation 29 SOUND MODIFYIKIIOD berti ert ERROR IER 29 Modifying the Tonal Character CUTOPFI BESONANCE 2 o oy EP sucess 29 Adding Reverberation REVERB 29 Adjusting the Level of the Low Middle and High Frequency Ranges EO LOW MID HIGH 29 PSU 30 Holding Notes HOLD Pedal 30 Adding Expression to Your Performance CONTROL Pe
55. 5 RHYTHM button Cul The RHYTHM PATTERN screen will appear You can also set the recorder tempo in the TEMPO window that Cu appears when you press the TEMPO button p 32 You can also access the RHYTHM PATTERN screen by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the RHYTHM PATTERN button Keyboard Tempn 178 Recorder Temro ize About the RHYTHM PATTERN screen NNI cose 1 2 3 If you press the 5 LINK button to assign a check mark v the keyboard tempo will match the recorder tempo This is convenient HHYTHM when you want to play arpeggios in time with the tempo of the recorder s song PRST OUI ROCKI IN witchin ween Pattern M n Ehsthm Set PRSTI881 Standard 1 5 tc g bet ee atte ode d d ARG EDITT IMPORT Arrangement Mode 4 1 Inthe RHYTHM PATTERN screen use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Pattern Arrange field Num d Name Explanation 2 Usethe VALUE dial or the DEC INC button to select the _ _ _ mode 1 Pattern Pattern shown for Pattern mode Arrange Arrange indicates Arrangement mode Mode Explanation ponam Indicates the group n dein ie Pattern Mode Number die Rame ines rangernentane de be This mode is used to play patterns individually The pattern is Pattern you select will continue playing from the beginning to the end Recorder of the song You can t make the pattern switch automatically 3 Tempo Indicates the tempo of the Digita
56. 50 56 LOFI NOISE p 68 05 SUPER FILTER p 51 57 LOFI COMPRESS p 69 06 STEP FILTER p 51 58 LOFI RADIO p 69 07 ENHANCER p 51 59 TELEPHONE p 69 08 AUTO WAH p 52 60 PHONOGRAPH p 69 09 HUMANIZER p 52 PITCH 3 types 10 SPEAKER SIMULATOR p 52 61 PITCH SHIFTER p 69 MODULATION 12 types 62 2VOICE PITCH SHIFTER p 70 11 PHASER p 53 63 STEP PITCH SHIFTER p 70 12 STEP PHASER p 53 REVERB 2 types 13 MULTI STAGE PHASER p 53 64 REVERB 71 14 INFINITE PHASER 54 65 GATED REVERB 71 15 RING MODULATOR 54 COMBINATION 12 types 16 STEP RING MODULATOR 54 66 OVERDRIVE gt CHORUS p 71 17 TREMOLO p 54 67 OVERDRIVE gt FLANGER 72 18 AUTO PAN p 55 68 OVERDRIVE gt DELAY 72 19 STEP PAN p 55 69 DISTORTION gt CHORUS p 72 20 SLICER p 55 70 DISTORTION gt FLANGER 72 21 p 56 71 DISTORTION DELAY p 72 22 VK ROTARY p 56 72 ENHANCER CHORUS 73 CHORUS 12 types 73 ENHANCER gt FLANGER 73 23 CHORUS p 56 74 ENHANCER gt DELAY 73 24 FLANGER p 57 75 CHORUS gt DELAY 73 25 STEP FLANGER p 57 76 FLANGER gt DELAY p 74 26 HEXA CHORUS p 58 77 CHORUS gt FLANGER p 74 27 TREMOLO CHORUS 58 PIANO 1 type 28 SPACE D p 58 78 SYMPATHETIC RESONANCE 75 29 3D CHORUS p 59 VOCODER 1 type 30 3D FLANGER p 59 Wi C ee 79 VOCODER 75 31 3D STEP FLANGER p 59 32 2BAND CHORUS p 60 33 2BAND FLANGER p 60 34 2BAND STEP FLANGER p 60 DYNAMICS 8 type
57. 6 buttons located below the display execute various functions function buttons and their operation will differ depending on the screen The functions are shown in the bottom of the screen Moving the Cursor and the corresponding function buttons will light When indications such as 6 EXIT appear in this manual the numeral indicates the button name and the text in parentheses indicates the function name displayed in the screen A single screen or window displays multiple parameters or items for selection To edit the setting of a parameter move the cursor to the value of that parameter To select an item move the cursor to that item When selected with the cursor a parameter value or other selection is highlighted KEYBOARD GUITAR STRINGS BRASS OCALZ RHYTHN PIANO ORGAN BASS PLUCKED ORCHESTRA WIND CHOIR BATTERY Move the cursor with 4 V 4 gt cursor buttons If you hold down one cursor button while you also press the cursor button for the opposite direction the cursor will move more rapidly in the direction of the first pressed cursor button Changing a Value To change the value use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons BATTERY SYNTH FX SPECIAL OTHERS LIVE SET SHIFT ENTER By holding down the SHIFT button and pressing another button you can access the screen for making settings related to that button In other words the SHIFT button provides a sh
58. 890 3700 For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of EMC Directive 2004 108 EC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept
59. B Function button Button Function Page 1 REPEAT The region you specified A B will be u assigned as the repeat region The region you specified A B will be 2 AUTO assigned as the auto punch in out region p 95 The region you specified A B will be assigned as the auto punch in out region The A B region will be assigned as the repeat region 3 R amp A1 p 96 The region you specified A B will be assigned as the auto punch in out region One measure before and after the A B region will be assigned as the repeat region 4 R amp A2 p 96 5 CLEAR The location data at the cursor will be u cleared 6 EDIT The track edit menu will open p 98 4 Press the 1 REPEAT button The region you specified will be assigned as the repeat region Repeat Playback E Time A B 5 Press EXIT button to close the SETTING screen In the RECORDER screen and A lt B will be displayed e If you want to cancel the repeat press the REPEAT A b button once again The repeat settings will be cancelled and the A 4 B will be unlit e If you want to preserve the repeat region you specified press the WRITE button to save the song Recording Song Production Flow A general outline of the song production workflow is shown below Create N ew Song This manual explains each function in detail but when you re creating Creating a New So
60. CY Balance W R out Balance D Value 0 127 L64 63R 0 2600 msec note 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Explanation Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Stereo location of the overdrive sound Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Output Level 69 DISTORTION CHORUS The parameters are essentially the same as in 66 OVERDRIVE CHORUS with the exception of the following two Overdrive Drive gt Distortion Drive Overdrive Pan gt Distortion Pan Lin O L out Balance D J Balance W R in O H out Balance D 70 DISTORTION FLANGER The parameters are essentially the same as in 67 OVERDRIVE gt FLANGER with the exception of the following two Overdrive Drive Distortion Drive Overdrive Pan Distortion Pan Balance D L out o Feedback Balance W O G R out Balance D 71 DISTORTION DELAY The parameters are essentially the same as 68 OVERDRIVE g
61. EXEC button If a song is protected the song protect symbol PROTECT is shown in the RECORDER screen To turn off the protect setting perform the same procedure once again Song Optimize Saving space on the SD card When you perform track editing or punch in out the previous data will remain on the SD card without being erased In some cases this unneeded data may occupy significant space on the SD card unnecessarily using up the card s capacity This will reduce the available recording time By executing the Song Optimize operation you can erase unneeded data from the SD card and increase the amount of space that s available Choose Recorder Menu gt 1 Song Edit gt Song Optimize p 98 The display will ask Optimize Song If you are sure you want to execute the song optimize operation press the 5 EXEC button If you decide not to execute this operation press the 6 CANCEL button The Song Optimize operation will be executed When optimization is completed the display will indicate Song Optimize Completed CHED The Song Optimize operation erases the unneeded and unplayable audio data from all V tracks n some cases it may take an appreciable amount of time for optimization to be completed This is not a malfunction Don t turn off the power before optimization has ended e If you ve executed the optimize operation you won t be able to return to the state prior to optimization by
62. Explanation Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Tone 0 127 Sound quality of the Overdrive effect Amp Sw OFF ON Turns the Amp Simulator on off Type of guitar amp SMALL Small amp Amp Type BUILT IN Single unit type amp 2 STACK Large double stack amp 3 STACK Large triple stack amp Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the output sound Level 0 127 Output Level 38 VS DISTORTION This is a distortion effect that provides heavy distortion The parameters are the same as for 37 VS OVERDRIVE L in gt L out J PanL H Distortion Amp Simulator CY Pan R R in gt R out 61 spunos gt suompunj 197159 3yj3 bunip3 E gt La 1 Ua ES E e Japsoray 23161 SPITE 1 4 950 xipuaddy 39 GUITAR AMP SIMULATOR This is an effect that simulates the sound of a guitar amplifier L in Hin Parameter Pre Amp Sw Pre Amp Type Pre Amp Volume Pre Amp Master Pre Amp Gain Pre Amp Bass Pre Amp Middle Pre Amp Treble Pre Amp Presence Pre Amp Bright Speaker Sw Speaker Type Mic Setting Mic Level Direct Level Pan Level 62 Value OFF ON JC 120 CLEAN TWIN MATCH DRIVE BG LEAD MS1959I MS1959Il MS1959I ll S
63. List The LAYER SPLIT screen will appears When you move the cursor to the tone number field and press the ENTER LIST button the tone list will appear Use the VALUE dial to 2062 PEST Tone 8 I PEST Tone select a tone and then press the ENTER button to confirm Strings 5 5 86 amp KeyGrand 1 103 LOWHERe2 7 198 PEST 2d 1 Hood Stri 2 M b lt gt rr EX Japsoray 23161 12913 Auditioning a Tone PREVIEW Button In the tone list screen you can hold down the PREVIEW button to audition the tone 2 SEN ress tne utton to return to tne previous screen PERST Tone If you want to save these settings save the live set K 14 3 Fi 1 1 1 L For details refer to Saving a Live Set WRITE 35 4 buos 950 Layer Tone Tone Tone Level Switch Number Group Type Setting the Octave for Each Layer In the LAYER SPLIT screen you can press the OCTAVE DOWN CH button or UP button to raise or lower by an octave the key range of the layer at the position of the cursor jake You can also access the LAYER SPLIT screen by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the SPLIT button xipuaddy 25 Dividing the Keyboard into Two Areas to Play Separate
64. Midi Gain HELGEJE 6 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter that you want to edit 7 Usethe VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to edit the value 8 When you ve finished editing press the EXIT button a number of times to return to the LIVE SET PLAY screen Saving your effect settings Changes you make to the live set s effect settings will be lost when you select another live set If you want to keep the changes press the WRITE button to save your live set settings as a User Live Set p 35 Signal Flow and Parameters EFFECT ROUTING Here you can make overall settings for effects such as the output destination and level of the various signals HF 3 m SE 1 L 6 ug The parameters listed below in 7 9 11 can be edited for each of the three multi effects MFX1 MFX2 Num ber 10 11 12 Parameter Layer Select Layer Output Assign MFX Select Layer Output Level Layer Chorus Send Level Layer Reverb Send Level MFX Type MFX Structure MFX Output Level MFX Chorus Send Level MFX Reverb Send Level Chorus Type Value UPPER 1 UPPER 2 LOWER 1 LOWER 2 Explanation The layer for which to make settings Specifies how the unprocessed sound of each layer will be output MFX L R 1 2 0 127 0 127 0 127 1 3
65. RECORDER PRESET Patches that cannot be rewritten 4 E a a y Patches that can be saved in SER internal memory 2 d i THPUT RHYTHH 12445 6 SONG 2 can saved TS 7 Press the 14 Song Top button to move to the M i d beginning of the song Giaa i 8 Press the REC button and then the PLAY button to 1 Inthe RECORDER screen Press the 1 MODE button several start mastering times to make the display indicate MASTERING 9 When you finished mastering press the STOP button FETELE Target Track WeoTecch The mastering data was stored in the V track that you had specified in 2 01 08 00 00 08 oo TEES step 2 BI pem Export message will appear EHTTHH LE EFFECTS 10 If you want to convert to the audio file press the 6 EXEC HBanr MENN TEE button If you want to cancel this operation press the EXIT button 2 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Target Track field and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC Press the 6 EXEC button the file type setting screen appears buttons to specify the mastering destination track and Press the EXIT button the mastering operation will cancel and return V track to the mastering screen amaa Target Track ire _ 11 Assign a name to the audio file b
66. S 113 COMPRESSOR 113 TTE 113 M 113 FCT RO 113 PHASER 114 PLANGER S resp bos 114 TREMOLO 114 spo 114 sn 114 yn D 114 v 115 115 REVERE 115 DE MU KE me 116 5 5 READ RUE REMANERE 116 DIMI ER M 116 Using Reverb 117 Selecting the Reverb Effect iere es nar t e sews 117 Adjusting the Reverb Depth for the Tracks Rhythm and mures 117 Reverb Parameters 117 Mastering MASTERING Mode 118 Mastering 118 Editing the Mastering Tool Kit Settings EDIT 119 Saving the Mastering Tool Kit Settings WRITE 119 Mastering Tool Kit Parameters 120 o ed oos re 120 120 JIBAND COMP 120 120 120 OUTPUT Sc 120
67. SD Card 1 Useacommercially available SD card reader to open the SD card on your computer 2 Copy drag and drop the entire backed up ROLAND folder from your computer to the SD card e When you copy the backed up data to the SD card all data that was previously on the SD card will be lost e You must copy the entire ROLAND folder The system will not operate correctly if you copy only some of the files in the ROLAND folder 3 Remove the SD card from the SD card reader as described in step 4 of Backing up SD card data to your computer 79 spunos gt suonpunj 197159 3jj3 bunip3 2 5 1 12410 Japsoray jebig uJ293jeq unm uy FEY CIP Kiowa 950 xipuaddy System Settings SYSTEM Here you can make System settings that affect the operation of the eere E entire JUNO Gi such as the tuning and how MIDI messages will be received Volume of the USB audio from the computer M a ki n M stem Setti n S USB Audio Level connected to the USB COMPUTER connector g y 0 Selects the USB audio that will be sent to the computer when connected via USB 1 Press the MENU button MIX The output of the JUNO Gi s OUTPUT jacks 2 Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select The sound selected by AUDIO INPUT p 93 4 System and press the ENTER button USB Audio To Computer The sound se
68. Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Windows is known officially as Microsoft Windows operating system Apple Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in U S and other countries MMP Moore Microprocessor Portfolio refers to a patent portfolio concerned with microprocessor architecture which was developed by Technology Properties Limited TPL Roland has licensed this technology from the TPL Group MPEG Layer 3 audio compression technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS Corporation and THOMSON Multimedia Corporation The SD logo S and SDHC logo 52 are trademarks of SD 3C LLC MatrixQuest MatrixQuest 2010 TEPCO UQUEST LTD All rights reserved The JUNO Gi s USB functionality uses MatrixQuest middleware technology from TEPCO UQUEST LTD All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners For China A XJ da P PLC E H pn m EAS TET AS BEF 2007 4 3 H 1 ADU AZ RIBUS Pe TE UP ES ES PS ATIS Fa Y fi hs DEA DIE PEKA BS SR ERAT RR Pn BEA TEED PIS ARTE SPI Bulls HIE
69. a 1 step This step number indicates the order of each pattern within the arrangement 2 Press the 2 DELETE button A 2 5 This indicates the rhythm pattern placed at each step The selected step will be deleted This indicates the number of measures in the rhythm 3 Meas pattern INSERT STEP 0 4 Current This indicates the number of measures at the cursor This operation inserts a step and moves subsequent steps backward Meas location buone one Q N Function buttons Button Explanation This operation clears all of the steps that you input 1 CLR ALL returning them to the blank condition 2 E b lt m This operation deletes an unwanted step and joins the two sections 2 DELETE This operation inserts a step and moves subsequent 3 INSERT steps backward by one 1 Use the cursor V buttons to select the step at which you want to insert a pattern 4 GROUP This operation switches the pattern group wn ve sel 2 This operation auditions the currently selected In the example shown above select step 5 PREVIEW pattern 2 Pressthe 3 INSERT button Japsoray 23161 6 WRITE This operation saves the arrangement A step containing the same pattern as the step you selected in step 1 will be inserted and the subsequent st
70. adds reverberation and other spatial effects Set the REVERB TYPE to choose from a variety of different types of reverb sound CHORUS p 115 REVERB p 115 MIC Bank This is a multi effect designed for vocals It provides the basic effects needed for vocals Algorithm COMPRESSOR ENHANCER EQUALIZER NOISE SUPPRESSOR DELAY LINE Bank CMP ENH EQ NS DLY Explanation This compresses the overall output signal when the input volume level exceeds a set value By adding sounds which are out of phase with the direct sound this effect enhances the definition of the sound and pushes it to the forefront Adjusts the volume levels for different frequencies in the low frequency to high frequency ranges Low and high midrange settings feature parametric equalization This effect reduces the noise and hum A delayed sound is added to the normal guitar sound producing a thicker tone with a distinctive ambience Page p 116 p 116 p 111 p 111 115 These effects are for stereo line input The LINE EXT bank uses the same effects as the mastering tool kit Algorithm INPUT 3BANDCOMP Compressor MIXER LIMITER OUTPUT IN CMP MIX LIM OUT Explanation This divides the original sound into three frequency ranges low mid and high This compresses the overall output signal when the input volume level exceeds a set value Adjusts the volume
71. center will be minimized This allows you to mute a specific part of a song and play it yourself or to minimize the vocal of a song while you perform that part Depending on the file type of the song you ll be able to perform the following operations Function File Type Explanation Mutes the specified part For details on specifying the part to be muted refer to Detailed Settings for Minus One p 129 SMF Minus One Diminishes the volume of sounds that are located in the center such as the vocal or the Center melody instrument Audio files Cancel For some songs the vocal might not be minimized successfully 1 Inthe SONG LIST screen press the 4 C CAN MINUS button to turn on When you play back the song the specified part will be muted if the song is an SMF If the song is an audio file the sounds that are located in the center will be diminished in volume 2 To turn off Minus One or Center Cancel press the 4 C CAN MINUS button so it s extinguished Detailed Settings for Center Cancel You can choose from types of the center cancel function 1 Inthe SONGLIST screen press the 5 SETUP button 2 Usethecursor buttons to move the cursor to the Center Cancel Type field 3 Usethe VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the Center Cancel Type Parameter Value Explanation MID HI Mid frequency and high frequency sounds localized in the center will be eliminated Center C
72. change automatically as the song progresses and more About MIDI Connectors The JUNO Gi is equipped with the following two types of MIDI connectors each of which has the following role MIDI IN connector This connector receives MIDI messages that sent from an external MIDI device When the JUNO Gi receives MIDI messages it can respond by playing notes switching sounds etc MIDI OUT connector This connector transmits MIDI messages to an external MIDI device Use it when you want to control an external MIDI device Using the JUNO Gi as a Master Keyboard MIDI Controller Mode You can connect external MIDI devices to the JUNO Gi s MIDI OUT connector and use the JUNO Gi to control the connected MIDI devices Connection example MIDI sound module MIDI IN connector MIDI OUT connector Roland e Mm mme eo aed Mni 1 Pressthe MIDI CTRL button so it s lit The MIDI CONTROLLER screen will appear and the JUNO Gi will be in MIDI Controller mode When you press one of the 0 9 buttons the program change message assigned to that button will be transmitted You can use the knobs sliders or buttons to tran
73. content of the reverb sound will be reduced Adjusts the amount of damping applied to the frequency range selected with LF Damp With a setting of 0 there will be no reduction of the reverb s low frequency content Adjusts the frequency above which the high frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced or damped Adjusts the amount of damping applied to the frequency range selected with HF Damp With a setting of 0 there will be no reduction of the reverb s high frequency content Reverb Delay Cuts the high frequency range of the sound coming into the reverb Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies Output level of reverberation Time length of reverberation Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect when the Character setting is 6 or 7 77 spunos bun e og suonpunj 1971594 e gt Ua e Japsoray 23161 1293 FEY CPUs Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Utility UTILITY The Utility menu lets you back up your data and format a card Restoring JUNO Gi Settings from SD Displaying the UTILITY MENU Card User Restore 1 the MENU button Here s how to restore backed up user data from SD card into the 2 Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select JUNO Gi 5 Utility and press the ENTER bu
74. data MIDI data played back by your DAW software can that are supported play the JUNO Gi s sound generator section Before you make connections to other equipment turn down the volume and turn off the power off on all equipment in order to Connecting the JU NO Gi to Your Computer prevent malfunction and or speaker damage A USB cable is not included To purchase one please contact the 1 Install the USB driver on your computer dealer where you purchased the JUNO Gi Use a USB cable that supports USB 2 0 Hi Speed The USB driver is on the included CD ROM JUNO Gi DRIVER CD ROM The driver installation procedure will depend on your system so be Use a computer with a USB connector that supports USB 2 0 sure to carefully read the Readme file on the CD ROM Hi Speed 2 UseaUSBcable sold separately to connect the JUNO Gi to Switch on the JUNO Gi s power before you start up the DAW your computer software on your computer Do not switch the JUNO Gi on off while your DAW software is running 132 Connecting an External MIDI Device MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface is a standard specification that allows musical data to be transferred between electronic musical instruments and computers If a MIDI cable is connected between devices equipped with MIDI connectors you ll be able to play multiple devices from a single MIDI keyboard perform ensembles using multiple MIDI instruments program the settings to
75. dial or the cursor 44 V buttons to select a song in that are available Sound modules that are compatible with the list GM2 will correctly play back music data that carries either the GM or GM2 logo The original GM which does not include the GM2 enhancements is sometimes called GM1 in order to distinguish it from the newer set of recommendations 128 3 Press the PLAY STOP button to play stop the song ASSIGNABLE SONG ie SONG PLAY LIST STOP 1 2 e When you press the PLAY STOP button selected song file will play e If you press the PLAY STOP button during playback it will stop e If you press the PLAY STOP button once again playback will resume from where it was stopped Adjusting the Volume of the Song Player 1 Pressthe 3 LEVEL button 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Audio Level or SMF Level field and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to adjust the volume Parameter Value Explanation Audio Level 0 127 Volume at which the USB Memory Song Player will play audio files Volume at which the USB Memory Song SMP Beye id Player will play SMF data 3 Press the 6 CLOSE button to close the setting window Center Cancel Minus One If you use Center Cancel Minus One when playing back an SMF song the specified part will be muted silenced if you use it when playing back an audio file the sounds located in the
76. domestici Ai sensi dell art 13 del D Lgs 25 luglio 2005 n 151 Este s mbolo indica que en los pa ses de la Uni n Europea este producto debe recogerse aparte de los residuos dom sticos tal como est regulado en cada zona Los productos con este s mbolo no se deben depositar con los residuos dom sticos Este s mbolo indica que nos pa ses da UE a recolha deste produto dever ser feita separadamente do lixo dom stico de acordo com os regulamentos de cada regi o Os produtos que apresentem este s mbolo nao dever o ser eliminados juntamente com o lixo dom stico Dit symbool geeft aan dat in landen van de EU dit product gescheiden van huishoudelijk afval moet worden aangeboden zoals bepaald per gemeente of regio Producten die van dit symbool zijn voorzien mogen niet samen met huishoudelijk afval worden verwijderd Dette symbol angiver at i EU lande skal dette produkt opsamles adskilt fra husholdningsaffald som defineret i hver enkelt region Produkter med dette symbol m ikke smides ud sammen med husholdningsaffald Dette symbolet indikerer at produktet behandles som spesialavfall i EU land iht til retningslinjer for den enkelte regionen og ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall Produkter som er merket med dette symbolet m ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall oO O O O O 608068090 Symbolen anger att i EU l nder m ste den har produkten kasseras separat fran hush llsavfall 1 enlig
77. for one song is approximately 12 hours 2 GB The above recording times are approximate e The above recording times are for when only one track is used For example if you record using all eight tracks the available time for each track will be one eighth of the time listed e Since the 2 GB SD card included with the JUNO Gi contains a demo song the available recording time will be shorter than listed above e With the Track Export function a maximum of approximately 6 hours and 40 minutes worth of monaural data approximately 3 hours and 20 minutes worth of stereo data can be output LINE INPUT jacks 10 dBu GUITAR MIC INPUT jack GUITAR 20 dBu MIC 40 dBu Insert Effects 3 banks Guitar Mic Line Mastering Tool Kit Reverb File Format Number Of Songs External Memory Audio File WAV AIFF MP3 Standard MIDI File format 0 1 99 Songs USB MEMORY supports USB 2 0 Hi Speed Flash Memory Sold Separately Rhythm Pattern Arpeggiator Chord Memory Controllers Display External Memory Connectors Power Supply Current draw Battery Life for Continuous Use Dimensions Weight Accessories Options User 99 Song Digital Recorder 99 Preset 128 User 64 Preset 17 Pitch Bend Modulation Lever D Beam Controller 51 52 Buttons Sound Modify Knob x 6 240 x 64 dots graphic LCD with backlit SD SDHC Card OUTPUT Jacks L MONO R 1 4 inch phone type PHONE
78. gt E z gt E Turning the knob toward the To M LOW Low Gain 15 0 15 right will boost the low range knob dB sound while turning it toward the left will attenuate the low range m sound 2 DA holding down the SHIFT button and moving a knob you can Adjusts the middle range souna S check the current value without modifying the setting Turning the knob toward the gt MID Mid Gain 15 0 15 right will boost the middle range NOTE knob dB sound while turning it toward Depending on the settings of the live set turning a knob might not 2 affect the sound in some cases Adjusts the high range sound di e h T Ch Turning the knob toward the zi 0 ng the lonal Character HIGH p Gain 15 0 15 right will boost the high range gh Gain ME 5 knob dB sound while turning it toward the ICUTOFF RESO NANCE Knobs left will attenuate the high range sound You can use these knobs to adjust the filter that cuts or boosts specific SH frequency regions of the sound EL These affect the following parameters of the currently selected live set The equalizer applies not only to the Synthesizer but also to the sound of the Digital Recorder and the USB Memory Song Player R Knee Parameters males PEXPIQnaHOD e You can use the System setting 3 MST EQ 81 to make more Adjusts the frequency cutoff detailed equalizer settings frequency at which the filter b
79. interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 143 spunos bun e og suonpunj uan lt 5 e D v N mD rr ay A wn y p3 feld 9y 5 1 12410 Japsoray 1 33 4 4 Kiowa 950 gt D 5 gt gt 144 MIDI Implementation Chart Date June 1 2010 Model JUNO Gi Version 1 00 Basic Default 1 16 Channel Changed 1 16 Default Mode 3 Mode 3 Messages Mono Poly Mode 3 4 M 1 Alte red Note 0 127 Number True Voice Velocity Note Off Key s Channel s Bank select Modulation Breath type Foot type Portamento time Data entry Volume Panpot Expression Tone Modify 1 General purpose controller 1 Tone Modify 2 General purpose controller 2 Tone Modify 3 General purpose controller 3 Tone Modify 4 General purpose controller 4 Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Legato foot switch Resonance Release time Attack time Cutoff Decay time Vibrato rate Vibrato depth Vibrato delay Tone Modify 5 General purpose controller 5 Tone Modify 6 General purpose controller 6 Control Change Tone Modify 7 General purpose controller 7 Tone Modify 8 General purpose controller 8 Portamento control Reverb General purpose effects 1 Cho
80. is an approximation CHD e In order to reduce battery consumption you can turn off the display backlight when it s not required Refer to Turning the Display Backlight On Off p 17 e The System setting Power Save Mode p 80 lets you choose to turn 3 Insert the batteries into the battery compartment off the backlight when no operation has been performed fora certain length of time With the factory settings the backlight will Make sure to observe the correct polarity orientation for each dim after five minutes battery when inserting it e The System setting Auto Power Off p 80 lets you choose to turn off the power automatically when no operation has been performed for a certain length of time With the factory settings the power will turn off after 240 minutes Removing Batteries To remove the batteries switch off the JUNO Gi s power remove the battery case cover and remove the batteries as described in Installing 4 Replace the battery compartment cover When turning the unit upside down get a bunch of newspapers or magazines and place them under the four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls Also you should try to orient the unit so Batteries no buttons or controls get damaged When turning the unit upside down handle with care to avoid dropping it or allowing it to fall or tip over Note the following when using batteries Do not use
81. layer of a live set specify the Octave p 36 and then save the live set In the LAYER SPLIT screen you can press the OCTAVE DOWN button or UP button to raise or lower by an octave the key range of the layer at the position of the cursor Transposing the Pitch in Semitone Steps TRANSPOSE Button Transpose is a function that changes the pitch of the keyboard in semitone steps You can use this to play transposing instruments such as trumpet or clarinet at the pitches written in the score Hold down the TRANSPOSE button and press the or button TRANS POSE OCTAVE DOWN UP Specify the amount of transposition in semitone steps G F 5 6 semitones A setting window will open when you press one of these buttons and will close shortly after you release the button When any value other than is set the TRANSPOSE button will light By holding down the TRANSPOSE button and pressing the and buttons simultaneously you can reset the value C There is a single Transpose setting for the entire JUNO Gi The changed setting will be remembered even if you switch live sets This setting cannot be saved The value will be reset to C when you power up the JUNO Gi Adjusting the Keyboard Touch You can set the instrument so all notes sound at a fixed volume regardless of the strength velocity at which you play the keys or adjust the way in which the keyboard resp
82. memory into the USB MEMORY slot as shown in the illustration below Copying Song Files from Your Computer to Usb Memory You ll need to copy the audio files from your computer to the root level of your USB memory Copy to a USB drive 4 Never insert remove a USB memory while this unit s power is aF on Doing so may corrupt the unit s data or the data on the USB i memory MP3 WAV AIFF SMF MID 4 Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in until it is firmly in place GI e If the USB memory contains numerous song files it may take some e Use USB memory sold by Roland We cannot guarantee operation if time for loading to be completed other products are used maximum of 99 song files can be handled Playing Along with an Song File from Song files that can be played USB Memory SMF 1 Press the SONG LIST button 1 Format Foran SMF format 1 song that has more than ASSIGNABLE SONG LAYER 16 tracks all of the tracks might not play back MA correctly in some cases VJ e Maximum of approximately 240 KB S1 SONG PLAY File Size this will change somewhat depending on the LIST STOP content of the SMF System Exclusive Packet size must be 512 or less When you press the SONG LIST button the display will list the song files in USB memory MP3 Format MPEG 1 audio layer 3 GHI The songs will be ordered by their file name in
83. note at the cursor location press the DEC or ENTER 1971594 button To delete all notes in the vertical axis of the cursor location press Group Explanation E the 3 CLR STEP button These are patterns saved within the JUNO Gi s e To delete all notes the horizontal axis of the cursor location press 4 These patterns In d A a the 4 CLR NOTE button These are patterns saved within a song These SONG patterns cannot be used in another song 5 Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the pattern number into which you want to write your edited pattern 6 Pressthe 6 WRITE button A confirmation message will appear 7 Press the 5 EXEC button to write to the patch To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button Never turn off the power while saving is in progress gt iM et 3 3 14 2 sayy 1933 WYMYY FEY CP Kiowa 950 xipuaddy 125 Importing SMF on Your Computer to a Rhythm Pattern IMPORT You can create your own original Rhythm Pattern by importing SMF on your computer CHED You ll need a commercially available SD card reader in order to perform this procedure 1 Using your computer and a commercially available SD card reader copy your Standard MIDI File MID into the SD card s IROLAND IMPORT folder 2 Insert the SD card into t
84. of the high range Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W D0 100W direct sound D and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output Level current setting to a specified new L in o L out Balance D J Balance W Time Control Delay Y Balance W Feedback H in O R out Balance D Parameter Value Explanation Delay Time 2600 Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Adjusts the speed which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to a specified new Acceleration 0 15 setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Adjusts the amount of the delay that s fed back into the effect EIE Negative settings invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you do 200 8000 Hz BYPASS not want to filterout any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS L64 63R Stereo location of the delay Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W D0 100W direct sound D and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 67 spunos gt TTE 197159 3yj3 bunip3 gt E gt a gt Ua ES E e 3 3 4 2 Japsoray 23161 1 4 950 xipuaddy 55 TAPE EC
85. recorded or duplicated freely e Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit e Use of the demo song supplied with this product for any purpose other than private personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law Additionally this data must not be copied nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the SD card Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored internal memory SD card and USB memory once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you w
86. recorded select a parameter and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the value When you press a button the input corresponding to the button you Parameter Value Explanation pressed will be switched on Adjusts the internal digital input level e When you press the same button again its input will be switched off For example if you apply an insert effect to zi e Multiple buttons cannot be on at the same time the input sound this may increase the internal Input Level 0 127 digital level In such cases play the input sound 3 Settheinput level and reverb Use the cursor buttons to and adjust the Input Level value so that the select a parameter and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC level meter in the screen does not reach the maximum position CLIP is shown when the buttons to set the value level meter reaches the maximum position Parameter Value Explanation Level of signal sent from the input sound to Reverb 0 127 reverb Adjusts the internal digital input level u1 d For example if you apply an insert effect to the sound of the synthesizer this may increase 4 Press the 6 CLOSE button to close the AUDIO INPUT Level Pare the internal digital level In such cases play SELECT window nput Leve z the keyboard and adjust the Input Level value 50 level the does not reach
87. region between the points A and B you specified 2 AB If you want to copy move erase the A B region you must set point A and point B beforehand p 90 The display will ask Erase OK If you re sure you want to execute press the 5 EXEC button If you decide to cancel press the 6 CANCEL button 100 Track Exchange Exchanging Data This operation exchanges data between two tracks Example Exchanging the entire contents of tracks 1 and 2 Track 1 Po Track 2 Po Track 1 Y Track 2 Po Time Choose Recorder Menu gt 2 Track Edit gt Track Exchange 98 The TRACK EXCHANGE screen will appear Specify the Source Track Source V Track Target Track Target V Track that you want to exchange Press the 6 EXEC button The display will ask Exchange OK If you re sure you want to execute press the 5 EXEC button If you decide to cancel press the 6 CANCEL button Track Import Importing an Audio File 5 6 7 This operation lets you convert an audio file WAV AIFF format from your computer into track data Gn You ll need a commercially available SD card reader in order to perform this operation Using your computer and a commercially available SD card reader copy the audio file WAV or AIFF format from the SD card s ROLAND IMPORT folder Insert the SD card into the JUNO Gi and switch on the JUNO Gi s power Choose Recorder Menu gt
88. simulates the reverbera tion of a room Reverb that simulates the reverbera tion of a hall Simulation of a plate echo a reverb device that uses a metal plate 2 reverb Output destination of the sound that has been processed by the chorus MAIN REV M R 0 127 0 127 Output in stereo to the OUTPUT jacks Output in mono to reverb Output in stereo to the OUTPUT jacks and in mono to the reverb Volume of the sound that has been processed by the chorus Volume of the sound that has been processed by the reverb 45 spunos bun e og suonpunj 197159 3yj3 bunip3 gt Lan Ma 3 3 14 2 Japsoray 1293 1 k ejd DUOS Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Multi Effect Settings MFX1 2 Specifies the MIDI message that will control the corresponding From the EFFECT ROUTING screen p 45 press the 2 MFX button to MFX control parameter access the MFX screen OFF MFX will not be used 8 Source CC01 31 Controller number 1 31 S41 EQUALIZER 1 4 Freg HZ CC33 95 Controller number 33 95 Low Bain 5196 5 PITCH BEND Pitch bend IMidi Frea Iris rn Midi 2 0B AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch Use the controller that is assigned by the DISSI System setting Sys Ctrl 1 4 Source p 82 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter that you Destination i
89. skin make sure that none of the battery discharge gets onto your hands or skin Exercise the utmost caution so that none of the discharge gets near your eyes Immediately rinse the affected area with running water if any of the discharge has entered the eyes Never keep batteries together with metallic objects such as ballpoint pens necklaces hairpins etc About SD Cards An SD card containing a demo song is inserted when the JUNO Gi is shipped from the factory You ll be able to record for longer lengths of time if you use a commercially available high capacity SD SDHC card SD cards usable with the JUNO Gi When using a commercially available SD SDHC card insert it as The JUNO Gi supports SDHC SD cards up follows to a capacity of 32 GB 5 lt 1 Remove the SD card protector screws Preparing an SD card for use When the JUNO Gi is shipped from the factory the SD card protector When using a commercially available SD card with the JUNO Gi remove the card protector use a Phillips screwdriver to remove these SD Card Format p 79 However don t format the SD card screws that s included with the JUNO Gi If you format the included SD card you ll lose all of the demo song data that was on the card 2 RECORDER _ 3 BACKUP Once you format an SD card the data that used to be on it cannot be recovered We recommend that you back up the data as described in Backing Up SD Card Data to Your Computer p 79
90. stereo output two lines Mono Stereo Ex Output Mono AMP EQ Output Stereo LIM OUT GUITAR Bank This is a multi effect designed for electric guitar This provides an amp sound using a preamp and speaker simulator AMP EQ NS FX DLY CHO REV The order may differ depending on the patch Algorithm Explanation Page Models sounds passed through guitar and bass amps AMP Amp Modeling COSM modeling simulates not just preamp and a ips 110 speaker characteristics but even miking as well P You can select from a large number of different amp types Adjusts the volume levels for different frequencies in the low frequency to high frequency ranges EQUALIZER p 111 Mid and high midrange settings feature parametric equalization This effect suppresses noise and hum from the guitar s pickups Since the noise reduction follows the guitar sound s envelope the change in volume over time it has practically no influence on the guitar sound itself thus producing a highly natural effect NOISE SUPPRESSOR put Provides a wide variety of effects to choose from including compressor distortion wah and many others FX Effects pete A delayed sound is added to the normal guitar sound producing a thicker tone with a distinctive ambience DELAY p 115 This effect adds a subtle frequency modulation producing a beautiful sound with greater breadth and body This effect
91. synthesis with the direct sound output in the left channel and the effect sound output in the right channel This features a more suppressed high end than MONO This features a more suppressed high end than ST 1 This features a more suppressed high end than ST 2 This sets the speed of the effect When set to BPM the value of the RATE parameter is set according to the value of the Recorder Tempo p 122 This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song This sets the richness of the effect This sets the volume level of the effect Value OFF ON Explanation Turns the REVERB OFF ON Use this to choose the type of reverb AMBIENCE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 PLATE 0 1 10 0 s 700Hz 11 0kHz FLAT 0 100 Simulates an ambience microphone off mic placed at a distance from the sound source used in recording and other applications Rather than emphasizing the reverberation this reverb is used to produce a sense of openness and depth Simulates the reverberation in a small room Provides warm reverberations Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall Provides clear and spacious reverberations Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall Provides mild reverberations Simulates plate reverberation a studio effect unit that uses the vibration of a large metal plate to produce reverberation Provides a metallic sound with a distinct up
92. than in terms of a note value Format the USB memory on the JUNO Gi p 79 Songs placed within a folder will not be displayed on the JUNO Gi Use an audio file of the types listed in Song files that can be played p 128 Check the audio file Reduce the number of tracks VOLUME knob setting Minus One setting p 129 Center Cancel works not only with respect to songs played using the USB Song Player but also affects the sound when using USB Audio Switch off Center Cancel Match the JUNO Gi s transmit channel and your connected device s receive channel p 133 Set the device ID numbers p 82 If you re using this type of sequencer software and you want to record system exclusive messages turn off the following parameter Local Switch p 82 141 spunos gt suompunj 197159 3jj3 bunip3 et gt Ma et E 31 3 14 2 Japsoray 23161 1293 4 Kiowa 9sn xipuaddy Problem Items to check Action No sound or insuf ficient sound from the microphone Insufficient volume from a device connected to the JUNO Gi Is the microphone cable connected correctly Is a condenser microphone connected Could the mic level be lowered Could the AUDIO INPUT SELECT setting have been turned off p 92 Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resist
93. the AC adaptor supplied with the remain unused for an extended period of time D unit Also make sure the line voltage at the installation Batteries must be recharged heated taken 25 matches the input voltage specified on the AC apart or thrown into fire or water e Ifa battery has leaked use a soft piece of cloth or a adaptor s body Other adaptors may use a different N paper towel to wipe all remnants of the discharge 1 polarity or be designed for a different voltage so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock Use only the attached power supply cord Also the supplied power cord must not be used with any other device Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist Do not place containers containing liquid e g flower vases on this product Never allow foreign objects e 9 flammable objects coins wires or liquids
94. the cursor buttons to select 2 Effect Edit and press the ENTER button 4 Press the 2 button The screen will appear In this case 79 VOCODER will be selected for MFX 5 Usethe cursor buttons to select the parameter you want to edit 6 Usethe VALUE dial or DEC INC to edit the value Parameter Value Explanation Mic Sens 0 127 Adjusts the input sensitivity of the microphone Synth Level 0 127 Adjusts the input level of the instrument T Adjusts the amount of sound from the microphone added to the vocoder s output Adjusts the volume level of the sound that has Level 0 127 passed through the vocoder If you want to keep the edited settings save the live set as a user live set For details refer to Saving a Live Set WRITE p 35 Using the Chord Memory Function About the Chord Memory Function Chord Memory Settings Chord Memory is a function that allows you to play chords based on 1 Press the CHORD MEMORY button so it s lit Alternatively pre programmed Chord Forms just by pressing a single key on the hold down the SHIFT button and press the CHORD keyboard MEMORY button Pe rform nq with the Chord Memory By holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the CHORD MEMORY button you can access the CHORD MEMORY screen a Fu n cti 0 n without turning the Chord Memory function on off 2 A 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the it
95. the full 3D effect may not appear About the STEP RESET function 06 STEP FILTER 16 STEP RING MODULATOR 19 STEP PAN 20 SLICER 63 STEP PITCH SHIFTER The above five types contain a sixteen step sequencer For these types you can use a multi effect control p 46 to reset the sequence to play from the first step To do this set the multi effect control Destination to Step Reset For example if you are using the modulation lever to control the effect you would make the following settings Parameter Value Source 01 MODULATION Destination Step Reset Sens 63 With these settings the sequence will play back from the first step whenever you operate the modulation lever 49 spunos gt suonpunj 1971594 3yj3 bunip3 E gt Ua ES z 31 3 14 2 23161 12913 u1 d 1 Kiowa 950 xipuaddy 01 EQUALIZER This is a four band stereo equalizer low mid x 2 high Parameter Value Explanation Low Freq 200 400 Hz Frequency of the low range Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Mid1 Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency of the middle range 1 Mid1 Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range 1 Width of the middle range 1 Mid1 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to narrow
96. the maximum position CLIP is shown By holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the KEYBOARD c AUDIO INPUT button you can access the KEYBOARD INPUT ah po AUDIO INPUT SELECT window without turning the audio input on F Level of signal sent from the sound of the off mi synthesizer to reverb Valid only when the 4 KEYBOARD INS FX button is on Reverb 0 127 4 Press the 6 CLOSE button to close the KEYBOARD INPUT window xipuaddy If you decide not to record your synthesizer performance press the KEYBOARD button to turn off its illumination 93 Entering normal mode 1 Inthe RECORDER screen press eft MODE Button a number of times to select Normal mode Make sure that the display does not indicate BOUNCE or MASTERING Ha FE 1 2 01 08 00 08 08 IHPUT 12 EFFECTS MODE TEE ZET AHYTHH EFFEST Mode indication use the 1 MODE button to switch unlit This means you re in Normal Recording mode BOUNCE This means you re in Bounce mode p 97 MASTERING This means you re in Mastering mode p 118 18924 If you want to switch V tracks select the desired V track now as described in Switching V tracks V Track p 89 before you proceed 2 Press the 0 REC button The 6 REC button will blink and the digital recorder will be in recording s
97. the order of Sampling Frequency 44 1 kHz numerals uppercase letters and lowercase letters 32 40 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 Bit Rate kbps VBR Variable Bit Rate um ac WAV AIFF e 1 91 HAY 5zi Sona OZ mig Sampling Frequency 44 1 kHz AS Sona A Wes Bit Rate 8 16 24 bit sonas 64 WAY uns 8S HAY 4 BHE FHD LEIEL a SETUP FHF GM General MIDI is a set of recommendations that allows the Fu nction buttons MIDI capabilities of sound modules to be standardized across manufacturers Sound modules or music data that meet the GM Button Explanation h hil indi can be played back on any sound module carrying the GM logo and will produce essentially the same musical performance 2 FWD gt gt Plays the song while fast forwarding 3 LEVEL Adjusts the volume of the song player GM2 4 C CAN MINUS Enables center cancel or minus one playback 5 SETUP Makes center cancel or minus one settings compatible with the original GM recommendations and 6 WRITE T Gand allows a higher level of musical expression and compatibility 2 It covers issues that were not covered by the original GM recommendations such as ways in which sounds can be edited 2 Selecta song and how effects should be handled It also expands the sounds Use the VALUE
98. the pitch shifted sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the pitch shifted sound that is fed 0 25 42 back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W DO0 100W direct sound D and the pitch shifted sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 62 2VOICE PITCH SHIFTER Shifts the pitch of the original sound This 2 voice pitch shifter has two pitch shifters and can add two pitch shifted sounds to the original sound Pitch1 Fine 1 Pitch1 Delay Pitch1 Feedback Pitch1 Pan Pitch1 Level Pitch2 Coarse 2 Pitch2 Fine 2 Pitch2 Delay Pitch2 Feedback Pitch2 Pan Pitch2 Level 70 100 100 cent 0 1300 msec note 98 98 L64 63R 0 127 24 12 semi 100 100 cent 0 1300 msec note 98 4 9896 L64 63R 0 127 Balance D L in L out Level 1 Balance W o CY Balance W Hin H out Balance D Parameter Value Explanation Pitch1 Coarse 1 412 Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift 1 in semitone steps Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift Pitch 1 in 2 cent steps Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the Pitch Shift 1 sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the pitch shifted sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Stereo location of the Pitch
99. the signal passes through the compressor Sets the volume level of the upper range after the signal passes through the compressor Explanation Sets the limiter to ON or OFF Adjust this parameter to match the signal Limiting will be applied to input levels in excess of this level This sets the time it takes for the limiter to go into effect once the input level exceeds the threshold level Adjusts the time until when the limiter will turn off after the input level falls below the threshold level Explanation Sets the volume level of the overall sound after the signal passes through the limiter Playing a Rhythm Pattern The JUNO Gi provides a dedicated rhythm track in addition to its audio tracks 1 8 What is an arrangement You can play rhythms as a guide during recording or place internal You could let a certain pattern repeat endlessly and practice along rhythms in the order of your song structure to create your own original with it just as though you were playing along with a metronome rhythm However using just a single pattern from the beginning of the song to its end would make the rhythm rather boring Rhythm Pattern 12345678 To give your song greater musical variety you ll probably want to arrange patterns in order such as intro gt chorus gt break gt ending A sequence of patterns that are placed in a performance order such as this is called an arrangement Each song can stor
100. the step flanger sound The flanger sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Value Type of filter OFF LPF HPF 200 8000 Hz 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 98 98 0 10 20 00 Hz note The optimal 3D effect w SPEAKER PHONES 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 When using speakers When using headphones Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Output Level L out H out Explanation No filter is used Cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Freq Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Center frequency when using the filter to cut a specific frequency range Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Spatial spread of the sound Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Rate period of pitch change ill be achieved When using speakers When using headphones Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Output Level 59 5 29 6 suonpung 197159 gt 0 La 1 ua oO 5 lt Japsoray 23161
101. to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the reverb sound W Output Level Explanation Conventional gated reverb Backwards reverb The reverberant sound moves from right to left The reverberant sound moves from left to right Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Parameter Value Explanation Adjusts the time from when Gate Time 5 500 msec the reverb is heard until it disappears Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W D0 100W direct sound D and the reverb sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 66 OVERDRIVE CHORUS Lin O L out Balance D DU Balance W H in O gt R out Balance D Parameter Value Explanation Overdrive Drive 0 127 Also changes the volume Overdrive Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Adjusts the delay time from the Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 msec direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 Frequency of modulation Chorus Depth Depth of modulation Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the chorus W and the sound that is not sent through the chorus D Chorus Balance D100 0W DO0 100W Level 0 127 Output Level 71 spunos
102. to go into effect once the input level exceeds the Middle threshold level This sets the time it takes for the midrange compressor effect to stop once the input level falls below the Middle threshold level This sets the volume level at which the upper range compressor goes into effect This sets the ratio of suppression of the upper range output when the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level This sets the time it takes for the upper range compressor to go into effect once the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level Parameter Hi Release Gu Value 50 5000ms Explanation This sets the time it takes for the upper range compressor effect to stop once the input level falls below the Hi threshold level With the compressor the level is automatically adjusted to the optimum setting according to the Threshold and Ratio settings In addition since lengthening the Attack setting may result in distortion a margin of 6 dB is provided Adjust the Mixer level as needed MIXER Parameter Lo Level Mid Level Hi Level LIMITER Parameter On Off Threshold Attack Release OUTPUT Parameter Level Value 80 6dB 80 6dB 80 6dB Value OFF ON 24 0dB 0 100ms 50 5000ms Value 80 6dB Explanation Sets the volume level of the lower range after the signal passes through the compressor Sets the volume level of the midrange after
103. want to copy move erase the A B region you must set point A and point B beforehand p 90 Specify the destination Target Track Target V Track To and Repeat the number of times to copy the data for the Copy operation and press the 6 EXEC button The display will ask Copy OK If you re sure you want to execute press the 5 EXEC button If you decide to cancel press the 6 CANCEL button Track Move Moving Data This operation moves the data of the specified region or the entire track to another location Following this operation the original location of the moved data will be empty containing no data Example 1 Moving within the same track START TO Time END Example 2 Moving to a different track START TO Time END 1 Choose Recorder Menu gt 2 Track Edit gt Track Copy p 98 The TRACK MOVE screen will appear 2 Specify the Source Track Source V Track Start and End for the Move operation and press the 6 NEXT button 4 Source eStart End AB L MESI Function Buton Edit Region 1 ALL The edit region will be the entire track you specified The edit region will be the region between the points A and B you specified 2 AB If you want to copy move erase the A B region you must set point A and point B beforehand p 90 3 Specify the destination Target Track Target V Track and To for the Move operat
104. your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result Never expose Battery to excessive heat such as sunshine fire or the like Z N CAUTION The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation This JUNO Gi for use only with Roland stand KS 18Z Use with other stands or carts is capable of resulting in instability causing possible injury Even if you observe the cautions given in the owner s manual certain types of handling may allow this product to fall from the stand or cause the stand to overturn Please be mindful of any safety issues before using this product Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit gt e gt gt ZN CAUTION At regular intervals you should unplug the AC adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs Also disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can resul
105. yourself will apply vibrato This is called modulation spunos gt By adding reverb you can recreate the pleasant acoustics that are typical of a performance in a concert hall or similar space suOIPUNY Pushing the lever away from yourself while moving it to the left or Knob right will apply both effects simultaneously REVERB The pitch bend range can be specified separately for each layer knob Refer to Bend p 36 SOUND MODIFY Knob Parameter Explanation Nn fD ue N D m E R D A Adjusts the amount of reverb Turning the knob toward the right will deepen the reverb and turning it toward the left will decrease the reverb Reverb Level The Reverb effects apply only the Synthesizer They do not affect You can use the SOUND MODIFY knobs to modify the sound in real the sound of the Digital Recorder or the USB Memory Song Player time e J e D _ Adjusting the Level of the Low Middle and High E Frequency Ranges EQ LOW MID HIGH Knobs REVERB LOW MID HIGH 3 c 3 c 3 2 F 2200 Use the knobs to adjust the equalizer EQ that applies to the overall 70 gt sound S 4 4 4 1 2 3 4 lt Parameter Value Explanation cS CUTOFF RESONANCE SES Adjusts the low range sound
106. 0 127 0 127 0 127 Type of chorus 0 OFF 1 CHORUS 2 DELAY 3 GM2 CHO Output in stereo via the multi effect Chorus and reverb can also be applied after the multi effect Output in stereo from the OUTPUT jacks without passing through the multi effect Output in mono from the OUTPUT L jack without passing through the multi effect Output in mono from the OUTPUT R jack without passing through the multi effect Multi effect used by the layer choose one of MFX 1 2 Level of signal sent to the destination specified by Layer Output Assign Level of signal sent from each layer to the chorus Level of signal sent from each layer to the reverb Type of multi effect to use choose one of 79 types For details on each multi effect refer to Multi Effects Parameters MFX1 2 p 48 How MFX 1 2 will be combined p 46 Volume of the sound that has been processed by the multi effect Amount of chorus applied to the sound that has been processed by the multi effect Amount of reverb applied to the sound that has been processed by the multi effect Chorus delay will not be used Chorus Delay GM2 chorus Num ber 13 14 15 Parameter Reverb Type Chorus Output Chorus Level Reverb Level Value Type of reverb 0 OFF 1 REVERB 2 SRV ROOM 3 SRV HALL 4 SRV PLATE 5 GM2 REV Explanation Reverb will not be used Basic reverb Reverb that
107. 0W 0 127 Balance D Delay CY Balance W Balance W Feedback O H out O L out J Balance W Balance D Explanation Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Output Level 77 CHORUS FLANGER Balance D Lin R in Balance D Parameter Value Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 msec Chorus Rate Chorus Depth Chorus Balance Flanger Pre Delay Flanger Rate Flanger Depth Flanger Feedback Flanger Balance Level 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 D100 0W D0 100W 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 98 98 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Balance D O Feedback
108. 1 INS FX button The INSERT FX screen will appear Brea BANK GUITAR PRS TH Zn E e LE TU MU 1 EDIT STH 2 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to change the bank group and patch Turning the Insert Effect Algorithms On Off 1 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to each algorithm of the patch 2 Usethe VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to turn the selected algorithm on off For details on each algorithm refer to Insert Effects Parameters 109 LIRMZERTI BANK GUITAR sor tT CRUNCH PRS E era J eerie On Uppercase indication in solid frame Off Lowercase indication in dashed frame Editing the Insert Effects Settings EDIT If you want to create a new effect sound start by selecting an existing patch that s close to the sound you want then modify edit the patch settings If you want to save the effect settings you ve edited save the patch as a user patch or song patch In the recorder s effects screen press the 1 INS FX button The INSERT FX screen will appear Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to each algorithm of the patch Press the 5 EDIT button The INSERT FX EDIT screen will appear Gn You can switch between algorithms in the edit screen by holding down the SHIFT button and using the cursor 4 gt buttons Entering a value 4
109. 4 Time Delay 1 Feedback Value 0 2600 msec note 98 98 Explanation Adjusts the time from the original sound until delay sounds 1 4 are heard Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Parameter HF Damp Delay 1 4 Level Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Value 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 49 MULTI TAP DELAY This effect provides four delays Each of the Delay Time parameters can be set to a note length based on the selected tempo You can also set the panning and level of each delay sound Lin Parameter Delay 1 4 Time Delay 1 Feedback HF Damp Delay 1 4 Pan Delay 1 4 Level Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Value 0 2600 msec note 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS L64 63R 0 127 15 15 dB 15 415 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Explanation Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you do not want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Volume of each delay Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the delay sound W Output Level L out Explanation Adjusts the time until Delays 1 4 are heard Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative sett
110. 5 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Higher frequencies Lower frequencies Gain of the low frequency range Gain of the high frequency range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the effect sound W Output level Lin 16 STEP RING MODULATOR modulation is applied This is a ring modulator that uses a 16 step sequence to vary the frequency at which 2 Band EQ L out Explanation Frequency of ring modulation at each step Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Speed at which the modulation frequency changes between steps Amount of boost cut for the low frequency range Amount of boost cut for the high frequency range Volume balance of the original sound D and effect sound W Parameter Value Step 01 16 0 127 Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Attack 0 127 Low Gain 15 15 dB High Gain 15 15 dB Balance D100 0W D0 100W Level 0 127 Output volume You can use multi effect control to make the step sequence play again from the beginning p 46 17 TREMOLO Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound 2 Band EQ 2 Band EQ Parameter Mod Wave Rate Depth Low Gain High Gain Level Tremolo Hin Tremolo Value Modulation Wave TRI SOR SIN SAW1 2 SAW1 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 127 L out R out Explanation Triangle wave Square wave Sine wave Sawtooth wave SAW2 Fr
111. 6 LIVE SET EDIT T SCIBOIN usd exu pg EE Sa RP xS 36 eee PRISES Rd ES SE RU 36 2 UV coesesesreeUtuecn 36 36 IE OUTPUT 36 36 LIVE SET EDIT 2 Screen 37 OFFSET 37 37 37 iiid P 37 Ebo Mp 37 LIVE SET EDIT 3 38 COMMON 38 pias eB 38 spunos gt MITTEN 1971594 sp y4 6un p gt gt Las 1 iM 5 3 3 14 2 Japsoray 23161 FEY CIP UI 950 xipuaddy PROTOI qu deat diese dent eed bad at aea m ais 39 A AU LIAR DELAY 65 39 50 REVERSE DELAY ciere 66 2 2 02 20 2 4 2 2 39 51 SHUFFLE 66 3 TVF PARAMETER 40 52 3D DELAY nononono nannaa eren 66 4 TVF ENVELOPE ies lernen 41 53 CTRL 67 5 TVA 42 54 LONG
112. 7 Press the 5 EXEC button to write to the patch 5 i on each parameter refer to Mastering Tool Kit Parameters To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button 5 If you want to save the edited result press the 6 WRITE NOTE EE button e Never turn off the power while saving is in progress For the save procedure refer to Saving the Mastering Tool Kit Settings e You can t save effect patches while recording or playing a song WRITE p 119 When you re finished editing 6 When you re finished editing press the EXIT button 2 E b lt m Jap10ray 1 sayy 1 33 4 FEY CIP Kiowa 950 xipuaddy 119 Mastering Tool Kit Parameters The Mastering Tool Kit s algorithms are composed from the following effects Algorithm Input 3BANDCOMP Compressor Mixer Limiter Output INPUT Parameter Gain Delay Time SplitL SplitH Explanation Value 24 12dB 0 10ms 20 800 Hz 1 6 16 0 kHz 3BAND COMP Parameter On Off Lo Threshold Lo Ratio Lo Attack Lo Release Mid Threshold Mid Ratio Mid Attack Mid Release Hi Threshold Hi Ratio Hi Attack 120 Value OFF ON 24 0dB 1 1 00 1 16 0 1 INF 0 100ms 50 5000ms 24 0dB 1 1 00 1 16 0 1 INF 0 100ms 50 5000ms 24 0dB 1 1 00 1 16 0 1 INF 0 100ms This divides the original sound into three frequ
113. 7 9 D3 F3 C4 E4 Dit Eb7 9 D 3 C 4 F4 Emaj7 9 E2 G 3 D 4 4 F F 7 9 F2 G 3 D 4 G4 F F 2 A3 C4 D 4 G G7 13 G2 F3 B3 E4 G Ab 6 G 2 B3 D 4 F4 A A 7 b5 A2 C4 D 4 G4 A Bb 7 A 2 G 3 C 4 F4 B B 7 b5 B2 A3 D4 F4 14 Oct Stack Assign Key Chord Name Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C C4 C5 C C 4 C 5 D 4 05 D 4 D 5 E E4 F RB FS ag eR GB BUB 15 4th Stack Assign Key Constituent Notes of Chord Forms D ma Di EM F i m Fa a a Gi a aS A a AM DB 16 5th Stack Assign Key Constituent Notes of Chord Forms e eH D pm D E pam F G fa G G 4 D 5 2 M E peer 17 Scale Set Assign Key Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C Major Scale C4 D4 G4 4 B4 C Major Pentatonic Scale C4 D4 E4 G4 4 D Minor Scale C4 D4 D 4 F4 G4 G 4 A 4 D Harmonic Minor Scale C4 D4 D 4 F4 G4 G 4 B4 E Melodic Minor Scale C4 D4 D 4 F4 G4 A4 B4 F Whole Tone Scale C4 D4 F 4 G 4 A 4 F Blue note Scale C4 D 4 F4 F 4 G4 A 4 G Japanese Minor C4 C 4 F4 G4 A 4 G Ryukyu Scale C4 E4 F4 G4 B4 A Bari Scale C4 C 4 D 4 G4 G 4 A Spanish Scale C 4 G4 G 4 A 4 B Gypsy Scale C4 CH4 E4 F4 G4 G 4
114. AL 2 Setting available with MODE set to T UP or T DOWN resonances produced by analog synth filters COMPRESSOR Parameter Value Sustain 0 100 Attack 0 100 Level 0 100 Parameter Value Threshold 0 100 Release 0 100 Level 0 100 Parameter Value Octave Level 0 100 Direct Level 0 100 Parameter Value Selects the mod SMALL Type MEDIUM BRIGHT POWER Bass 50 50 Middle 50 50 Treble 50 50 Explanation This sets the sustain for the sound This sets the attack onset of the sound This sets the volume level of the effect Explanation When the input signal level exceeds the level set here limiting will be applied Adjusts the amount of time that the limiting effect is applied after the signal exceeds the threshold level This sets the volume level of the effect Explanation This sets the volume level of the effect sound This sets the volume level of the direct sound Explanation eling type This is the sound of a small bodied acoustic guitar This is a standard unadorned acoustic guitar sound This is a bright acoustic guitar sound This is a powerful acoustic guitar sound Adjusts the low end volume Adjusts the midrange volume Adjusts the high end volume 113 spunos gt suonpunj 1971594 3jj3 bunip3 fb 5 Q 31 3 14 2 Jap10ray 261 u1 d
115. ARD area MIDI CTRL button SPLIT button ARPEGGIO button TEMPO button CHORD MEMORY button V LINK button TRANSPOSE button OCTAVE DOWN UP button MENU button PREVIEW button NUMERIC button FAVORITE ON OFF button FAVORITE BANK button Display Category Group RHYTHM 0 FX OTHERS 9 buttons Function buttons 1 6 SPECIAL LIVE SET button BATTERY indicator SOUND Explanation Page Here you can play back audio files WAV MP3 AIFF or Standard MIDI Files SMF that you ve copied from your computer to USB memory Connect your USB memory sold separately here Opens the song list a list of the audio MIDI files on USB memory Starts stops playback for the USB Memory Song Player Move your hand above the D Beam to apply various effects to the sound Adjusts the volume of the entire JUNO Gi Here you can make keyboard related settings Puts the JUNO Gi in MIDI Controller mode Selects Split mode in which the keyboard is divided into left and right zones that each play different Tones Turns the Arpeggio function on off Opens the Tempo window Turns the Chord Memory function on off Turns the V LINK function on off When you press the button to turn this on a setting screen will appear Hold down the TRANSPOSE button and use the buttons to shift the pitch range in semitone steps Change the pitch range in one octave steps Access a me
116. B4 To change the key of a chord set change the value for KEY in the CHORD MEMORY screen The illustration below shows how to determine the key of the song from the key signature the number of 5 and b symbols Major C F p 7 T 51 L4 L ___ 11 177 Minor Em Bm Ffm Dfm 137 spunos gt suonpunj uuojiad 1971594 23jJ3 bunip3 z gt iM ES Japsoray FEY CIP ows 45 xipuaddy Error Message List If an incorrect operation is performed or if processing could not be performed as you specified an error message will appear Refer to the explanation for the error message that appears and take the appropriate action Battery Low Recharge the batteries or use an AC adaptor Cannot Erase No further steps can be erase Cannot Insert No further steps can be insert Cannot Undo Cannot use the undo function The JUNO Gi has used up all the events that can be handled Perform the Song Optimize operation p 104 What is an event Event Full The smallest unit of memory used by the JUNO Gi to store recorded results on a memory card is the event A newly created song provides approximately 2 000 events per song For each tr
117. CANCEL button The audio file will be imported into the track A maximum of 99 files can be imported Audio files that can be imported e Wave data in the following formats can be imported WAV AIFF format e Linear format WAV file WAV AIFF file AIF or AIFF e File extension e Extremely short waveform data less than approximately 1 sec cannot be loaded Caution when importing e Use an SD card that was formatted by the JUNO Gi However if you re using the SD card that was included with the JUNO Gi don t format it If the display indicates EMPTY e If there no audio files in the SD card s ROLAND IMPORT folder the display will indicate EMPTY the import will not be possible um Files whose name begins with a period cannot be used There are also certain characters V lt gt that cannot be used anywhere in a file name If the display indicates Incorrect File e If you attempt to import a WAV AIFF file in a format that is not supported by the JUNO Gi the error message Incorrect File will be shown in the display and the import will not be possible e You cannot import compressed audio files 101 spunos gt suonpunj 3jj3 bunip3 1 p3 feld 9y 5 1 12410 Japsoday jeybig uJ233jeq unm uy spay FEY CIP Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Track Export Exporti
118. Contents NIE NW eres 2 Overview 7 Overview of the 8 About the 8 Live Sets and TONES 8 About the Digital sse ies a hr x Rhen 9 Tracks udo dass ipe d eX deb AERA 9 Rayt Pat eres exer UTERE SIRO PIU E US 9 RERTET TI ODE LO ETT UT 9 About the 9 About the USB Memory Song 9 SD Cards and USB Memory 45 er tEFESP 9 Panel Descriptions xe ensis Va Y 10 TRITT H 10 Rear Panel Connections 12 About Batteries 14 installing Batteries 2 2524 Ka a see 14 When to Replace the Batteries BATTERY Indicator 14 Removing 14 ADOUt SD Cards RR RT aw EU 15 REMOVING an avc 15 Turning the Power On 16 About the 17 Adjusting the Display Contrast LCD CONTRAST Knob 17 Turning the Display Backlight 17 Basic Operation of the JUNO Gi
119. Delay Left Delay Right Delay Center Center Feedback 3D Delay L E 3D Delay C Feedback 3D Delay H Value 0 2600 msec note 98 98 Explanation Adjusts the time until the delay sound is heard Adjusts the ratio as a percent age of the time that elapses before Delay B sounds relative to the time that elapses before the Delay A sounds When set to 100 the delay times are the same Adjusts the speed which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to its specified new setting Adjusts the amount of the delay that s feedback into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Stereo location of Delay A B Volume of delay A B Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the effect sound W Output Level L out H out Explanation Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase 54 LONG TIME CTRL DELAY A delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly and allowing an extended delay to be produced Parameter Value Explanation Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to
120. Dist D 7 9 D 3 G3 C 4 F4 E 7 9 G 3 D4 G4 F F7 9 F2 A3 D 4 G4 F dim7 F 2 A3 C4 D 4 G G7 13 G2 F3 B3 E4 G G dim7 G 2 B3 D4 F4 A A7 b13 A2 G3 C 4 F4 Bb7 13 A 2 G 3 D4 G4 B B 7 b5 B2 A3 D4 F4 07 Trad Maj Assign Key Chord Name Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C C C3 E4 G4 C5 C C dim7 C 3 E4 G4 A 4 D D D3 D4 F4 A4 D D dim7 D 3 F 4 A4 C5 E E E3 E4 G4 B4 F F F3 F4 A4 C5 F F 7 b5 F 3 E4 A4 C5 G G G3 D4 G4 B4 G G dim7 G 3 D4 F4 B4 A A A2 E4 A4 C5 A Bb A 2 D4 F4 A 4 B Bdim B2 D4 F4 B4 08 Trad Min 1 Assign Key Chord Name Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C C C3 D 4 G4 C5 C Db C 3 C 4 G 4 D Ddim D3 D4 F4 G 4 D Eb D 3 D 4 G4 A 4 E Edim7 E3 C 4 G4 4 F F F2 C4 F4 G 4 F Gbdim7 F 2 C4 D 4 A4 G G G2 A 3 D4 G4 G Ab G 2 C4 D 4 G 4 A A 7 b5 A2 C4 D 4 G4 A Bb A 2 D4 F4 A 4 B Bdim7 B2 D4 F4 G 4 09 Trad Min 2 01 Pop 1 Assign Key Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C3 G3 D4 Ed C C 3 C4 D 4 F4 D F4 A3 CA D D 3 A 3 D4 G4 E Cadd9 on E E3 C4 D4 G4 F Fmaj9 F2 A3 E4 G4 FEZ D4 Ei G Cadd9 G2 D4 E4 G4 Gi GH CA D FA A F on A A2 Aft G on Bb 2 D4 G4 B G on B B2 B3 D4 G4 02 Pop 2 Assign Key Chord Name Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C C 3 G3 A 3 E4 D 29
121. E Saving a Pattern 1 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to the location at A pattern you create is temporary and will be lost if you turn off the which you want to enter a note power or select another pattern You can also specify the pitch by playing a key on the keyboard If you want to keep a pattern you ve created you must save it in internal user memory or song memory same result as cursor V buttons 2 Pressthe INC or ENTER button to enter the note Eri When you save a pattern the data that previously occupied the a e If you press the ENTER button once again at a location that already destination for the save will be overwritten 2 contains a note that note will be deleted 4 1 Inthe PATTERN EDIT screen press the 6 WRITE button e The note will be entered with the settings you specified in NOTE SET The PATTERN NAME screen will appear E 2 Assign a name to the pattern Deleting d Note For details on how to enter a name refer to Assigning a Name p 19 3 When you ve finished assigning a name press the 6 NEXT 1 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to the location at button which you want to delete a note A screen allowing you to select the save destination will appear 4 Press the 1 USER or 2 SONG button to select the save destination group 2 Pressone of the following buttons to delete the note s suonpunj To delete the
122. E J STEP 12 16 i HE 88KeyGrand H Press the 4 P buttons to move the cursor to the location where you wish to input a character Turn the VALUE dial or press the DEC INC buttons to specify the character Button Explanation Selects the type of character Each time you press 2 TYPE this you will alternately select the first character of a character set uppercase A lowercase a or numerals and symbols 0 3 DELETE Deletes the character at the cursor location 4 INSERT Inserts a space at the cursor location 5 CANCEL Cancels the input and exits the naming screen 6 NEXT or Saves the changes you ve made 6 EXEC Move the cursor Switch between uppercase lowercase letters In a screen that allows you assign name you press the MENU button and perform the following operations Menu Explanation 1 Undo Return an edited name to its original state Change the character at the cursor location to 2 To Upper uppercase Change the character at the cursor location to 3 To Lower lowercase 4 Delete All Clear all of the currently entered characters You can t enter lowercase characters for a file name track export 19 01 2 spunos 2 5 Mo9IAI9A 1971594 3jj3 bunip3 et gt Ma et ie Japsoray 1293 1 k
123. E SEA a am 2824 TEES 49 m Md UE ee gt FAVORITE LIST screen 24 52 NOTE 124 2 53 FAVORITE ON OFF button as NUMERIC button 19 23 den pag 42 a ag FEnvlevelo cesses a 2 2 Cancel Type Sonn 80 2 LFO 43 84 heeki Er E E F Env Level2 cioe ecce pes 113 CHORD MEMORY button 31 41 LFO Osc 1 Pitch Depth 84 OCTAVE DOWN UP button 27 E 2 pb LFO Osc 1 Pulse Width Depth 84 2 uid ic F Env 4 41 LFO n 2 P been 84 Octave Shift R 1 V Sens 41 Eu s 47 LFO Osc 2 Pulse Width Depth 84 CHORUS DOES 115 F Env 14 V Sens 444 41 LFO Rate 84 On Off 4 44 chorus parameters TEE GA IA 411 LIMITER 113 116 120 eene nnn nnn Chorus cend Level 36 83 F Env Time2 41 LINE 92 Osc 1 CoarseTune 5 Chorus Type 76 Time DI aues e n a 8 22 34 Osc 1 A
124. ECORDER REC SOURCE SELECT AUDIO PEAK KEYBOARD INPUT j gt gt REPEAT mi D A rt 5 t 5 197159 SUOIPUNY uuopgad 6013395 19410 3 3 14 2 SOUND MODIFY Japsoray 23161 Roland Kiowa 9sn gt D 5 gt gt Connecting to Your Computer via USB If you use a commercially available USB cable to connect the JUNO Gi s rear panel USB COMPUTER connector to a USB connector on your What IS the USB driver computer you ll be able to do the following things EM The USB driver is software that transfers data between the JUNO Gi Use the JUNO Gi to hear audio or SMF files played back by MIDI and the application e g DAW software on your computer when the software DAW JUNO Gi is connected via USB to your computer Computer s USB connector The USB driver sends data from your application to the JUNO Gi and Supports USB 2 0 Hi Speed data from the JUNO Gi to your application USB audio Sett
125. ERING EDIT screen press the 6 WRITE button Editing the Mastering Tool Kit The MASTERING PATCH NAME screen will appear Settings EDIT 2 Assign a name For details on how to enter a name refer to Assigning a Name p 19 If you want to create new settings select the existing patch that s 3 h ve finish igni h NEXT closest to what you have in mind then modify edit those settings Wonen youve nnisned assigning press the lel spunos gt If you want to save your edited settings you can save them as a user button patch or a song patch A screen allowing you to select the save destination will appear 1 Inthe RECORDER screen press the 6 EFFECT button 4 Press the 1 USER or 2 SONG button to select the 3 2 Inthe recorder s effects screen press the 1 MASTER save destination group x button Group Explanation 3 MASTERING screen will appear USER Patches saved in internal memory 3 Pressthe 5 EDIT button SONG Patches saved for each song d The MASTERING EDIT screen will appear 5 Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the patch number into which you want to write your edited Entering values patch 4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter Press the 6 WRITE button 3jj3 bunip3 that you want to edit use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC A confirmation message will appear
126. ET EDIT screen 34 SHIFT 6 EFFECT Access the EFFECT ROUTING screen p 44 Selecting Live Sets from the List You can view a live set list and select a live set from that list Press one of the RHYTHM FX OTHERS category group buttons to select the desired category group PREVIEW NUMERIC VOCAL SYNTH FX CHOIR PAD OTHERS GUITAR STRINGS BRASS PLUCKED ORCHESTRA WIND FAVORITE KEYBOARD RHYTHM KEEGAN BASS Category Group RHYTHM PIANO KEYBOARD ORGAN BASS GUITAR PLUCKED STRINGS ORCHESTRA BRASS WIND VOCAL CHOIR SYNTH PAD FX OTHERS Press the ENTER LIST button The LIVE SET LIST screen will appear Category Category Group LIVE eT Toe l Fiano 1 FEST 04 FIAN cami ue iai feY4orand egrang 5 feY4orarnd 4 St Pi ana 1 J EFEST Use the 4 gt buttons to select the desired category Select a category within the currently selected category group You can also use the category group buttons or the 5 gt buttons to select the category group Use the VALUE dial the A buttons or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired live set and press the ENTER button If you press the EXIT button instead of pressing the ENTER button you ll return to the previous screen without the live set number being changed Using the VALUE Dial to Se
127. Env Depth P Env 1 A P Env Time2 P Env Time3 D P Env Time4 R P Env LevelO P Env Level1 P Env Level2 P Env Level3 S P Env Level4 Pitch Envelope T1 Pitch 40 Value 64 63 64 63 12 12 64 63 64 63 Explanation Use this parameter when you want key release speed to affect the T4 value of the Pitch Parameter envelope If you want T4 to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value Use this setting if you want the pitch envelope times T2 T4 to be affected by the keyboard location Based on the pitch envelope times for the C4 key positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times Depth of the Pitch envelope Higher settings will cause the pitch envelope to produce greater change Negative settings will invert the shape of the envelope Pitch envelope times T1 T4 Higher settings will result in a longer time until the next pitch is reached Filter Type Pitch envelope levels 10 14 Specify how the pitch will change at each point relative to the pitch set with Coarse Tune or Fine Tune Time Keyfollow T2 Resonance 4 Time Cutoff V Curve Cutoff Frequency Cutoff Keyfollow Value OFF LPF BPF HPF PKG LPF2 LPF3 TONE 63 63 64 63 200 200 1 7 3 IVF PARAMETER Explanation No filter is use
128. F4 G 4 F Gbdim7 F 2 C4 D 4 A4 G G G2 B3 D4 G4 G Ab G 2 G 4 D 4 C4 A A 7 b5 A2 CA D 4 G4 Bb A82 D4 4 B Bdim B2 D4 F4 BA 10 Pop Min 1 Assign Key Chord Name Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C C add9 C3 DA D 4 G4 C Dbmaj7 C 3 G 3 C4 F4 D D 7 b5 D3 C4 F4 G 4 Dit Ebmaj7 D 3 D4 G4 E Edim7 A 3 C 4 G4 F F 7 9 F2 G 3 D 4 G4 F Gbdim7 F 2 A3 C4 D 4 G G 7 G2 A 3 D4 F4 G Abmaj7 G 2 C4 D 4 G4 A A 7 b5 A2 C4 D 4 G4 A Bb7sus4 9 13 A 2 G 3 C4 D 4 B Bdim7 B2 G 3 D4 F4 11 Pop Min 2 Assign Key Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C add9 C3 D4 D 4 G4 C Eb7 on Db C 3 A 3 D 4 G4 D D 7 b5 D3 G 3 C4 F4 D D 3 A 3 D4 G4 E Emaj7 9 G 3 D 4 F 4 F F2 GHB D4 Ga F4 F 2 C4 D 4 G G7 b13 G2 F3 B3 D 4 G Abmaj7 G 2 C4 D 4 G4 A A 7 b5 A2 C4 D 4 G4 A C 7 on Bb A 2 C4 D 4 G4 B C maj7 B B2 D4 D 4 G4 12 Jazz Min 1 Assign Key Constituent Notes of Chord Forms C3 A5 DH FA C Db7 9 C 3 D D 7 b5 D3 C4 F4 G 4 Di 83 04 61 E7 9 E2 G 3 D4 F 4 F F2 084 64 F Gbdim7 F 2 A3 C4 D 4 G G7 9 G2 B3 F4 A 4 G Abmaj7 11 G 2 C4 D4 G4 A A 7 b5 A2 C4 D 4 G4 A Bb 7 A 2 G 3 C 4 F4 B Bdim7 B2 G 3 D4 F4 13 Jazz Min 2 Assign Key Chord Name Constituent Notes of Chord Forms 7 9 C3 D 3 3 D4 C Db7 9 C 3 F3 B3 D 4 D D
129. G EN ERAL not released selecting OFFD may result in no sound being heard Parameter Value Explanation TONE The setting of the tone assigned to the layer will D N Width of random pitch deviation that will occur RENNES VH NEQU a 2 2 2 each time a key is pressed in 1 cent steps Time from when the key is pressed or if the Tone 5 n ue If you do not want the pitch to change randomly 0 127 Delay Mode parameter is set to OFFN or OFFD 5 Rand Pitch Depth set this to 0 the time from when the key is released until when the tone will sound The setting of the tone assigned to the layer will Delay Time Specify this as a note value if you want to 2 Note synchronize the delay to the tempo of the QI When one key is held down and another key is JUNO Gi then pressed only the pitch changes without Th lt e setting of the tone assigned to the layer will the attack of the latter key being played Set TONE 2 7 5 OFF be used T this to OFF when performing wind and string phrases or when using modulation with the mono synth keyboard sound Portamento Start PITCH Portamento Start NOTE Legato Retrigger Pitch Pitch 9 99 Normally you will leave this parameter ON E ON Legato Retrigger is valid when the gt zi Mono Poly is set to and the ad Legato Switch is set to ON The setting of the tone assigned to the layer will be used T
130. HO A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape delay sound This simulates the tape echo section of a Roland RE 201 Space Echo L in J Echo Level 9 Tape Echo H in O H out Direct Level Parameter Value Explanation Combination of playback heads to use Select from three different Mode S L S M S L heads with different delay times M L S M L S short M middle L long Tape speed Increasing this value will shorten Repeal hates 92120 the spacing of the delayed sounds Intensity 0 127 Amount of delay repeats Bas 15 415 dB Boost cut for the lower range of the echo sound Treble 15 415 dB Boost cut for the upper range of the echo sound Head Independent panning for the Head M Pan L64 63R short middle and long playback Head L Pan ie Amount of tape dependent distortion to be added This simulates the slight tonal Tape Distortion 0 5 changes that can be detected by signal analysis equipment Increasing this value will increase the distortion Speed of wow flutter complex Wow Flutter Rate 0 127 variation in pitch caused by tape wear and rotational irregularity Wow Flutter Depth 0 127 Depth of wow flutter Echo Level 0 127 Volume of the echo sound Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the original sound Level 0 127 Output Level 68 56 LOFI NOISE In addition to a lo fi effect this adds various types of noise such as white noise and disc noise Lin Hin Parameter LoFi Type Post Filter Type
131. ICK OUT A BACKUP COMPUTER sbuljjas 42410 POWER switch 97 36 This turns the power on off LCD CONTRAST knob This knob adjusts the contrast of the display With a USB cable you can connect the JUNO Gi to your computer Japsoray PHONES jack You can connect a set of headphones SONG CLICK OUT jack gt 8 This jack will output one of the following audio signals ly here sold separately here USB Memory Song Player e USB Memory Song Player s click tone J gt lt gt gt y D e Digital Recorder 4 buos 1019 ISN About Functional Ground Terminal Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup you may experience a discomforting sensation or perceive that the surface feels gritty to the touch when you touch this device microphones connected to it or the metal portions of other objects such as guitars This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge which is absolutely harmless However if you are concerned about this connect the ground terminal see figure with an external ground When the unit is grounded a slight hum may occur depending on the particulars of your installation If you are unsure of the connection method contact the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page jake Unsuitable places for conn
132. ILT IN 3 Open back enclosure BUILT IN 4 Open back enclosure BUILT IN 5 Open back enclosure BG STACK 1 Sealed enclosure BG STACK 2 Large sealed enclosure MS STACK 1 Large sealed enclosure MS STACK 2 Large sealed enclosure METAL STACK Large double stack 2 STACK Large double stack 3 STACK Large triple stack 40 COMPRESSOR Parameter Attack Threshold Post Gain Low Gain High Gain Level Value 0 127 0 127 0 18 dB 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 127 Speaker Microphone 10 Dynamic 10 Dynamic 12x 1 Dynamic 12x2 Dynamic 12 2 Dynamic 12x2 Condenser 12x2 Condenser 12x2 Condenser 12x2 Condenser 12x2 Condenser 12x2 Condenser 12x4 Condenser 12x4 Condenser 12x4 Condenser 12x4 Condenser 12x4 Condenser Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels smoothing out fluctuations in volume Lin 2 Band EQ L out Explanation Sets the time from when the input exceeds the Threshold until the volume starts being compressed Adjusts the volume at which compression begins Adjusts the output gain Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Output Level 41 LIMITER Compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level preventing distortion from occurring L in 2 Band EQ L out Parameter Value Explanation Adjusts the time after the signal Release 0 127 volume falls below the Threshold Level until compression is no longer applied Threshold 0 127 Adjusts the volume at which compress
133. Key Press 37 Receive Portamento 37 Receive Program Change 82 Recorder Menu screen 98 RECORDER Screen 86 recorder tempo 32 122 RECORDER VIEW button 86 RTT TO TOTO 94 REC SOURCE 5 93 146 Release Time Offset 37 Remote Keyboard Switch 82 REPEAT oos Dess 90 40 84 RESONANCE knob 29 Resonance Offset 37 Resonance V Sens 41 reverb 47 89 105 117 aes 93 2254 594 115 REVERB 29 reverb parameters 77 Reverb Send Level 36 83 Reverb Type 77 2 lro ECT 87 rhythm pattern 121 RHYTHM PATTERN button 88 121 RHYTHM PATTERN screen 122 RHYTHM PATTERN slider 121 rhythm 5 25 121 RO TAB due paa 114 82 37 5 511192 Buttons cis ro 28 saving aliveset 35 124 Scale TUIIB uoo at rh S DERE 27 Scale 80 Scale Tune for 80 Scale Tune 80 Scale Tune Switch 80 Scale Tune 80 SD CAI 2s err ms 9 15 78 79 SD Card
134. LDN LEAD METAL 5150 METAL LEAD OD 1 OD 2 TURBO DISTORTION FUZZ 0 127 0 127 LOW MIDDLE HIGH 0 127 0 127 OFF ON OFF ON See the table below 1 2 3 0 127 0 127 L64 63R 0 127 Explanation Turns the amp switch on off Type of guitar amp Volume and amount of distortion of the amp Volume of the entire pre amp Amount of pre amp distortion Tone of the bass mid treble frequency range Middle cannot be set if MATCH DRIVE is selected as the Pre Amp Type Tone for the ultra high frequency range Turning this On produces a sharper and brighter sound This parameter applies to the JC 120 CLEAN TWIN and BG LEAD Pre Amp Types Determines whether the signal passes through the speaker ON or not OFF Type of speaker Adjusts the location of the microphone that s capturing the sound of the speaker This can be adjusted in three steps from 1 to 3 with the microphone becoming more distant as the value increases Volume of the microphone Volume of the direct sound Stereo location of the output sound Output Level Specifications for each Speaker Type The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units Type Cabinet SMALL 1 Small open back enclosure SMALL 2 Small open back enclosure MIDDLE Open back enclosure JC 120 Open back enclosure BUILT IN 1 Open back enclosure BUILT IN 2 Open back enclosure BU
135. LITY MENU screen use the cursor buttons to select User Backup and press the ENTER button Returning to the Facto ry Settings The following screen will appear Fa ctory Reset E HERD at MER Mom Fnrmat You can return all of the JUNO Gi s settings to the state they were in Message from JUME isi when the instrument was shipped from the factory This operation is Backup all user data to the SD Card called Factory Reset zum Sure Press EXEC NOTE If the JUNO Gi s internal memory contains important data that you ve created be aware that all of this user data will be lost when 2 Press the 5 EXEC button you execute the factory reset operation If you want to keep this To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button data save it to SD card before you continue When the backup has been completed you will return to the UTILITY 1 IntheUTILITY MENU screen use the cursor buttons to select MENU screen Factory Reset and press the ENTER button A confirmation message will appear Types of Data that can be backed Up 2 execute the factory reset press the 5 EXEC button When you back up settings from the JUNO Gi to SD card the To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button following settings are backed up When the factory reset has been completed the following screen will User live sets appear Favorites User arpeggio
136. Lo Mid Gain Lo Mid Freq Value OFF ON FLAT 55 800 Hz 20 20 dB 20 0 10 0k Hz 0 5 16 20 20 dB 20 0 10 0k Hz 0 5 16 20 20 dB 20 20 dB 700 11 0k FLAT Hz 20 20 dB Value OFF ON 0 100 0 100 Hi Mid Gain High Gain Frequency Hi Mid Freq Explanation Turns the EQ OFF ON This sets the frequency at which the low cut filter begins to take effect When FLAT is selected the low cut filter will have no effect Adjusts the low frequency range tone Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the Lo Mid Gain Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EO centered at the Lo Mid Freq Higher values will narrow the area Adjusts the low middle frequency range tone Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the Hi Mid Gain Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EO centered at the Hi Mid Freq Higher values will narrow the area Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone Adjusts the high frequency range tone This sets the frequency at which the high cut filter begins to take effect When FLAT is selected the high cut filter will have no effect Adjusts the volume before the equalizer Explanation Turns the NOISE SUPPRESSOR OFF ON This adjusts the effect in response to the level of noise A value of 0 switches off the noise suppressor Setting this higher t
137. MON Parameter LiveSet Category LiveSet Tempo Common Level Common Cutoff offset Common Resonance offset Phase Lock Preview Type Preview Phrase Preview Octave Value Explanation Type category of the live set 20 250 0 127 Tempo of the live set Adjusts the volume of the entire live set Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the entire live set You can use the SOUND MODIFY CUTOFF knob to control this p 29 64 63 Switch 1 Switch 2 Adjusts the resonance of the entire live set Assign You can use the SOUND MODIFY CUTOFF knob to control this p 29 64 63 Set to ON when you want to suppress discrepancies in timing of parts played on the same MIDI channel When this parameter is set to ON parts on the same MIDI channel are put in a condition in which their timing is matched enabling them to be played at the same time Accordingly a certain amount of time may elapse between reception of the Note messages and playing of the sounds Turn this setting to ON only as needed OFF ON Type of phrase played back when you press the PREVIEW button Switch 1 Switch 2 Type Valid only if the System setting Preview Mode p 80 is set to PHRASE SINGLE A single phrase for Upper and Lower RHYTHM A phrase for a rhythm set MULTI Different phrases for Upper and Lower Phrase that is played back when you press the PREVIEW button 3 3 Pitch of the preview ph
138. NE DN eM RR 78 17 42 44 4 4 4 4 2 54 Displaying the UTILITY 78 18 AUTO 55 Backing Up JUNO Gi Settings to SD Card User 78 19 5 55 Restoring JUNO Gi Settings from SD Card User Restore 78 20 55 Returning to the Factory Settings Factory Reset 78 21 4 56 Formatting USB Memory USB Memory Format 79 32 UICHOTARY ia 56 Formatting SD Card SD Card Format 79 23 56 Backing Up SD Card Data to Your 79 24 FLANGER eee e e eee 57 Restoring Backed Up Data to an SD 79 HEXA CHORUS 5 8 27 TREMOLO LLLA 58 Making System Settings 80 Saving the System Settings 80 28 5 58 System lt 80 29 30 06 59 System Menu 1 GENERAL an 200 7
139. OFF i 03 GM2 CHORUS Choose 00 OFF if you don t want 05 GM2 REVERB Choose 00 OFF if you don t to apply chorus want to apply reverb 5 Parameters for Set the parameters of the selected chorus type Parameters for Set the parameters of the selected reverb type each chorustype Refer to Chorus Parameters 76 each reverb type Refer to Reverb Parameters p 77 i 197159 et gt a Ma et 3 3 14 2 Japsoray 1293 1 k ejd DUOS Kiowa 9sn xipuaddy 47 Effects Parameters Multi Effects Parameters MFX1 2 p64 d 47 3TAP PAN DELAY p 65 The multi effects feature 79 different kinds of effects Some of the 48 ATAP PAN DELAY p 65 effects consist of two or more different effects connected in series 46 DELAY p 65 Parameters marked with a sharp be controlled using a Multi 50 REVERSE DELAY p 66 Effects Control p 46 Two setting items will change simultaneously for 9 9 9 4 amp 1 and 2 51 SHUFFLE DELAY p 66 52 3D DELAY p 66 FILTER 10 types 53 TIME CTRL DELAY 67 01 EQUALIZER p 50 54 LONG TIME CTRL DELAY p 67 02 SPECTRUM 50 55 TAPE ECHO p 68 03 ISOLATOR 50 LO FI 5 types 04 LOW BOOST p
140. PHASER A phaser that continues raising lowering the frequency at which the sound is modulated Lin Rin Parameter Mode Speed Resonance Mix Pan Low Gain High Gain Level Infinite Phaser Value 1 2 3 4 100 100 0 127 0 127 L64 63R 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 127 15 RING MODULATOR This is an effect that applies amplitude modulation AM to the input signal producing bell like sounds You can also change the modulation frequency in response to changes in the volume of the sound sent into the effect Lin Ring Mod 2 Band EQ L out R in Ring Mod 2 Band EQ R out Parameter Frequency Sens Polarity Low Gain High Gain Balance Level 54 Value 0 127 0 127 gt L out J PanL CY R gt out Explanation Higher values will produce a deeper phaser effect Speed at which to raise or lower the frequency at which the sound is modulated upward downward Amount of feedback Volume of the phase shifted sound Panning of the output sound Amount of boost cut for the low frequency range Amount of boost cut for the high frequency range Output volume Explanation Adjusts the frequency at which modulation is applied Adjusts the amount of frequency modulation applied Determines whether the frequency modulation moves towards higher frequencies or lower frequencies UP DOWN 15 15 dB 1
141. Pressthe 3 MIDI SYNC button 4 Pressthe 1 GENERL button 5 Usethe A W buttons to select Main Channel 6 Usethe VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the value Value 1 16 If the SPLIT button is the Lower layer s MIDI receive channel can be specified by its own Sub Channel p 82 setting that is independent of the Main Channel Setting the Program Change Receive Switch Here s how to turn on the receive switch for program change and bank select messages With the factory settings both are turned 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the VALUE dial or the cursor button to select 4 System and press the ENTER button 3 Press the 3 MIDI SYNC button 4 Press the 3 RX button 5 Use the cursor buttons to select Receive Program Change or Receive Bank Select 6 Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to turn each of these 7 Tosave your settings press the WRITE button If you decide not to save the changes you made press the EXIT button to return to the previous screen Gn e For details on these settings refer to 3 RX p 82 e For details on how to set the transmit channel of your external MIDI device refer to its owner s manual 134 Connection example 00 7 MIDI device 1 I 1 1 Roland L MIDI OUT connector MIDI IN connector JUNO Gi MIDI OUT connector
142. R in gt R out Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback mesonance 5 b Adjusts the proporuan of the Parameter Value Explanation g Cross 98 498 phaser sound that is fed back a Feedback into the effect Negative 4 STAGE 8 STAGE settings will invert the phase Mode 12 STAGE 16 STAGE Number of phaser stages 20 STAGE 24 STAGE Mix 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound Adjusts the basic frequency D Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Manual 0 127 from which the sound will be 55 High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range modulated CT Level 0 127 Output Level Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation a Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation 12 STEP PHASER This is a stereo phaser The phaser effect will be varied gradually Parameter Value Explanation 4 STAGE Mode 8 STAGE Number of stages in the phaser 12 STAGE Adjusts the basic frequency Manual 0 127 from which the sound will be modulated Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Resonance Mix Pan Low Gain High Gain Level 0 127 0 127 L64 63R 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 127 Amount of feedback Level of the phase shifted sound Stereo location of the output sound Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Output Level 53 v A ag bun 1 e D Lm 1 33 4 FEY CP oweW 950 xipuaddy 14 INFINITE
143. RUNCH NATURAL OD OD OD 1 T SCREAM TURBO OD WARM OD DIST DISTORTION MILD DS MID DS CLASSIC RAT GUV DS DST MODERN MODERN DS SOLID DS STACK METAL LOUD METAL ZONE LEAD FUZZ 60s FUZZ OCT FUZZ MUFF FUZZ Parameter Drive Tone Effect Level This is the crunch sound of the BOSS BD 2 This produces distortion that faithfully reproduces the nuances of picking A crunch sound with an added element of amp distortion This provides the natural sounding distortion of a slightly overdriven amp The sound of the BOSS OD 1 This produces sweet mild distortion This models an Ibanez TS 808 This is the high gain overdrive sound of the BOSS OD 2 This is a warm overdrive This gives a basic traditional distortion sound This produces a mild distortion sound This distortion sound features a boosted midrange This models a Pro Co RAT This models a Marshall GUV NOR This models an MXR DISTORTION This is the deep distortion sound of a large stack type amp This is a distortion sound featuring an edge effect A fat sound with an added element of a stack amp s distortion This distortion sound is ideal for performing heavy riffs This is the sound of the BOSS MT 2 It produces a wide range of metal sounds from old style to slash metal Produces a distortion sound with the smoothness of an overdrive along with a deep distortion This models a FUZZFACE It produces a fat fuzz sou
144. S Jack stereo 1 4 inch phone type SONG CLICK OUT Jack stereo 1 4 inch phone type LINE INPUT Jacks L R 1 4 inch phone type GUITAR MIC INPUT Jack MIC 1 4 inch phone type or XLR type phantom power GUITAR 1 4 inch phone type Hi Z CONTROL PEDAL Jack HOLD PEDAL Jack MIDI Connectors IN OUT USB COMPUTER Connectors USB Hi Speed Audio MIDI Use a USB cable and a computer with a USB connector that support USB 2 0 Hi Speed DC IN Jack DC9V AC Adaptor or Rechargeable Ni MH Battery AA HR6 sold separately x 8 Carbon zinc batteries or alkaline batteries cannot be used 750 mA Rechargeable Ni MH batteries AA HR6 Approximately 3 hours approximately 2 hours if USB memory is connected This figure will vary depending on the actual conditions of use 1008 W x 300 D x 105 H mm 39 11 16 W x 11 13 16 D x 4 3 16 H inches 5 7 kg 12 Ibs 10 oz Excluding AC Adaptor Owner s Manual Quick Guide CD ROM USB Driver DVD ROM Cakewalk PPP SD Card 2 GB installed in the JUNO Gi when shipped from the factory SD Card Protector installed in the JUNO Gi when shipped from the factory USB Memory Protector AC Adaptor Power Cord Keyboard Stand KS 18Z Use a stand that causes the height of the unit to be one meter or lower Pedal Switch DP Series Expression Pedal EV 5 USB Memory Use USB memory sold by Roland We cannot guarantee operation if other products are used n the
145. STER 5 88 Cutoff Offset 37 Master Tune 80 Aoc ale aad aa 42 Cutoff V Cur 40 MENU button 19 A Env 5 42 41 INC button 18 MFX 46 A Env Time 42 ee i ds TOS A Env Time2 42 D INFORMATION DEBA 2 e eim qua pu Nac X Est iU RO US D js a M E D 83 7 2 46 Cox D Beam controller 28 microphone 92 109 input 1 92 AIFF 128 D Beam lt 83 Input Level 93 Mid 81 89 110 DOIN m 13 105 106 Mid 81 89 5 Decay Time Offset err 37 0020 133 arpeggio 32 insert effects parameters 109 DEC INC buttons 18 mE MIDI Clock Output 83 ARPEGGIO button 32 INSERT FX EDIT screen 107 P v Arpeggio Destination 38 INSERT FX screen 106 MIDI connectors 133 S ARRANGE EDIT screen 123 Delay 2 39 INSERT STEP 123 MIDI c
146. Shift 1 sound Volume of the Pitch Shift1 sound Settings of the Pitch Shift 2 sound The parameters are the same as for the Pitch Shift 1 sound Parameter Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Value 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 63 STEP PITCH SHIFTER A pitch shifter in which the amount of pitch shift is varied by a 16 step sequence Lin Hin Parameter Step 01 16 Rate Attack Gate Time Fine Delay Time Feedback Low Gain High Gain Balance Level CHD Step Pitch Shifter Step Pitch Shifter Value 24 12 semi 0 05 10 0 Hz note 0 127 0 127 100 100 cent 0 1300 msec note 98 98 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Explanation Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the pitch shifted sound W Output Level L out H out Explanation Amount of pitch shift at each step semitone units Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Speed at which the amount of pitch shift changes between steps Duration of the pitch shifted sound at each step Pitch shift adjustment for all steps 2 cent units Delay time from the original sound until the pitch shifted sound is heard Proportion of the pitch shifted sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Gain of the low range Gai
147. T button and press the D BEAM button SOLO SYNTH EXPRESSION ASSIGNABLE that you want D Beam Controller S1 S2 buttons D BEAM You can assign various performance related functions to the S1 and S2 buttons When you turn the S1 or S2 button on off the assigned function will be switched or turned on off ASSIGNABLE SONG PLAYER SONG PLAY LIST 5 51 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the S1 or S2 button Use the cursor A V buttons to select a parameter Switch 1 is the setting for the 51 button and Switch 2 is the setting for the S2 button Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired value Parameter Value Explanation The function assigned to the S1 S2 buttons Shift the pitch of the keyboard TRANSPOSE UP upward in semitone steps a maximum of six semitones TRANSPOSE Shift the pitch of the keyboard downward in semitone steps a DOWN maximum of five semitones Used to set the keyboard tempo to TAP TEMPO the interval at which you press the button Specify whether the tone will play MONO POLY polyphonically POLY or monopho Assign nically MONO PORTAMENTO Turn the Portamento on off HOLD Turn the Hold on off MFX1 2 SW Switch the multi effects 1 2 on off CHORUS SW Switch the chorus on off REVERB SW Switch the reverb on off Transmit the MIDI message specified SYS CTRL 1 4 SRC by the System setting Sys Ct
148. T 2 Screen Parameter Value Explanation Determines what will happen to the tone s F U level when the tone is played at a velocity 1 OFFSET Velocity Fade 0 127 greater than Velo Range Upper If you Upper don t want the tone to sound at all set this parameter to 0 The values set here are applied to the parameters of the tones of the various layers and are used in correcting the tone 1w Few rn Cutoff 64 2 trequency Parameter Value Explanation 2 Cutoff Offset 63 The tone assigned to the layer will sound only e Reso 64 63 Resonance MONO one note at a time E usi NN Unavailable for a layer to which a rhythm Attack 64 set is assigned TVA TVF Envelope Attack Time Mono Poly Attack Time Offset 63 POLY Chords can be played on the tone assigned to m Release Time Offset 63 mono poly setting of the tone assigned to z os _ 7 the layer will be used c 64 TVA TVF Envelope Decay Ti f hly with bl a Vecay lime Legato refers to playing smoothly without a perceptible 63 Fe Decay Time Offset break between notes This produces an effect similar to the hammering on pulling off technique of a guitarist gt Unavailable for a layer to which a rhythm set is assigned Fd 2 VI BRATO Legato OFF Legato will not be applied to the layer II
149. TIME CTRL 67 6 TVA 42 55 68 43 56 LOFI NOISE 2 2 4 2 68 E 57 LOFI COMPRESS 69 Applying Effects EFFECT 44 SO LOF opo 69 Turning Effects Effect SWITCH e eese nt rre RR rne nw us 44 59 TELEPHONE 4524266 a ERR RR ER nar Rr ix Ex 69 Making Effect SQUINGS ssa Roa EE 44 60 69 Signal Flow and Parameters EFFECT ROUTING 45 61 PITCH 5 70 Multi Effect Settings 2201 46 62 2VOICE PITCH 70 Controlling a Multi Effect via MIDI MFX1 2 CTRL 46 63 STEP PITCH 5 70 Specifying How Multi Effects are Combined 64 2 3 71 ME STRUCTURE 46 2i Reverb Settings REVERB aa 66s OVERDRIVE gt CHORUS screen 7 67 OVERDRIVE gt 72 Effects lt 48 12 Multi Effects Paramet
150. Tones SPLIT Split refers to a setup in which the keyboard is divided into left hand and right hand areas with a different tone played by each area The key at which the keyboard is divided is called the split point Lower 2 Lower 1 sis When you turn Split on the right hand area of the keyboard will play the upper tone and the left hand area will play the lower tone The split point key is included in the upper tone 1 Pressthe SPLIT button so it s lit Split keyboard mode will be selected The LAYER SPLIT screen will appear Split Point Split Switch W means 7 282 PEST Tone Strings 5 The right hand keyboard area will play the upper tone and the left hand keyboard area will play the lower tone Split Point C4 LOWER UPPER CED By holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the SPLIT button you can access the LAYER SPLIT screen without turning the Split function on off 2 To cancel Split keyboard mode press the SPLIT button so its illumination is turned off If you want to close the LAYER SPLIT screen while leaving Split on press the EXIT button e When you turn on the SPLIT button the setting of the Layer switch will turn ON for UPPER 1 and LOWER 1 e When you turn off the SPLIT button the setting of the Layer switch will return to the value it had in the live set MIDI receive channel when in Split mode If you want to play th
151. UME knob Check the system setting SOUND p 80 Check the system setting Master Tune p 80 Check the pedal and the pitch bender Check the settings of the Coarse and Fine parameters Reduce the number of Tones you re using Increase the voice reserve setting for layers on which you don t want to allow broken off notes Check the system setting Hold Pedal Polarity p 81 The JUNO Gi provides multi effects that let you apply a wide variety of different ef fects and when you switch live sets the multi effect type used by the live set will also be switched The mismatch between the currently heard notes and the multi effect type would cause unwanted sound to occur when this change happens and this is why the notes are turned off when you switch live sets Problem Sound is still heard from the opposite side as well even when panned all the way to one side Notes played in a high register sound funny Can t play arpeggios Items to check Could effects be applied When you play high notes on the JUNO Gi you might hear notes that fail to sound whose pitch fails to rise or a noise that changes depending on the note you play a warbling chirping rustling beeping etc Could the system setting USB Song Sync Mode p 83 have been set to SLAVE Effect not applied You specified a delay time value for example for multi effect 43 DELAY as a note value but there s a limit beyond
152. UMERIC button on you ll be able to use the 0 9 buttons to enter numeric values PREVIEW NUMERIC ON OFF BANK o 1 PLUCKED WIND UHUIH 1 e You can use this method to numerically specify live set numbers or tone numbers 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the number that you want to change 2 Press the NUMERIC button so it s lit The 0 9 buttons will light 3 Use the 0 9 buttons to enter a numerical value and then press the ENTER button Your input will be finalized and the illumination of the 0 9 buttons will return to their previous state If you press the NUMERIC button once again without pressing the ENTER button the 0 9 buttons will return to their previous state without the number being changed When you ve turned the button and are entering number pressing the EXIT button will cancel the value The MENU Button Function When you press the MENU button a menu will appear in the display Press the MENU button Use the VALUE dial or cursor buttons to select menu and then press the ENTER button 1 2 If you press the MENU button while in the RECORDER screen a recorder related menu will appear 3 Utility Back up data format a card etc p 78 On the JUNO Gi you can assign names to each live set song The procedure is the same for any type of data Live NAM
153. Value Explanation Delay Left i j j 02150010520 note Adjusts the time until the delay Delay Right sound is heard Phase of the left delay sound Phase Left NORMAL Non inverted INVERT Inverted Phase of the right delay sound Phase Right NORMAL Non inverted INVERT Inverted Selects the way in which delay Feedback Mode NORMAL CROSS sound is fed back into the effect See the figures above Adjusts the amount of the delay Pr sound that s fed back into the Feedback HOO effect Negative settings invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W DO0 100W direct sound D and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 63 spunos gt suompunj uuojiad 197159 3yj3 bunip3 gt E gt M La 1 Ua 5 lt 3 3 14 2 13p102 23161 u1 d FEY CP 950 xipuaddy 44 LONG DELAY A delay that provides a long delay time L in Hin Parameter Delay Time Phase Feedback HF Damp Pan Low Gain High Gain Balance Level L out J PanL Long Delay Feedback CY Pan Value 0 2600 m
154. Volume balance between the direct sound D and the effect sound W Output Level L out H out Explanation Depth of distortion Frequency response of the playback system Decreasing this value will produce the impression of an old system with a poor frequency response Rotational speed of the turntable This will affect the frequency of the scratch noise Amount of noise due to scratches on the record Volume of noise due to dust on the record Volume of continuous hiss Volume of overall noise Depth of long cycle rotational irregularity Depth of short cycle rotational irregularity Depth of indefinite cycle rotational irregularity Depth of overall rotational irregularity Volume balance between the direct sound D and the effect sound W Output Level 69 suonpung un lt fD e N D rri ct 5 ue D A rt spay 6 11395 49410 950 xipuaddy 61 PITCH SHIFTER A stereo pitch shifter 4 Pitch Shifter Pitch Shifter L in L out 2 Band EQ R in O 2 Band EQ R out Parameter Value Explanation Coarse 1 24 12 semi piten orng piten shifted sound in semitone steps Adjusts the pitch of the pitch mee shifted sound in 2 cent steps Adjusts the delay time from Delay Time 0 1300 msec note the direct sound until
155. You are attempting to write data to a song that has protection switched on It is possible that the contents of system memory have been damaged The SMF you re importing to an arpeggio style or rhythm pattern contains too much data The number of steps in the arrangement exceeds 99 The JUNO Gi cannot recognize or use the format of the inserted SD card There is insufficient free space in the JUNO Gi s storage area Action Turn off the power remove the SD card and unlock it Turn off the power firmly insert the SD card or USB memory and then turn on the power once again Make sure that SD card USB memory is correctly connected Do not use this file Do not use this file Make sure that SD card is correctly connected Make sure that the file or the SD card is not write protected To write data to the song switch Protect to OFF p 104 Please execute a Factory Reset If this does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center Keep the SMF data within 500 notes note on off for an arpeggio style and within 4 000 events for a rhythm pattern Keep the number of steps in the arrangement within 99 Use the JUNO Gi to format the SD card p 79 Delete unneeded data 139 spunos gt suonpunj 1971594 3jj3 bunip3 gt Ma et Japsoray 1293
156. aaser TOME TOME Time parameter has elapsed after release of 2 Fartamenta Hode the key This is effective in situations such as pel Portameanto Tuna TANF TOW when simulating noises from guitars and other GRF LIST 4 OFFN instruments 74 If you have selected a waveform that is a decay type sound i e a sound that Button Explanation 9 E fades away naturally even if the key S Lists the edit groups Use the VALUE dial or the Delay Mode is not released selecting OFFN may 1 GRP LIST cursor A V buttons to select a group and result in no sound being heard z press the ENTER button to confirm Eoo e Rather than being played while the key is 2 GRP 7 Moves to the preceding edit group pressed the tone begins to play once the 3 GRP J Moves to the next edit group period of time specified in the Tone Delay Time ee eee parameter has elapsed after release of the key begin while the key is pressed which in many A OFFD cases means that only the sound from the By holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the cursor gt button you can m select the same parameter for multiple layers and set them simultaneously If you have selected a waveform that is a decay type sound i e a sound that fades away naturally even if the key is 1
157. able stereo eau a D 4 Press the EXIT button to return to the RECORDER screen link Stereo linked operation begins when you modify the value Simply selecting stereo tracks for recording does not turn Stereo tti EQ SETTI NG Link on When you select stereo tracks for recording two REC quad Izer se ING screen indications are shown and then finish recording Stereo Link will z automatically be enabled for those tracks z Here you can make equalizer EQ settings for each track e The pan parameter changes as shown below when Stereo Link is 5 To switch the track that appears in the EO SETTING screen hold x down the SHIFT button and use the cursor buttons VALUE Parameter Value Explanation C C C ec Equalizer EQ switch for each gt On Off OFF ON trace 164777 164 164 R63 R63 R63 ES Default 2 5 lt D O tow S E Low Gain 12 12 dB Gain of the low range Low Freq 40 Hz 1 6 kHz Frequency of the low range gt E Mid Gain 12 12 dB Gain of the middle range Mid Freq 20 Hz 10 kHz Frequency of the middle range Width of the middle range Mid Q 0 5 16 Set a higher value for O to narrow the range to be affected 89 Playing Back Repeatedly REPEAT The repeat function lets you play back a specified region repeatedly This function is u
158. able to manage 2 your songs more easily 1 Choose Recorder Menu gt 1 Song Edit gt Song Name Edit p 98 2 Assign a name to the song When you ve finished assigning a name press the 6 EXEC button For details on how to enter a name refer to Assigning a Name p 19 3 Press the 5 EXEC button Song Remove This operation removes a song from the SD card Choose Recorder Menu gt 1 Song Edit Song Remove p 98 The SONG REMOVE screen will appear Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the song that you want to remove The display will ask Song Remove OK If you are sure you want to remove the song press the 5 EXEC button If you decide not to remove the song press the 6 CANCEL button If you remove the song that you re currently using another song the SD card will be selected automatically If no other song exists a new song will be created Song Copy This allows you to make a copy of the currently selected song and save it under a new name on the SD card This comes in handy when for example you want to preserve a song in its current form simply make a copy of it before you carry out editing or record additional material Choose Recorder Menu gt 1 Song Edit Song p 98 The display will ask Copy to New Song If you are sure you want to copy the song press the 5 EXEC button If you decide not to copy the song press
159. access the STRUCTURE screen OFF OFF OFF P Lo E La MFA 81 EQUALIZER 2 815 EQUALIZER Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter you want to edit and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the value Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter that you M U Iti Effect 0 ntrol want to edit and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the value In order to control the multi effect s volume or delay time from an external MIDI device you would normally need to transmit system exclusive messages MIDI messages that are specific to the JUNO Gi MFX Structure TYPEO1 TYPEO3 Parameter Value Explanation Specifies how MFX 1 2 will be However system exclusive messages are more complex to set up and combined require a larger amount of data to be transmitted MFX1 2 00 THRU Specifies the multi effect type for each i 79 VOCODER MFX 1 2 For this reason the JUNO Gi allows you to use control changes and other common MIDI messages to control the most important multi effect parameters For example you might use the pitch bend lever to control the degree of distortion or use keyboard touch to change the delay time The parameters that can be controlled in this way are predetermined for each type of multi effect such par
160. ack one recording pass uses two events Operations such as punch in out or track copy also use up events The number of events that are used up will fluctuate in a complex way Even if there is capacity remaining on the memory card further recording or track editing will not be possible if all of the events are used up In such cases an error message such as Event Full will appear EMPTY The file was not found in SD card USB memory Make sure that the file exists on the SD card or in USB memory or File Not Found If when importing an audio file the audio file was not found in the SD card s ROLAND IMPORT folder Place the audio file in the ROLAND IMPORT folder p 101 This is a file that the JUNO Gi is unable to play Do not use this file If when importing an audio file you attempted to import a WAV AIFF file of a format that is not supported by the JUNO Gi the error message Incorrect File will appear and the import cannot be performed Use a WAV AIFF file that complies with the guidelines on p 101 Incorrect File The format of an SMF you intend to import to an arpegdio stile or rhythm patter must be Formae Make sure that the SMF you re importing is in Format 0 The SMF yowattempted toimport cannot belosded SMF data that contains a Bine signature other than the time signature into the JUNO Gi specified in the Pattern Beat p 124 setting cannot be loaded by the JUNO Gi You need to change the time signature d
161. akers Parameter Mic Type Mic Distance Mic Position Mic Level Value Explanation This setting selects the simulated microphone type DYN57 DYN421 CND451 CND87 FLAT This is the sound of the SHURE SM 57 a general use dynamic microphone used for instruments and vocals Optimal for use in miking guitar amps This is the sound of the SENNHEISER MD 421 a dynamic microphone with extended low end This is the sound of the AKG C451 a small diaphragm condenser microphone for use with instruments This is the sound of the NEUMANN U87 a large diaphragm condenser microphone with flat response Simulates a microphone with perfectly flat response Simulates the distance between the microphone and speaker OFF MIC ON MIC This setting points the microphone away from the speaker Provides conditions whereby the microphone is directed more towards the speaker This simulates the microphone position CENTER Simulates the condition that the microphone is set in the middle of the speaker cone Simulates the condition that the microphone is moved away from the center of the speaker cone Adjusts the volume of the microphone EQUALIZER Low Gain Parameter On Off Low Cut Low Gain Lo Mid Freq Lo Mid Q Lo Mid Gain Hi Mid Freq Hi Mid Q Hi Mid Gain High Gain High Cut Level NOISE SUPPRESSOR Parameter On Off Threshold Release
162. al punch in out and auto punch in out You use the Undo function 96 return to the state prior to re recording e The data prior to punching in out will remain on the SD card without being erased If you no longer need this data you should execute Song Optimize p 104 to erase the unneeded data from the SD card so that its storage capacity can be used effectively Manual Punch In Out In this method you punch in out by operating the 8 REC button When using manual punch in out you must ensure that there is at least a 1 0 second interval between punch in and punch out Select the track that you want to punch into as described in steps 2 3 of Selecting the track to record p 94 Press the 0 REC button to turn off its illumination thus exiting recording standby mode Move to a location slightly earlier than the point at which you want to begin rerecording and press the PLAY button to play back the song At the point where you want to begin rerecording press the REC button Punch in will begin and you ll be in record mode When you re ready to punch out press the 6 REC button or press the PLAY button Each time you press the 6 REC button you ll alternately punch in and punch out so simply perform the same procedure at any other location that you want to re record When you re finished recording press the Bl STOP button Aut
163. alkaline batteries or carbon zinc batteries The use of an AC adaptor is recommended as the unit s power consumption is relatively high Should you prefer to use batteries please use the rechargeable Ni MH type When installing or replacing batteries always turn off the power on this unit and disconnect any other devices you may have connected This way you can prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices We recommend that you keep batteries installed in the unit even though you ll be powering it with the AC adaptor That way you ll be able to continue a performance even if the cord of the AC adaptor gets accidently disconnected from the unit Do not allow any objects flammable material coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft drinks etc to penetrate the unit If used improperly batteries may explode or leak and cause damage or injury In the interest of safety please read and observe the following precautions Carefully follow the installation instructions for batteries and make sure you observe the correct polarity Avoid using new batteries together with used ones In addition avoid mixing different types of batteries Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time If a battery has leaked use a soft piece of cloth or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the discharge from the battery compartment Then install new batteries To avoid inflammation of the
164. ameters are indicated by a in the parameter lists in Multi Effects Parameters MFX1 2 p 48 Multi effect control is the capability of using MIDI messages in this way to control multi effect parameters in real time You can specify up to four multi effect control assignments for each MFX 1 2 In order to use multi effect control you ll need to specify which MIDI message Source will control which parameter Destination by what amount Sens 46 Chorus Settings CHORUS Reverb Settings REVERB From the EFFECT ROUTING screen p 45 press the 3 CHORUS button From the EFFECT ROUTING screen p 45 press the 4 REVERB button to access the CHORUS screen to access the REVERB screen Cee 81 CHORUS Be SRY Chords Level or Eewverb Lewve BE i Mi Filter HFF Pre Delay PRESENT id Cutoff Frea SGearHz1iE Time 50 Pre 1 a iiim Size 5 D anis PES ZHIIGH _ at MES REVERB g Q Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter that you Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter that you S want to edit and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set want to edit and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the value the value Parameter Value Explanation Parameter Value Explanation A Selects the type of chorus Selects the type of reverb Chorus Type 00 OFF Reverb Type 90
165. ancel Low frequency sounds localized in the center LOW a Type will be eliminated All sounds localized in the center will be ALL Mn eliminated Gn e If you want to save the changes you made to system settings press the 6 WRITE button If you want to exit without saving press the EXIT or 5 EXIT button e Center Cancel can not only be applied effectively to songs played using the USB Song Player but can also be used with respect to the sound when using USB Audio p 132 Detailed Settings for Minus One Here you can specify the parts that will be muted by Minus One when playing back an SMF song Parts for which this setting is ON will be muted 1 Inthe SONGLIST screen press the 5 SETUP button 2 Usethe cursor buttons to select to the part 1 16 that you want to change 3 Usethe VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to turn the setting on or off You can also use the following function buttons to turn the mute setting on off e Pressing the 1 1 ON button will turn on the mute setting for part e Pressing the 2 3 4 ON button will turn on the mute settings for parts 3 and 4 e Pressing the 3 ALL OFF button will turn off the mute settings for all parts CHD If you want to save the changes you made to system settings press the 6 WRITE button If you want to exit without saving press the EXIT or 5 EXIT button 129 spunos gt suonpunj 1
166. any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS 150 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada For C A US Proposition 65 WARNING This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer birth defects and other reproductive harm including lead
167. ar 3 Press the 6 SWITCH button The EFFECT SWITCH window will appear LEFF FELTI ROT this UPPER 1 Ler 81 EFFECT SWITCH CHORUS REVERB CLOSE 4 Press the 1 MFX 1 Button 4 REVERB buttons to turn each effect on off The effect will turn on off each time you press the button 5 Toclose the setting window press the 6 CLOSE button or the EXIT button You will return to the EFFECT ROUTING screen 44 Making Effect Settings 1 Select the live set to which you want to apply effects 2 Press the MENU button 3 Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select 2 Effect Edit and press the ENTER button The EFFECT ROUTING screen will appear Gn You can turn each layer on off by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the 1 4 buttons 4 Press the 2 MFX 4 REVERB button to select the effect for which you want to make settings Button Explanation Page Overall effect related settings such as 1 ROUTING the output destination and level of each 45 signal 2 MFX Multi effect settings p 48 3 CHORUS Chorus settings p 76 4 REVERB Reverb settings p 77 5 With the cursor located at the top line of the screen use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired effect type Example of MFX1 screen S41 gt EGUALIZER Low Frees 468 CHAZ 1 Low Gain 519461 Midi Frea
168. arameters are the same as for the woofer Sets the rotary speaker stereo image The higher the value set the wider the sound is spread out Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Output Level This is a stereo chorus A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the chorus sound Balance D Parameter Filter Type Cutoff Freq Pre Delay Rate Depth Phase Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Balance D Value Type of filter OFF LPF HPF 200 8000 Hz 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Explanation No filter is used Cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Freq Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Center frequency when using the filter to cut a specific frequency range Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Spatial spread of the sound Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Output Level 24 FLANGER This is a stereo flanger The LFO has the same phase for left and right It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the flanged sound Balance D corres 2 O Balance W Feedback Feedback
169. ard p 79 Do not format the SD card that is included with this product doing so will erase the demo data Disable write protection Use an SD card that has sufficient free space Format the SD card on the JUNO Gi p 79 Do not format the SD card that is included with this product doing so will erase the demo data Specifications JUNO Gi Synthesizer Keyboard Conforms to General MIDI 2 System Preset 371 Keyboard 61 keys with velocity Maximum Polyphony Parts Wave Memory Preset Memory User Memory Effects 128 voices Live Set 4 layers 16 parts 128 M bytes 16 bit linear equivalent Live Set 1 379 Tone 788 256 GM2 Rhythm Set 14 9 GM2 Live Set 256 Favorite 100 Multi Effects 2 systems 79 types Chorus 3 types Reverb 5 types Tracks Maximum Number Of Songs Memory Capacity Sample Rate Recording Time conversion in one track Nominal Input Level Effects Track 8 V Track 64 8 V Tracks per each Track Up to 2 tracks can be recorded simultaneously and to 8 tracks can be played back simultaneously 99 SD memory card supports SDHC cards to a maximum of 32 GB 44 1 kHz Card Capacity Recording Times Capacity Recording Times 1GB Approx 6 hours 8 GB Approx 48 hours 2 GB Approx 12 hours 16 GB Approx 96 hours 4GB Approx 24 hours 32 GB Approx 192 hours The maximum recording time storage used
170. are instruments such as drum sets Each key de Rhythm Set will play the sound of a different instrument or TERM Upper Owen SHIFT 2 Upper 2 On Off m 2 Tones and rhythm sets have the following groups SHIFT 3 Lower 1 On Off g LGL C SSS ESEEELLULLzwx 14 LLLLL LAZCIAINIIAA COCTTZZTZLEILSZC SHIFT 4 Lower 2 On Off Tone Group e rni PRESET These are the tones unique to the JUNO Gi e A These are tones compatible with the GM2 9e nq Ton es specification which was created as a common 4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the tone and models number field of the tone that you want to change It s not possible to edit or rewrite tones themselves on the JUNO Gi use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the However you can select the tones that will be played by a live set and desired tone number make relative adjustments offsets to the values of each tone You can You can select the tone group or tone type in the same way save the edited result in a user live set Parameter Value Selecting Tones or Rhythm Sets Tone Number 001 Tone Group PRST PRESET GM 1 Press the MENU button Tone Type Tone Rhy Rhythm 2 Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select 3 Layer Split and press the ENTER button Selecting Tones from the
171. as a numerical value Sixty fourth Sixty fourth note E Thirty second Thirty second 3 triplet note 3 note triplet note Sixteenth note Dotted thirty Sixteenth note Eighth note 3 triplet e second note 3 triplet Dotted sixteenth N Eighth note Quarter note D Dotted eighth note triplet note 3 note Whole note Dotted half note Whole note Double note triplet triplet Sk sie aa note Reverb Parameters These settings allow you to select the desired type of reverb and its characteristics Parameter Reverb Type Reverb Level Value Type of reverb 00 OFF 01 REVERB 02 SRV ROOM 03 SRV HALL 04 SRV PLATE 05 GM2 REVERB 0 127 Explanation Reverb will not be used Basic reverb Reverb that simulates the reverberation of a room Reverb that simulates the reverberation of a hall Simulation of a plate echo a reverb device that uses a metal plate GM2 reverb Volume of the reverb sound Type Time HF Damp Delay Feedback Type of reverb delay ROOM1 ROOM2 STAGE1 STAGE2 HALL1 HALL2 DELAY PAN DELAY 0 127 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 0 127 Short reverb with high density Short reverb with low density Reverb with greater late reverberation Reverb with strong early reflections Very clear sounding reverb Rich reverb Conventional delay effect Delay effect with echoes that pan left and right Time length of
172. assigned as the repeat region M mw p 3 R amp A1 The region you specified will be assigned as the auto punch in out region One measure before and after the A B region will be assigned as the repeat region Playback ayback 4 R amp A2 Tk Press EXIT button to close the A B SETTING screen Move to a location slightly earlier than the point at which you want to begin rerecording Select the track that you want to punch into as described in steps 2 3 of Selecting the track to record p 94 Press the PLAY button When you press the PLAY button you ll be able to record the region between punch in and punch out Re record your performance After the repeat playback will begin from the punch in location Listen to the re recorded result If you re not satisfied with the recording press the 6 REC button and re record from the beginning A of the next pass When you re finished recording press the Bl STOP button Canceling a Recording Editing Undo Redo Occasionally when the recording you make doesn t turn out as you wish or the settings you make for an editing operation are incorrect and you want to reverse what you have done At these times you can use the Undo function Undo will cancel the result of the operation and revert the data to its previous state If desired you can then use Redo to cancel the Undo For example le
173. at and press the ENTER button A confirmation message will appear icon ETs ELS IIA Mom Frnrmat Messaqe from JUM isi All the data on the SD Card will be Tot AN Press ESEC CAMCEL To execute the format operation press the 5 EXEC button To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button Backing Up SD Card Data to Your Computer Here s how to back up SD card data to your computer In order to perform this procedure you ll need a computer and a commercially available SD card reader Switch off the JUNO Gi s power Remove the SD card from the JUNO Gi and use a commercially available SD card reader to open the SD card on your computer The JUNO Gi s SD card slot is covered by an SD card protector which is fastened by screws To remove the card remove the screws as described in About SD Cards p 15 Copy drag and drop the entire ROLAND folder from the SD card onto your computer You must copy the entire ROLAND folder Copying just part of the files of the ROLAND folder will not create a correct backup When copying is completed unmount disconnect the SD card from the computer and then remove the SD card from the SD card reader Windows 7 Vista XP users In My Computer or Computer right click the removable disk icon and choose Eject Mac OSX users Drag the SD card icon to the Trash Restoring Backed Up Data to an
174. ata of the SMF An un large amount of MIDI received MIDI Buffer Full data was recaived Reduce the amount of MIDI messages that are being transmitted and could not be processed Check that there is no problem with the MIDI cable connected to the I JUNO Gi s MIDI IN and that the MIDI cable was not disconnected No Data The track data you are trying to export was not found Select the track where track data exists There are no songs on the SD card Create a new song p 91 No Song Incorrect data is in the song folder or the necessary data Restore the data backed up on the computer to the JUNO Gi In this is not present case restore each ROLAND folder to the JUNO Gi p 79 Now Playing The Song Player Digital Recorder is currently playing Either stop playback or wait until playback has ended Now Recording The Digital Recorder is currently recording Either stop record or wait until record has ended The rhythm pattern cannot be recorded any further Pattern Full because you have exceeded the maximum number of Delete unneeded data from the rhythm pattern you re recording notes recordable in a single rhythm pattern Since the data on the SD card is stored in a fragmented state it is taking too long to read write the data Alternatively you re using an SD card whose processing Reduce the number of tracks being played back simultaneously You can speed is too slo
175. aves the pattern SHIFT 6 INIT Initializes the pattern Controller Explanation Cursor buttons Select the position at which to enter a note Specify the scale equivalent to the cursor buttons ENTER Enters deletes a note DEC INC B gt PLAY Plays the pattern STOP Stops the pattern 1444 Moves the editing location to the beginning lt lt Moves the editing location toward the beginning gt gt gt Moves the editing location toward the end INIT Initializing a Pattern If you want to create a pattern from scratch rather than by modifying an existing one you can initialize the pattern 1 Inthe PATTERN EDIT screen hold down the SHIFT button and press the 6 INIT button A confirmation message will appear 2 Pressthe 5 EXEC button To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button 124 SETUP Specify the Time Signature and Length Here s how to specify the time signature and length of the pattern 1 Inthe PATTERN EDIT screen press the 1 SETUP button 2 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to the item that you want to edit and use the VALUE dial or DEC INC to edit the value Parameter Value Explanation 2 4 7 4 5 8 7 8 9 8 Pattern time signature 12 8 9 16 11 16 13 16 15 16 17 16 19 16 Pattern Beat This can be set only for an empty pattern 1 32 Pattern length Measure Length You can t set this shorter than the number of
176. ay backlight when it s not required The characters in the display may be difficult to read immediately after 4 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the EXIT button the power is turned on or after you have been using the JUNO Gi for an extended time or due to the conditions in which it s being used If this occurs turn the rear panel LCD CONTRAST knob to make the display legible Turning the display backlight on M IM AQ The display backlight will turn off OUTPUT 1 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the ENTER button LCD SONG CONTRAST R L MONO PHONES CLICK OUT The display backlight will turn on Gn The System setting Power Save Mode 80 lets you choose to turn i 2 2 2 2 off the backlight when no operation has been performed for a certain length of time With the factory settings the backlight will dim after five minutes spunos gt suonpunj 197159 3jj3 bunip3 Screens shown in this manual Various screens are shown in this manual for explanatory purposes but please be aware that the screen shots in this manual may not necessarily match the factory settings e g the names of sounds gt La Ma et E ie 3 3 14 2 Japsoray 1293 1 k ejd DUOS Kiowa 950 xipuaddy 17 Basic Operation of the JUNO Gi About the Function Buttons The 1
177. can also change the Favorites bank even if the FAVORITE ON OFF button is off 3 Use the 0 9 buttons to select a Favorites number The screen s function buttons not available if the FAVORITE ON OFF button is on If you want to use the 0 9 buttons as function buttons turn off the FAVORITE ON OFF button 24 Registering Calling Up or Editing Favorites a List Regardless of whether FAVORITE ON OFF button is on or off you can view a list of the favorites you ve registered and add or call up registrations You can also remove a previously registered favorite or change the number to which it s registered Hold down the SHIFT button and press the FAVORITE ON OFF button The FAVORITE LIST screen will appear Bank Number LI M Eank ei IUBPHRST o81 5 124 PRST 364 1 5 264 SSKeYorand 1 Rock 1 E BS JOHO 0r Favorite Number Use the 4 P buttons to select the desired bank Use the VALUE dial the A V buttons or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired favorite Button ENTER button or 6 SELECT button Explanation Calls up the selected favorite 1 REMOVE Removes the selected favorite button Registers the currently selected live set at the selected favorite number If a favorite has already been registered at the selected number the registration will be overwrit
178. cel press the 6 CANCEL button e Never turn off the power while saving is in progress e You can t save effect patches while recording or playing a song 107 spunos gt suonpunj 1 ZIS Y U 3jj3 bunip3 b zt 5 Q 31 3 14 2 Japs0ray 261 sayy u1 d Jakejq Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Changing the Location of the Insert value Explanation Use this setting if you want to apply the effect to the overall sound such as when using the effect to modify the sound during bounce recording or using the effect to achieve a special sound Effects LOCATION By default the insert effects are connected inserted directly after the input source This means that you ll be able to hear and record the sound processed by the effect However in some cases you may wish to change this method of connection The JUNO Gi lets you change the location where the insert Sven Sh effects are connected thus allowing you to use the effect in a variety TAKI of ways TRACK 8 PLAY 1 In the recorder s effects screen press the 1 INS FX button The INSERT FX screen will appear 2 Press the 4 LOC button The INSERT FX LOCATION screen will appear 3 Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the 4 When you ve finished making settings press the EXIT location where the insert effects are to b
179. corder Connect your digital audio player or other audio device to the LINE jacks Connect your microphone or guitar to the GUITAR MIC jack as shown in the illustration To adjust the level use the LEVEL knob located at the left of the jacks Adjust the knob so that the front INPUT d panel PEAK indicator lights orange during the loudest passages If this indicator lights red input overload has occurred PEDAL L GUITAR MIC PHANTOM T IN CONTRO HOLD MIN AN 1 i If you connect a guitar or bass set this to GUITAR Output Jack of your digital If you re using a condenser microphone audio player connect it to the balanced XLR jack and E DPA choose the PHANTOM ON setting Phantom power is not supplied to the phone jack LINE OUT jacks of your stereo system If you re using a dynamic microphone choose the PHANTOM setting Always turn the phantom power off when connecting any device other than condenser microphones that require phantom power You risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply phantom power to dynamic microphones audio playback devices or other devices that don t require such power Be sure to check the specifications of any microphone you intend to use by referring to the manual that came with it This instrument s phantom power 48 V DC 10 mA Max
180. ct pedals that a guitarist connects between his guitar effects can be used simultaneously Such a combination of effects and amp are a type of the insert effects You can use the insert effects i e the types of the effects used and the order in which they are not only while recording but also apply it to the sound when mixing connected is called an algorithm the tracks Each effect in an algorithm offers a certain number of parameters Insert effects provide various types of effects driven by COSM which allow the sound to be altered similar to tweaking the knobs on spunos gt technology a stomp pedal The algorithm and its parameter settings are bundled into units called effect patches Reverb Separately from the insert effects the Digital Recorder section also What IS d Ba n s j 79 provides a Reverb effect that can be applied to each of the song s 252542929 292952222499929242 421225 4 2 6299229 22 2 tracks and to the INPUT jack You can apply the insert effects and 2 dee j y The effect patches are organized into the following banks Choose the reverb simultaneously and make settings for each as appropriate for bank that s appropriate for the device you re recording your situation Bank Explanation ne lt Mastering Too Kit GUITAR Effects for guitar 2 When creating an audio CD from your recorded songs the overall MIC Effects for microphone e volume needs to be rest
181. cy of modulation Depth of modulation Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the flanger W and the sound that is not sent through the flanger D Output Level 74 ENHANCER DELAY Lin Parameter Enhancer Sens Enhancer Mix Delay Time Delay Feedback Delay HF Damp Delay Balance Level 0 2600 msec note 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 75 CHORUS DELAY Balance D L in H in Balance D Parameter Value Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 msec Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Chorus Depth 0 127 Chorus Balance Delay Time Delay Feedback Delay HF Damp Delay Balance Level D100 0W D0 100W 0 2600 msec note 98 4 9890 200 8000 Hz BYPASS D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Balance D Explanation Sensitivity of the enhancer Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent th
182. d Low Pass Filter This reduces the volume of all frequencies above the Cutoff Frequency in order to round off or un brighten the sound Band Pass Filter This leaves only the frequencies in the region of the Cutoff Frequency and cuts the rest This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds High Pass Filter This cuts the frequencies in the region below the Cutoff Frequency This is suitable for creating percussive sounds emphasizing their higher tones Peaking Filter This emphasizes the frequencies in the region of the Cutoff Frequency You can use this to create wah wah effects by employing an LFO to change the Cutoff Frequency cyclically Low Pass Filter 2 Although frequency components above the Cutoff Frequency are cut the sensitivity of this filter is half that of the LPF This filter is good for use with simulated instrument sounds such as the acoustic piano If you set LPF2 the setting for the Resonance parameter will be ignored Low Pass Filter 3 Although frequency components above the Cutoff Frequency are cut the sensitivity of this filter changes according to the Cutoff Frequency While this filter is also good for use with simulated acoustic instrument sounds the nuance it exhibits differs from that of the LPF2 even with the same TVF Envelope settings If you set LPF3 the setting for the Resonance parameter will be ignored The setting of the tone assigned to the layer wi
183. d D and chorus sound W Output Level Low Band Feedback High Band Feedback Value 200 8000 Hz 0 0 100 msec High Band Low Band Feedback Low Band Flanger Explanation Frequency at which the low and high ranges will be divided Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the low range flanger sound is heard Parameter Low Rate Low Depth Low Phase Low Feedback High Pre Delay High Rate High Depth High Phase High Feedback Balance Level 34 2 BAND STEP FLANGER Value 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 98 98 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 98 98 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Explanation Rate at which the low range flanger sound is modulated Modulation depth for the low range flanger sound Spaciousness of the low range flanger sound Proportion of the low range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the high range flanger sound is heard Rate at which the high range flanger sound is modulated Modulation depth for the high range flanger sound Spaciousness of the high range flanger sound Proportion of the high range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Volume balance of the original sound D and flang
184. d that is to be returned to the input of delay 2 negative values invert the phase Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of delay 2 negative values invert the phase Frequency at which the high frequency content of the delayed sound of delay 2 will be cut BYPASS no cut Parameter Pan Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Value L64 63R 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 46 MODULATION DELAY Adds modulation to the delayed sound When Feedback Mode is NORMAL Feedback Feedback Hin Balance D Balance D When Feedback Mode is CROSS L in Parameter Delay Left Delay Right Feedback Mode Feedback HF Damp Rate Depth Phase Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Feedback Feedback Balance D Balance D Value 0 1300 msec note NORMAL CROSS 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Explanation Panning of the delay sound Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance of the original sound D and delay sound W Output Level L out Explanation Adjusts the time until the delay sound is heard Selects the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect See the figures above Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the
185. d to the inputs AUDIO INPUT jacks may be low If this happens use connection cables that do not contain resistors e Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by 1 Changing the orientation of the microphone s 2 Relocating microphone s at a greater distance from speakers 3 Lowering volume levels 12 M IM AQ OUTPUT jacks Connect your speakers here To employ monaural output connect to the L MONO jack DC IN jack Connect the included AC adaptor here SD card slot Insert an SD card here When the JUNO Gi is shipped from the factory the included SD card is inserted and the SD card protector is fastened with screws If you want to replace the card remove the screws as described in About SD Cards p 15 Place the AC adaptor so the side with the indicator see illustration faces upwards and the side with textual information faces downwards The indicator will light when you plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet spunos gt To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit should the plug be pulled out accidentally and to avoid applying undue stress to the DC IN jack anchor the power cord using the cord hook as shown in the illustration suonpunj 1 ZIS Y U LCD Ww SONG B ve RECORDER e USB CONTRAST 0 PHONES CL
186. dal 30 CONTROL Pedal Settings erm RR RYE REIS 30 Performing with a Microphone 30 Using the 30 Changing the Vocoder 5 30 Using the Chord Memory Function 31 About the Chord Memory 31 Performing with the Chord Memory 31 Chord Memory Settings 31 Playing Arpeggios ARPEGGIO 32 22 8114552 4 d es sepes 32 Playing by Using 32 Turning Arpeggio and 32 Holding an 1 32 Determining the Tempo for Arpeggio Performances 32 Arpeggio 5et hgs i idedesestatereit rkew 32 Saving Arpeggio Settings WRITE 33 Importing SMF on Your Computer to an Arpeggio Style 33 Synthesizer 3 Editing Effects Editing a Live Set LIVE SET EDIT 34 Basic Operations in the LIVE SET EDIT 5 34 Initializing 35 Copying Exchanging Layers 35 Saving Live Set WRITE 35 LIVE SET EDIT 3
187. dal is pressed controls the vocoder resonant sound i Level 0 127 22 227 2 Frequency of the filter that cuts the voceder 5 Pre LPF 16 15000 Hz BYPASS the high frequency content of ua the input sound BYPASS no cut 5 Frequency of the filter that cuts BYPASS 16 15000Hz the low frequency content of the N om input sound BYPASS no cut Frequency of the filter that e Peaking Freq 200 8000 Hz boosts cuts a specific frequency a region of the input sound Amount of boost cut produced Peaking Gain 15 415 dB by the filter at the specified frequency region of the input gt sound Width of the frequency region US Peaking 05 0 20 20 80 by the Peaking Gain parameter larger values 2 make the region narrower z Frequency at which the HF Damp 1615000 Hz BYPASS MOM requency content ofthe resonant sound will be cut zy BYPASS no cut ES Frequency at which the El m LF Damp BYPASS 16 1000 Hz OW Been Consent onthe 2 resonant sound will be cut et BYPASS no cut This simulates the actual changes Lid in sound that occur when the lid of a grand piano is set at E different heights gt DA EQ Low Freq 200 400 Hz Frequency of the low range EQ E a EQ Low Gain 15 15 dB Amount of low range boost cut gt EQ Mid Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency of the midrange EQ EQ Mid Gain 15 15 dB Amount of midrange boost cut E EQ Mid Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 W
188. ding using two tracks Stereo link p 89 will be enabled or disabled for the pair of tracks you pressed simultaneously Recording 4 Press the lt lt PLAY b buttons The 6 REC PLAY buttons will light and recording will begin The button of the track being recorded will light red 5 To stop recording press the STOP button The 9 REC PLAY buttons will go dark You can t play back audio whose recording time was shorter than one second The following operations cannot be performed or will be invalid while the recorder is operating i e during recording or playback e Recorder Menu e Undo Redo e Switching a mode 1 MODE button e Arrange editing etc Re Recording Over a Mistake Punch TU During recording you may sometimes play a wrong note or be unsatisfied with your performance In such cases you can punch in out to re record just a specific region of your performance Punch in is the action of switching from playback to recording while you play back a track Punch out is the action of switching from recording back to playback while the track continues to play In other words you punch in at the point where you want to start re recording and punch out when you re finished recording Playback Playback i i Time j Start Punch In Punch Out Stop On the JUNO Gi you can choose from two methods of doing this manu
189. down the Bl button and press the KEYBOARD INPUT 9 song gt gt button 4 4 gt REPEAT A lt PB e Playback will not stop automatically even if you play back to the end of the song e Use of the demo song supplied with this product for any purpose other than private personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law Additionally this data must not be copied nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder Move in steps of hours minutes seconds frames sub frames Move in steps of measures beats Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the hours minutes seconds frames sub frames indication and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to change the time Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the measure beat indication and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to change the measure beat 87 spunos gt suonpunj 1971594 3jj3 bunip3 gt Ma et 2 Jap10ray eyIbIG sayy u1 d FEY CP Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Muting Tracks AITAL RECORDER Track button operations Button Status Explanation Unlit Controlling tracks 1 4 TRACK 1 4 5 8 Lit red Controlling tracks 5 8 RHYTHM Unlit Rhythm Pattern function is off PATTERN Lit g
190. ds to become wet e Do not disassemble or modify the cards The JUNO Gi supports SDHC memory cards Some memory card types or memory cards from some manufacturers may not record or playback properly on the JUNO Gi The memory card write protect feature LOCK The contents of the memory card can be protected by write protecting it To write protect a card slide the write protect switch on the side of the memory card to the LOCK position Unlock write protect to delete data on the card Write protect switch Handling CD ROMs e Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner Copyright e Recording duplication distribution sale lease performance or broadcast of copyrighted material musical works visual works broadcasts live performances etc belonging to a third party in part or in whole without the permission of the copyright owner is forbidden by law This product can be used to record or duplicate audio or visual material without being limited by certain technological copy protection measures This is due to the fact that this product is intended to be used for the purpose of producing original music or video material and is therefore designed so that material that does not infringe copyrights belonging to others for example your own original works can be
191. e multi effect control to control that parameter e If you specify the delay time as a note value slowing down the tempo will not change the delay time beyond a certain length This is because there is an upper limit for the delay time if the delay time is specified as a note value and you slow down the tempo until this upper limit is reached the delay time cannot change any further This upper limit is the maximum value that can be specified when setting the delay time as a numerical value When Using 3D Effects The following 3D effects utilize RSS Roland Sound Space technology to create a spaciousness that cannot be produced by delay reverb chorus etc 52 3D DELAY 29 3D CHORUS 30 3D FLANGER 31 3D STEP FLANGER When using these effects we recommend that you place your speakers as follows Also make sure that the speakers are at a sufficient distance from the walls on either side If the left and right speakers are too far alayer or if there is too much reverberation the full 3D effect may not appear Each of these effects has an Output Mode parameter If the sound from the OUTPUT jacks is to be heard through speakers set this parameter to SPEAKER If the sound is to be heard through headphones set it to PHONES This will ensure that the optimal 3D effect will be heard If this parameter is not set correctly
192. e 123 eee S ME e EP egg Osc 1 Pulse ice m USA EUR F Env 41 Osc 1 Waveform th Click 83 F Env V Sens 41 LIVE SET EDIT 1 screen 36 Osc2C T 3 CLICKOUT LIVE SET EDIT 2SCIESD 37 2 sees 2 4 EET E Filter Type 40 84 T ol ed TR i ced QEON NM Cose TUO 36 Pine TUNE 36 mcr 22 Osc 2 Pulse Width a Ad uo TO aena ee Me aana a Canaan Cutoff 38 format RUND DEDE 79 LiveSet Tempo 38 Osc 2 Waveform 38 functional ground terminal 13 Liveset Temna Switch 83 Osc Sync Switch ous corr function buttons 18 ia 7 5 Common Resonance offset 38 Local SWICCIES 82 COMP 12 108 A 79 132 G loop 96 Continuous Hold 82 GENERAL 39 80 Low Freq 81 89 Output Level x 1 C 552 CONTROL pedal 30 cM 128 LOWI iis ovis sess 29 p Con
193. e JUNO Gi from an external MIDI connected device use the MIDI channel that s specified by the System setting Main Channel p 82 If the SPLIT button is on the MIDI receive channel for the Lower layer can be specified by the Sub Channel p 82 setting separately from the Main Channel 26 Changing the Tone or Volume in the LAYER SPLIT Screen In the LAYER SPLIT screen you can use the cursor buttons to move the cursor and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to change the following values Split Point Split Switch W means 7 282 PEST Tone Strings 5 5 Tone 1 Parameter Value Explanation Switch OFF ON Split on off Split Point OFF C G9 Specifies the Split Point and 1 Layer Tone Tone Tone Level Switch Number Group Type Parameter Value Explanation Layer Switch OFF ON v Layer on off Number 001 Tone Number Type Tone Rhy Rhythm Tone Type Group PRST PRESET GM Tone Group Volume of each layer This 0 127 setting s main purpose is to adjust the volume balance between layers If you want to exchange the Upper and Lower tones refer to Copying Exchanging Layers p 35 Changing the Split Point In Split keyboard mode here s how to change the split point the location at which the keyboard is divided 1 Hold down the SPLIT butto
194. e connected button Value Explanation This lets you monitor and record the sound that is processed through the insert effects Normally you should use this setting INPUT NORMAL This lets you monitor the sound that is processed through the insert effects but record the sound before it has passed through the insert effects i e record the dry sound Use this setting if you want to try out various effect settings after recording INPUT REC DRY This lets you apply the insert effects to the track playback audio Use this setting if you want to try out effects after recording the dry sound or if you want to apply the effect only to a specific track TRACK 1 8 1 2 7 8 TRACK 1 This lets you apply the insert effects to the rhythm sound RHYTHM J 108 Insert Effects Parameters The trademarks listed in this document are trademarks of their respective owners which are separate companies from Roland Those companies are not affiliated with Roland and have not licensed or authorized Roland s JUNO Gi Their marks are used solely to identify the equipment whose sound is simulated The algorithms the available effects and their connection order that can be used as the insert effects are shown below The algorithms that can be selected will differ for each bank Gn The line or lines connecting the algorithm indicate whether the effect features mono output single line or
195. e is set to c TD Preview 1 4 OFF SINGLE or CHORD eo Velocity 1 127 If PHRASE is selected for the Preview Parameter KAWE Sneon Mode parameter these settings will have Specifies the time after which the power will no effect been performed Auto Power Off OFF When the power turns off any unsaved Scale Tune Switch OFF ON Turn this on when you wish to use a tuning 5 240min modifications that you ve made in the settings scale other than equal temperament will be lost If you want to keep the setting changes you ve made make sure to save them These templates make the settings for Scale Tune C B in one beforehand operation ORE Specifies the time after which the backlight USER User setting Power Save Mode will be turned off to save power if no Scale Tune Type EQUAL Equal temperament template operation has been performed JUST Just intonation template The Live Set group first loaded when the power is turned on E FM ARABIC Arabian scale template USER User live set Power Up Group Scale Tune Ke C B Specifies the scale tonic when Scale Tune PRESET Preset Live Set y Type is JUST or ARABIC SPECIAL Special Live Set tort ee Specifies the pitch adjustment for each note Master Level 0 127 Volume of the entire JUNO Gi of the scale 80 Equal temperament This divides the octave into twelve equal
196. e multi effects 1 2 on off Switch the chorus on off Switch the reverb on off Transmit the MIDI message specified by the System setting Sys Ctrl 1 4 Source Turns the Layer Switch On Off for the specified layer The way in which the S1 S2 buttons will operate when pressed Depending on the Assign setting this may not be available LATCH MOMENTARY The on off status will alternate each time you press the button The assigned function will turn on while you press the button and will turn off when you release it p RO E D IT Scree n Parameter Value Explanation The tone begins to play after the time specified NORM in the Tone Delay Time parameter has elapsed Basic operations in the Pro Edit screen Although the tone begins to play after the time specified in the Tone Delay Time parameter has Basic operations in the Pro Edit screen are the same as described in Basic Operations in HOLD elapsed if the key is released before the time the LIVE SET EDIT Screen p 34 but the function buttons operate as follows specified in the Tone Delay Time parameter has elapsed the tone is not played LUEEeri Dookeusrand 1 TE Li Lz Rather than being played while the key is pressed the tone begins to play once the e aT OHER TOME period of time specified in the Tone Delay gt Leaato ketri
197. e of your song e gt Ma et SD cards store the following data e Data recorded by the Digital Recorder e Backup data for the JUNO Gi 31 3 14 2 Rhythm Pattern By using a commercially available high capacity SD SDHC card you ll be able to record for extended lengths of time USB memory USB memory is used as playback media for the USB Memory Song Player Data recorded by the Digital E Recorder and backup data of the JUNO Gi can t be 12345678 saved to USB memory Japsoray 12913 Insert Effects The digital recorder provides effects i e separately from the synthesizer s effects that are powerful enough to rival a standalone effects processor and you can apply these effects to your guitar or other source while you record What is an Effect Patch The insert effects provide numerous effects such as amp modeling and overdrive An Effect Patch is a combination of these effects together with their settings UJ933ed Kiowa 950 Over Drive Reverb xipuaddy Panel Descriptions Front Panel Number 10 USB MEMORY SONG PLAYER area 10 Name USB MEMORY slot SONG LIST button PLAY STOP button D BEAM VOLUME knob KEYBO
198. e one arrangement What is an rhythm set About Patterns and Arra ngements 4 is the set of drum sounds that played by the pattern Broadly speaking the JUNO Gi s rhythms consist of performance data For each song one Rhythm Set number is remembered Turning the Rhythm Pattern On Off RECORDER TRACK MIXER spunos gt suonpunj uan lt 5 e D v N mD Lam 1 rri 5 lt A wn What is a pattern If you re a drummer playing a band you will normally repeat fixed patterns that are one or two measures in length These are the basic units of repetition and are called patterns on the JUNO Gi You can also edit a pattern to create your own original rhythm pattern The JUNO Gi contains various patterns created for use the L4 introduction verse fill and ending The pattern type is indicated by the letters at the of the pattern name E Pattern Explanation IN Intro A performance pattern for use during an introduction These are the main performance patterns 1 is the V Verse 1 2 basic pattern and 2 is a more advanced variation z lt oii 1 Press the RHYTHM PATTERN button to turn the Rhythm m These are performance patterns typically inserted Pattern on off m F Fill 1 2 at transitions between phrases Choose
199. e that the SMF to be imported is no longer than 32 measures maximum of 99 files can be imported 126 amp USB MEMORY SONG PLAYER ASSIGNABLE SONG PLAYER OO 52 SONG PLAY LIST STOP use RECORDER COMPUTER KEYBOARD MIDI CTRL TEMPO TRANS OCTAVE POSE DOWN UP USB Memory Song Player AUDIO INPUT LEVEL CHORD ARPEGGIO MEMORY UNE TEVEL DIGITAL RECORDER RECORDER VIEW REC SOURCE SELECT AUDIO PEAK UNDO hebo KEYBOARD INPUT j gt gt REPEAT OOO0g SOUND MODIFY 1971594 sbhuljjas 42410 53yj3 bunip3 spunos 3 3 14 2 REVERB HIGH CUTOFF RESONANCE 4 Japsoray 23161 Roland Sa 2 gt Yo 3 jake xipuaddy Playing Song Files from USB Memory The USB Memory Song Player is able to play audio files WAV MP3 AIFF or Standard MIDI Files SMF that you ve copied from your computer to USB memory Insert the USB Memory 1 Insert your USB
200. e tone while completely muting the other strings This processor allows you to change the sound produced by the pickup on an acoustic electric guitar creating a richer sound similar to that obtained with a microphone placed close to the guitar You can select the acoustic guitar type By adding varied phase portions to the direct sound the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound You can select the phaser configuration The flanging effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the sound Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume This produces an effect like the sound of a rotary speaker If you set Control Pedal Assign p 81 to INSERT FX CTRL you can use an expression pedal or a foot switch to change SLOW FAST of the speaker s rotating speed This models a Uni Vibe Although this resembles a phaser effect it also provides a unique modulation that you can t get with a regular phaser Alternately changes the volume level of the left and right channels When monitoring the sound in stereo this effect makes the guitar sound fly back and forth between the speakers This is a booster with unique characteristics in the midrange This produces a great sound for solos This not only functions as a booster but also produces a clean tone that has punch even when used alone This is a booster that has bright sound characteristics BLUES BLUES OD C
201. e two tracks or stereo 4 Usethecursor buttons and the VALUE dial or the DEC INC to optimize the level volume of your completed song And you can buttons to select the desired patch for the Mastering Tool convert mastering data into an audio file Kit What is Mastering Tool Kit When creating an audio CD from your recorded songs the overall volume needs to be restrained so that even the loudest portions of the songs are handled appropriately on the CD However this often results in an overall lowering of the volume resulting in a CD that lacks Choose one of the patch numbers from the preset song or user excitement and impact With the Mastering Tool Kit however you can groups smooth out the differences in volume that occur over the course of a song while also correcting the balance 5 Press the EXIT button to return to the RECORDER screen We recommend mastering with the Mastering Tool Kit in the final 6 Play backthe song and use the MASTER slider to adjust the stage of creating songs master level The patches of the Mastering Tool Kit are organized into the following Raise the volume level until it is as high as you can get it without three groups causing the level meter to reach the maximum the point at which _ _ distortion would occur Group Explanation Edit Write ase Tarset Tracki 132 Y I
202. ection xipuaddy e Water pipes may result in shock or electrocution Gas pipes may result in fire or explosion e Telephone line ground or lightning rod may be dangerous in the event of lightning About Batteries 14 10 42 When to Replace the Batteries BATTERY life will depend on the specifications of the battery and on the conditions of use but for continuous use will be Indicator approximately 3 hours approximately 2 hours if USB memory is connected The BATTERY indicator shows the state of the BATTERY batteries e About rechargeable batteries When using rechargeable batteries the battery lifespan will normally become shorter with each recharge cycle If the batteries run down soon after being recharged it s Indication Explanation time to replace them Unlit Batteries are not installed Installing Batteries Sf remaining Red Batteries have run low We recommend that you replace the 1 Switch off the JUNO Gi s power p 16 batteries Batteries are nearly depleted Stop use and recharge the 2 Removethe cover of the battery compartment located on batteries If you continue using the JUNO Gi when the the JUNO Gi s bottom panel indicator is blinking red the indication Battery Low will appear and further operation will not be possible While pressing the tabs of the cover lift the cover up and remove it The remaining battery indication
203. ector 130 Appendix Connecting to Your Computer via USB 132 Connecting the JUNO Gi to Your Computer 132 Connecting an External MIDI Device 133 cee cet 133 About MIDICODRGCEOIS 133 Using the JUNO Gi as Master Keyboard MIDI Controller Mode 133 Specifying the Transmit 133 Detailed Settings in MIDI Controller Mode 133 Playing the JUNO Gi from an External MIDI Device 134 Setting the Receive 134 Setting the Program Change Receive Switch 134 Synchronizing with an External MIDI 134 Transmitting Synchronization Data 134 Using the Keyboard to Control Images V LINK 135 What is Vp A ERE BER PEE Ad 135 Turning the V LINK ON OPF oo do di ma tane Map OPERE ET ERE 135 gt s dure tuti 135 Chord Memory et IRR FREIER 136 Error Message 15 138 Troubleshooting 140 veio tad 143 MIDI Implementation 144 GON da os 145 USING THE UNIT 147 IMPORTANT 5 148 Before using t
204. ed cyclically L in Super Filter R in Super Filter Parameter Value Filter type LPF Filter Type BPF HPF NOTCH 12 dB Filter Slope 24 dB 36 dB Filter Cutoff 0 127 Filter Resonance Filter Gain 0 412 dB Modulation Sw OFF ON Modulation Wave Rate Depth Attack Level TRI SOR SIN SAW1 SAW2 SAW1 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 127 0 127 L out H out Explanation Frequency range that will pass through each filter Frequencies below the cutoff Frequencies in the region of the cutoff Frequencies above the cutoff Frequencies other than the region of the cutoff Amount of attenuation per octave Gentle Steep Extremely steep Cutoff frequency of the filter Increasing this value will raise the cutoff frequency Filter resonance level Increasing this value will emphasize the region near the cutoff frequency Amount of boost for the filter output On off switch for cyclic change How the cutoff frequency will be modulated Triangle wave Square wave Sine wave Sawtooth wave upward Sawtooth wave downward SAW2 Rate of modulation Depth of modulation Speed at which the cutoff frequency will change This is effective if Modulation Wave is SOR SAW1 or SAW2 Output level 06 STEP FILTER This is a filter whose cutoff frequency can be modulated in steps You can specify the pattern by which the cutoff frequency will change L in Step Filte
205. ed in the ROLAND EXPORT folder on the SD card 102 About the file name Files created using the Track Export procedure are named as follows Ex T1 V1 01 WAV T34V8 99 WAV The file name will be the source track and V track number plus a sequential number and the extension WAV If an identically named file already exists the display will ask Overwrite Gen e You can audition an exported WAV file in the TRACK IMPORT screen p 101 by pressing the 5 PREVIEW button e With the Track Export function a maximum of approximately 6 hours and 40 minutes worth of monaural data approximately 3 hours and 20 minutes worth of stereo data can be output SONG EDIT Menu This is a menu of song related operations 1 Song Select Refer to Selecting and Playing a Song Song Select p 87 5 Create New Song Refer to Creating a New Song Create New Song p 91 3 Information This displays detailed information about the song 1 Choose Recorder Menu gt 1 Song Edit gt Information p 98 The screen will show the Song Name Song Folder Name on the SD card Song Size and Free Size on the SD card he ars Sons Names 1 _ Want It gt 1 2 Song Name Edit When you create a new song it will automatically be given a name such as 50360001 When you ve finished your song we recommend that you give it a descriptive name so that you ll be
206. egins to be applied J gt CUTOFF Cutoff 64 CUTOFF Cutoff 64 Taming the knob toward the right Turning the equalizer on off EQ ON OFF button will brighten the sound and turning 2 it toward the left will darken the You can use the EQ ON OFF button to turn the equalizer on off 2 sound 29 Using Pedals You can connect a hold pedal sold separately DP series and an expression pedal sold separately EV 5 to the JUNO Gi If an optional hold pedal DP series is connected to the rear panel PEDAL HOLD jack you can press the hold pedal to cause notes to sustain or hold even after their keys have been released If an optional expression pedal or pedal switch EV 5 DP series is connected to the rear panel PEDAL CONTROL jack 1 2 you can use the pedal to control the volume or various functions Holding Notes HOLD Pedal While playing the keyboard press the hold pedal The notes will be held while you are pressing the hold pedal Adding Expression to Your Performance CONTROL Pedal While playing the keyboard raise and lower the expression pedal 2 CONTROL Pedal Settings 30 You can assign various performance related functions to a pedal that is connected to the rear panel PEDAL CONTROL jack Press the MENU button Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select 4 System
207. either 1 or 2 depending on the pattern that will follow the fill Button State Explanation E Ending A performance pattern used at the end of the song RHYTHM Unlit Rhythm Pattern function is off PATTERN Lit green Rhythm Pattern function is on ROCK1 IN Intro ROCKT V1 Verse 1 Adjusting the volume of the Rhythm Pattern ROCK1 F1 Fill 1 1 Use the RHYTHM PATTERN slider to adjust the volume Jap10ray 3010 sayy e ROCK1 V2 Verse 2 ROCKI F2 Fill 2 Editing the Pan Reverb and EQ of the e ROCK1 E Ending The patterns are organized into the following groups Rhyth m Pattern 1933 4 Pattern Group Refer to Adjusting the Pan Reverb and EQ TRACK SETTING p 89 These are preset patterns that cannot be rewritten ST PRESET However you are free to edit the currently selected pattern and then save it as a User or Song pattern SE lt These patterns are saved in the JUNO Gi s internal memory D USER lt These patterns can be used by multiple songs SONG These patterns are saved as part of the song These patterns cannot be used in other songs gt a gt 5 gt lt 121 Displaying the RHYTHM PATTERN aem screen 2 Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC button to set the recorder tempo 1 Inthe RECORDER screen press the
208. em that 5 1 Press the CHORD MEMORY button to turn it on you want to edit 3 Use the VALUE dial or DEC INC to edit the value ARPEGGI MEMORY 47 tem Value Explanation Selects the type of chord set assigned to the gt C B keys Chord Form 01 17 For details on the chord form refer to Chord zm The button will light The CHORD MEMORY screen will appear allowing Memory List p 136 you to make chord memory settings Chord Key C B Changes the key of the chord 5 CHORD MEMORY Rolled Chord o The notes in the chord will be sounded Chord sequentially rather than simultaneously The rolled Chord speed at which the notes are sounded will 2uitch ON depend on the force with which you strike m Switch the keys this lets you realistically simulate guitar like playing methods simply by using a the keyboard 2 Play the keyboard OFF The notes will be sounded as a chord A chord will sound according to the currently selected chord form UP Notes will be sounded in order from bottom to top For details on the chord form refer to Chord Memory List p 136 Notes will be sounded in order from top to 3 To finish the chord Memory Function press the CHORD bottom MEMORY button again to turn it off E gt Ua ES z The order in which the notes are sounded will BEIEBINBIE change eac
209. en specified Could you be applying an effect that intentionally distorts the sound Could the VOLUME knob be set too high Could the Output Gain be raised excessively Could the JUNO Gi s tuning be incorrect Could the pitch have been changed by a pedal operation or by a pitch bend message received from an external MIDI device Have you edited the coarse tune or fine tune settings of a specific Layer Notes will be broken off if the number of voices used simultaneously exceeds 128 Could the polarity of the hold pedal be reversed When you switch sounds Live Sets notes you played using the previous sound will stop Turn the Local Switch setting on p 82 Check the Layer level settings p 36 Check the effect on off settings p 44 Also check settings such as the effect levels Step on the pedal move your hand above the D Beam controller and check settings of the other controllers If the KEYBOARD button is on you won t hear any synthesizer sound if the recorder s MASTER slider is at the lowest position MASTER LEVEL at 0 Turn the KEYBOARD button off Check the Layer level settings p 36 Turn on the Layer Switch p 36 If there s no sound from a specific range of keys check the key range settings of the Layers in the Live Set p 36 If the sound of a specific Live Set or Layer is distorted lower the volume of that Live Set or Layer If the overall sound is distorted lower the VOL
210. ency ranges low mid and high This compresses the overall output signal when the input volume level exceeds a set value Adjusts the volume of each frequency band This suppresses high level signals to prevent distortion This makes settings that affect the overall output Explanation Sets the overall volume level before the signal passes through the compressor This sets the amount of time by which the source input sound is delayed This sets the frequency in the lower range at which the source sound is split into three separate ranges This sets the frequency in the upper range at which the source sound is split into three separate ranges Explanation This parameter turns the compressor effect on off This sets the volume level at which the lower range compressor goes into effect This sets the ratio of suppression of the lower range output when the input level exceeds the Lo threshold level This sets the time it takes for the lower range compressor to go into effect once the input level exceeds the Lo threshold level This sets the time it takes for the lower range compressor effect to stop once the input level falls below the Lo threshold level This sets the volume level at which the midrange compressor goes into effect This sets the ratio of suppression of the midrange output when the input level exceeds the Middle threshold level This sets the time it takes for the midrange compressor
211. eps will be moved backward by Switch n Patterns euri limit for the step value is 99 Use the cursor A buttons to select the step whose s iti WRITE Saving the Arrangement 2 Use the 4 GROUP button to select the pattern group The edited arrangement will be saved when you save the song If 1933 4 WYMYY G EIN you want to save the arrangement immediately press the 6 WRITE Sa roup xplanation button in the ARRANGE EDIT screen P Preset Pattern aS lt D O U User Pattern lt 5 S Song Pattern 3 Usethe VALUE dial or DEC INC button to select the desired pattern xipuaddy 123 Editing a Pattern PATTERN EDIT In addition to using the patterns that are provided you are also free to create your own patterns Your edited content can be saved either as a user pattern or a song pattern Displaying the PATTERN EDIT screen 1 Inthe RHYTHM PATTERN screen press the 2 EDIT button The PATTERN EDIT screen will appear About the PATTERN EDIT screen 81 Function buttons Button Explanation Specifies the time signature and length of the MISE pattern 2 NOTE SET Specifies the type duration and volume of the note Clears all notes from the vertical axis of the cursor 3 CLR STEP position Clears all notes from the horizontal axis of the cursor NOTE position 5 SCALE Specifies the scale grid 6 WRITE S
212. equency of the change Depth to which the effect is applied Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Output Level 18 AUTO PAN Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound H in Auto Pan 2 Band EQ Parameter Value Modulation Wave TRI SOR SIN SAW1 2 Mod Wave SAW1 R L Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Depth 0 127 Low Gain 15 15 dB High Gain 15 15 dB Level 0 127 19 STEP PAN L out R out Explanation Triangle wave Square wave Sine wave Sawtooth wave SAW2 R L Frequency of the change Depth to which the effect is applied Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Output Level This uses a 16 step sequence to vary the panning of the sound Lin Step Pan R in Step Pan Parameter Value Step 01 16 L64 63R Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Attack 0 127 Input Sync Sw OFF ON Input SyncThreshold 0 127 Level 0 127 CED L out R out Explanation Pan at each step Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Speed at which the pan changes between steps Specifies whether an input note will cause the sequence to resume from the first step of the sequence ON or not OFF Volume at which an input note will be detected Output volume You can use multi effect control to make the step sequence play again from the beginning p 46 20 SLICER By applying successive cuts to the sound this effect turns a conventional sound into a sound that appears
213. er sound W Output Level A step flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Lin R in Parameter Split Freq Low Pre Delay Low Rate Low Depth Low Phase Low Feedback Low Step Rate T High Band Step Flanger 1 High Band Feedback T Low Band Step Flanger B L out Low Band Feedback High Band Feedback High Band Step Flanger Low Band Feedback Low Band Step Flanger j Value 200 8000 Hz 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 98 98 0 10 20 00 Hz note H out Explanation Frequency at which the low and high ranges will be divided Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the low range flanger sound is heard Rate at which the low range flanger sound is modulated Modulation depth for the low range flanger sound Spaciousness of the low range flanger sound Proportion of the low range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Rate at which the steps will cycle for the low range flanger sound Parameter High Pre Delay High Rate High Depth High Phase High Feedback High Step Rate Balance Level 35 OVERDRIVE Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers Amp Simulator L in Value 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 de
214. ers 1 2 p 69 DISTORTION gt CHORUS 72 01 EQUALIZER 2 2 2 2 21 2 2 50 70 DISTORTION gt FLANGER ener 72 02 SPECTRUM 2 2 2 02 2 2 2 50 IE DISTORIONCTDEUSY sequsdxerazsxibescxd ut oss peut 1a 72 ENHANCER 2 CHORUS 73 04 LOW 5 4 50 79 ENHANCER FLANGER o pepe i sa Raclette ds 74 ENHANCER 2 73 06 STEP 2 2 242 2202 21 51 75 CHORUS 3 DELAY cese 73 07 ENHANCER 2 4 50 02 1 51 RE E n cs cle 5 77 CHORUS gt FLANGER 74 09 2 2 2 52 75 79 VOCODER 22 2 2 75 Reverb Parameters 12 STEP PHASER 53 13 MULTI STAGE 53 TA INFINITE PHASEBGusuesqvasdie 54 Synthesizer 4 Other Settings 15 RING MODULATOR ccceccccccscceeececeeees 54 e M 16 STEP RING MODULATOR 54 GUV UTICMY ooa WEN INEO O
215. ers p 117 When you re finished editing 5 When youre finished editing press the EXIT button Saving the reverb settings Reverb does not have patches The reverb settings saved as part of the song data If you want to save the settings to the currently selected song press the WRITE button in the RECORDER screen Adjusting the Reverb Depth for the Tracks Rhythm and External Input You can vary the reverb depth by adjusting the amount of sound send level that is sent from each track the rhythm and the external input to the reverb For the procedure refer to the following pages Track 1 8 Rhythm Pattern Adjusting the Pan Reverb and EQ TRACK SETTING p 89 External Input Selecting an Instrument to Record REC SOURCE SELECT p 93 Reverb Parameters Reverberation or reverb is the effect caused by sound waves decaying in an acoustic space or a digital simulation thereof This decay occurs because sound waves bounce off many walls ceilings objects etc in a very complex way These reflections coupled with absorption by various objects dissipate the acoustic energy over a certain period of time called the decay time The ear perceives this phenomenon as a continuous wash of sound Parameter T
216. es a tap delay effect that divides the delay time between the left and right channels The direct sound is output from the left channel and the effect sound is output from Type the right channel This produces the effect of playback in reverse This produces a mild analog delay sound This setting provides the characteristic wavering sound of a tape echo This is a delay with a pleasant chorus type effect added to the delay repeats Reverb Time This features a more suppressed high end than the Single delay High Cut This sets the delay time When set to BPM the value of the DELAY TIME parameter is set according to the value of the Recorder Tempo p 122 This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song Effect Level This sets the number of repetitions for the delay This sets the volume level of the effect When Type is set to REVERSE this adjusts the balance of direct and effect sound Parameter On Off Type Rate Depth Effect Level Value OFF ON MONO STEREO 1 STEREO 2 MONO MILD STEREO 1 MILD STEREO 2 MILD 0 100 BPM 0 100 0 100 Explanation Turns the CHORUS OFF ON Use this to choose the type of chorus This chorus effect outputs the same sound from the left and right channels This is a stereo chorus effect that adds different chorus sounds to L channel and R channel This stereo chorus uses spatial
217. est and the highest notes All notes you press will sound simultaneously The timing at which keys will sound will be assigned automatically giving priority to the lowest key that was pressed The timing at which keys will sound will be assigned automatically giving priority to the highest key that was pressed Pressing a single key will sound the phrase based on the pitch of that key If multiple keys are pressed the last pressed key will be valid Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play If you want the velocity value of each note to depend on how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to REAL If you want each note to have a fixed velocity regard less of how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to the desired value 1 127 Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place If you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you actually play set this parameter to 0 To have the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave higher set this parameter to 17A setting of 1 will make the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave lower Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the arpeggio A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms With a setting of 50 the note
218. executing Undo 104 Saving the Current Settings to the Song Song Write The following content is saved as song data e Mixer status pan etc e Insert effects patch number e Mastering Tool Kit patch number e Rhythm pattern number e Rhythm arrangement e Reverb These settings are automatically saved following a recording operation However simply editing one of these settings will not save it so proceed as follows if you want to save the change In the RECORDER screen p 86 press the WRITE button A confirmation message will appear Press the 5 EXEC button to execute To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button When you edit the settings of a song an will be shown in the RECORDER screen P mmy E JEL Er C L MODE MEL EFFECTS EFFECT IHPUT Hy n If you turn off the power or switch to a different song while this is displayed the changes you made will be discarded If you want to keep your changes you must save the song Effects in the Recorder Section three effects Insert Effects Insert Effect Ba T ks nd Patches What is a Effect Patch An effect added directly toa specific signal ton the JUNO Grthesound 2225559656 59566956 56 665 69 665 66 8 p n 2 recording called insert The Insert effects provides numerous effects and two or more of these effect The effe
219. f speaker Adjusts the location of the microphone that is recording the sound of the speaker This can be adjusted in three steps with the microphone becoming more distant in the order of 1 2 and 3 Volume of the microphone Volume of the direct sound Output Level The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units Type SMALL 1 SMALL 2 MIDDLE JC 120 BUILT IN 1 BUILT IN 2 BUILT IN 3 BUILT IN 4 BUILT IN 5 BG STACK 1 BG STACK 2 MS STACK 1 MS STACK 2 METAL STACK 2 STACK 3 STACK Cabinet Small open back enclosure Small open back enclosure Open back enclosure Open back enclosure Open back enclosure Open back enclosure Open back enclosure Open back enclosure Open back enclosure Sealed enclosure Large sealed enclosure Large sealed enclosure Large sealed enclosure Large double stack Large double stack Large triple stack Speaker Microphone 10 Dynamic 10 Dynamic 12x1 Dynamic 12x2 Dynamic 12x2 Dynamic 12x2 Condenser 12x2 Condenser 12x2 Condenser 12x2 Condenser 12x2 Condenser 12x2 Condenser 12x4 Condenser 12x4 Condenser 12x4 Condenser 12x4 Condenser 12x4 Condenser 11 PHASER This is a stereo phaser A phase shifted sound is added to the original sound and modulated haser Parameter Value Explanation 4 STAGE Mode 8 STAGE Number of stages in the phaser 12 STAGE Adjusts the basic frequency Manual 0 127 from which the sound wi
220. for tone control System Menu 3 MIDI SYNC 1 GENERL Parameter Local Switch Device ID Remote Keyboard Switch Main Channel Sub Channel USB MIDI USB MIDI Thru 82 Value OFF ON 17 32 OFF OFF Explanation Determines whether the internal sound generator is disconnected OFF from the controller section keyboard pitch bend modulation lever knobs buttons D Beam controller pedal and so or not disconnected ON Normally this is left but if you wish to use the JUNO Gi s keyboard and controllers to control only external sound modules set it to OFF When you want to transmit or receive System Exclusive messages set this parameter to match the Device ID number of the other MIDI device Set this parameter ON when you want to use an external MIDI keyboard instead of the JUNO Gi s keyboard In this case the MIDI transmit channel of the external MIDI keyboard can be set to any channel Normally you will leave this parameter OFF Turn this ON when you want to control the JUNO Gi from an external MIDI device when performing with the Arpeggio function MIDI receive channel for playing the JUNO Gi from an external MIDI device MIDI receive channel on which an external MIDI device can play the JUNO Gi s Lower layer when the SPLIT button is on If this is ON incoming MIDI messages will be re transmitted without change from the MIDI OUT con
221. g 98 98 0 10 20 00 Hz note D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 H in Parameter Value Drive 0 127 Type of guitar amp SMALL Amp Type BUILT IN 2 STACK 3 STACK Low Gain 15 15 dB High Gain 15 15 dB Pan L64 63R Level 0 127 36 DISTORTION Produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive The parameters are the same as for 35 OVERDRIVE L in Amp Simulator Explanation Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the high range flanger sound is heard Rate at which the high range flanger sound is modulated Modulation depth for the high range flanger sound Spaciousness of the high range flanger sound Proportion of the high range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Rate at which the steps will cycle for the high range flanger sound Volume balance of the original sound D and flanger sound W Output Level L out J Pan L CY Pan R gt R out Explanation Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Small amp Single unit type amp Large double stack amp Large triple stack amp Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Stereo location of the output sound Output Level gt L out J Pan L CY Pan R gt R out 37 VS OVERDRIVE This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion Lin L out J Pan L H Overdrive Amp Simulator y Pan R in gt R out Parameter Value
222. ges will be transmitted ON or not OFF Specify whether changes you make in the settings of a patch performance will be transmitted as system exclusive messages ON or will not be transmitted OFF Thru function re transmits all messages received at the MIDI IN connector to the MIDI OUT connector without modifying them in any way Explanation Specifies whether Program Change messages will be received ON or not OFF Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be received ON or not OFF Specifies whether System Exclusive messages will be received ON or not OFF Specifies whether General MIDI System On messages will be received ON or not OFF Specifies whether General MIDI 2 System On messages will be received ON or not OFF Specifies whether GS Reset messages will be received ON or not OFF 4 SYNC Parameter Value Explanation Specifies the synchronization signals that the JUNO Gi s USB memory song player will follow The JUNO Gi s USB memory song player will be the master Choose this setting if you re operating the JUNO Gi by itself without synchronizing it to any other device MASTER The JUNO Gi s USB memory song player will be the slave Choose this setting if you want the JUNO Gi to operate according to MIDI Clock messages received from an external device USB Song Sync Mode SLAVE The JUNO Gi s USB memory song player will obey MIDI Start Continue and Stop mes
223. gie DUAL Rectifier The models AMP3 on a Hughes amp Kettner TriAmp The models AMP2 on a Hughes amp Kettner TriAmp The models AMP1 on a Hughes amp Kettner TriAmp HI GAIN METAL BASS Parameter Gain Bass Middle Treble Presence Level Bright Gain Sw Solo Sw Solo Level SP Type Value BOSS DRIVE SLDN LEAD STACK HEAVY LEAD BOSS METAL 5150 DRIVE METAL LEAD EDGE LEAD BASS CLEAN BASS CRUNCH BASS HIGAIN Value 0 120 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 OFF ON HIGH OFF ON 0 100 OFF ORIGINAL 1x8 1x10 1 12 2 12 4x10 4x12 8x12 LOW MIDDLE Explanation This is a drive sound producing awesome distortion This models a Soldano SLO 100 a very popular tube amp in the 1980s This is a lead sound with high gain A powerful lead sound featuring extreme distortion This is a metal sound suited to heavy riffs This models the lead channel of a Peavey EVH 5150 This is a lead sound suited to metal This is a sharp sound suited for lead play Clean sound that is great for use with bass guitars Crunch sound with natural distortion that sounds great with bass guitars A high gain sound suitable for use with bass guitars Explanation Adjusts the distortion of the amp Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range Adjusts the tone for the high frequency
224. gt 5 gt lt Amaximum of 64 files can be imported 33 Editing a Live Set LIVE SET EDIT If you want to create an original sound on the JUNO Gi you can edit a For details on each screen refer to the following pages live set er Screen Explanation Page On the JUNO Gi it s not possible to edit or rewrite the tones themselves However you can select the tones that are played by a live LIVE SET EDIT 1 Layer settings 1 p 36 set and make relative adjustments offsets to the values of each tone LIVE SET EDIT 2 Layer settings 2 p 37 The simplest way to create your own sound is to choose a live set that s LIVE SET EDIT 3 Settings for the entire live set p 38 close to what you have in mind and then try exchanging different Detailed settings for eachitoneassianed tones to combine the sounds in different ways PRO EDIT to the layers p 39 You can save the edited result in a user live set Basic Operations in the LIVE SET 20101 Each Eye S ono eating is 5 fate blow Screen Layer highlighted means on Displaying the LIVE SET EDIT screen dime i nee 1 lt sett eee PNO 1 Selectthe live set that you want to edit p 22 TE SETS CHD L1 Tone TET METUIT 5 STR Lz PRST 196 Mood Strings STR If you want to create a live set from scratch initialize the live set as described in Initializing a Live Se
225. h layer how the direct sound will be output e Chorus and reverb are output in mono at all times The output destination of the signal after passing through the chorus is set with the Chorus Output 45 parameter Output in stereo through multi effects You can also apply chorus or reverb to the sound that passes through multi effects Specify which multi effects 1 2 will be used Output in stereo to the OUTPUT jacks without passing through the multi effect Output in mono to the OUTPUT L jack without passing through the multi effect Output in mono to the OUTPUT R jack without passing through the multi effect Level of the signal that is sent to the output destination specified by Asgn Level of the signal sent to chorus for each layer Level Level of the signal sent to reverb for each layer Level The layer sounded in the upper range Key Fade Upper Key Range Upper Explanation Specifies the lowest note that the layer will sound for each layer Lower Specifies the highest note that the layer will sound for each layer Determines what will happen to the layer s level when a note that s lower than Key Range Lower is played If you don t want the layer to sound at all set this parameter to 0 Determines what will happen to the layer s level when a note that s higher than Key Range Upper is played If you don t want the layer to sound at all set this parameter to 0 LIVE SET EDI
226. h on the JUNO Gi s power 3 Pressthe ARPEGGIO button so it s lit The ARPEGGIO STYLE screen will appear 4 Press the 2 IMPORT button 5 Turn the VALUE dial to select the SMF or phrase that you want to import Gen e By pressing the 5 PREVIEW button you can audition the selected SMF or phrase shuljjas 42410 31 3 14 2 e f you decide not to import press the EXIT button 6 Press the 6 NEXT button 7 Assign a name to the Arpeggio Style that you want to import After you ve assigned a name press the 6 NEXT button Japsoray 23161 For details on how to enter a name refer to Assigning a Name p 19 8 Select the desired STYLE IMPORT DESTINATION Turn the VALUE dial to make your choice 9 Press the 6 EXEC button A confirmation message will appear 10 Press the 5 EXEC button to execute To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button 4 buos gsf The SMF or phrase will be imported into the arpeggio user style Please note the following points regarding importing an arpeggio Jake Only SMF Format 0 is supported If the data is incorrect the screen will indicate Incorrect File e Only the note data will be imported from the original data into the arpeggio e Up to 500 notes note on off can be imported If there are more than 500 notes the screen will indicate Too Much Data gt a
227. h time you play the keyboard Destination 5 A Specifies the layer played by the chord memory y The Upper and Lower layers will be played by the chord memory BOTH 22 et If Split is on the Upper layer will be Destination played by the chord memory LOWER The Lower layer will be played by the chord memory B 2 UPPER The Upper layer will be played by the chord 20 R memory 5 2 a The chord memory settings including ON OFF setting are saved as live set settings If you want to keep these settings press the WRITE button to save them in the live set p 35 1 Kiowa 950 xipuaddy 31 Playing Arpeggios ARPEGGIO About Arpeggio The JUNO Gi s Arpeggio function lets you produce arpeggios automatically simply hold down some keys and a corresponding arpeggio will be played automatically Playing by Using Arpeggios Turning Arpeggio On and Off 1 Press the ARPEGGIO button so it s lit CHORD ARPEGGIO The Arpeggio function will turn on The ARPEGGIO STYLE screen will appear YaF iati o Hot i f Oct To exit the ARPEGGIO STYLE screen press the EXIT button 2 Playa chord on the keyboard The JUNO Gi will play an arpeggio according to the notes forming the chord you have just voiced 3 To finish playing arpeggios press the ARPEGGIO button again so it s distinguished Holding an A
228. han necessary may cause no sound to be produced when the guitar is played at low volume Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until the noise level reaches 0 111 spunos gt suonpunj 1 ZIS Y U 3jj3 bunip3 fb 5 Q 31 3 14 2 Jap10ray 216 sayy 1 33 4 1 Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Parameter On Off FX OD DS WAH COMPRESSOR LIMITER OCTAVE AC PROCESSOR AC PRO PHASER FLANGER TREMOLO ROTARY UNI V PAN 00 05 BOOSTER MID BOOST CLEAN BOOST TREBLE BOOST 112 Explanation Turns FX OFF ON Explanation This effect distorts the sound to create long sustain Select the type of distortion with TYPE then use DRIVE to adjust the amount of distortion If you set Control Pedal Assign 81 to INSERT FX CTRL you can use an expression pedal connected to the PEDAL CONTROL jack to control wah This is an effect that produces a long sustain by evening out the volume level of the input signal Use the Sustain parameter to adjust the length of the effect and Attack to adjust the strength of the picking attack p 113 The limiter attenuates loud input levels to prevent distortion Adjust Threshold to match the guitar input signal This adds a note one octave lower creating a richer sound Play a singl
229. he JUNO Gi and switch on the JUNO Gi s power 3 Press the RECORDER VIEW button 4 Press the 5 RHYTHM button The RHYTHM PATTERN screen will appear 5 Press the 3 IMPORT button 6 Turn the VALUE dial to select the SMF or phrase that you want to import If you decide not import press the EXIT button 7 Press the 6 NEXT button 8 Assign a name to the Rhythm Pattern that you want to import After you ve assigned a name press the 6 NEXT button For details on how to enter a name refer to Assigning a Name p 19 9 Press the 1 USER or 2 SONG button to select the import destination group Group Explanation These are patterns saved within the JUNO Gi s USER internal memory These patterns can be used in any song These are patterns saved within a song These NG patterns cannot be used in another song 10 Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired Rhythm Pattern Destination Press the 6 EXEC button A confirmation message will appear Press the 5 EXEC button to execute To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button 11 12 The SMF or phrase will be imported into the Rhythm Pattern Please note the following point regarding the Import operation e Ensure that the SMF s rhythm part uses MIDI channel 10 e Amaximum of 4000 events can be imported If you exceed 4000 events the display will indicate Too Much Data e Ensur
230. he electrical appliance is used power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use This is normal and is not a cause for concern The use of an AC adaptor is recommended as the unit s power consumption is relatively high Should you prefer to use batteries please use the nickel hydrogen type When installing or replacing batteries always turn off the power on this unit and disconnect any other devices you may have connected This way you can prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices lacement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of interference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or i
231. he reverse delay until the delay sound is heard Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of the reverse delay negative values invert the phase Frequency at which the high frequency content of the reverse delayed sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Panning of the reverse delay sound Volume of the reverse delay sound Delay time from when sound is input into the tap delay until the delay sound is heard Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of the tap delay negative values invert the phase Frequency at which the hi frequency content of the tap delay sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Panning of the tap delay sounds Volume of the tap delay sounds Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance of the original sound D and delay sound W Output Level 51 SHUFFLE DELAY Adds a shuffle to the delay sound giving the sound a bouncy delay effect with a swing feel Lin Feedback Hin Parameter Delay Time Shuffle Rate Acceleration Feedback HF Damp Pan A B Level A B Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Value 0 2600 msec note 0 100 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS L64 63R 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 52 3D DELAY This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound The delay sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right L a Parameter
232. het med varje regions best mmelser Produkter med den har symbolen far inte kasseras tillsammans med hushallsavfall merkint ilmaisee ett tuote on EU maissa ker tt v erill n kotitalousj tteist kunkin alueen voimassa olevien m r ysten mukaisesti T ll merkinn ll varustettuja tuotteita ei saa h vitt kotitalousj tteiden mukana Ez a szimb lum azt jelenti hogy az Eur pai Uni ban ezt a term ket a h ztart si hullad kt l elk l n tve az adott r gi ban rv nyes szab lyoz s szerint kell gy jteni Az ezzel a szimb lummal ell tott term keket nem szabad a h ztart si hullad k k z dobni Symbol oznacza e zgodnie z regulacjami w odpowiednim regionie w krajach UE produktu nie nale y wyrzuca z odpadami domowymi Produkt w opatrzonych tym symbolem nie mo na utylizowa razem z odpadami domowymi Tento symbol ud v e v zem ch EU mus b t tento v robek sb r n odd len od dom c ho odpadu jak je ur eno pro ka d region V robky nesouc tento symbol se nesm vyhazovat spolu s dom c m odpadem Tento symbol vyjadruje e v krajin ch E sa mus zber tohto produktu vykon va oddelene od domov ho odpadu pod a nariaden platn ch v konkr tnej krajine Produkty s t mto symbolom sa nesm vyhadzova spolu s domov m odpadom See s mbol n itab et EL i maades tuleb see toode olempr gist eraldi koguda nii nagu on igas piirkonnas m ratletud Selle s mbol
233. his unit carefully read the sections entitled USING THE UNIT SAFELY p 147 and IMPORTANT NOTES p 148 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s Manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Copyright 2010 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION Roland and JUNO are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Roland Corporation in the United States and or other countries amp USB MEMORY SONG PLAYER ASSIGNABLE SONG PLAYER OO 51 52 SONG PLAY LIST STOP Overview SOLO SYNTH EXPRESSION ASSIGNABLE COMPUTER BACKUP KEYBOARD MIDI CTRL CHORD ARPEGGIO MEMORY TEMPO TRANS OCTAVE POSE DOWN UP RECORDER SONG OUT PHONES NUMERIC OUTPUT Mibi AUDIO INPUT LEVEL LcD PEDAL Lj CONTRAST HOLD CONTROL w Sur PHANTOM GUITAR MIC DEC INC O00 000 PIANO KEYBOARD BASS GUITAR STRINGS BRASS VOCAL ORGAN PLUCKED ORCHESTRA WIND CHOIR PAD SHIFT EXIT ENTER OOO LIST
234. his value is increased No filter is used Cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Basic frequency of the Post Filter Simulates the tuning noise of a radio As this value is raised the tuning drifts further Volume of the radio noise Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the effect sound W Parameter Level 59 TELEPHONE This effect produces a muffled sound like that heard through a telephone Telephone L out Lin R in Telephone R out Parameter Voice Quality Treble Balance Level Value 0 15 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 60 PHONOGRAPH Simulates a sound recorded on an analog record and played back on a record player This effect also simulates the various types of noise that are typical of a record and even the rotational irregularities of an old turntable Parameter Signal Distortion Frequency Range Disc Type Scratch Noise Level Dust Noise Level Hiss Noise Level Total Noise Level Wow Flutter Random Total Wow Flutter Balance Level Balance D Balance D Value 0 127 0 127 LP SP 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Explanation Output Level Explanation Audio quality of the telephone voice Bandwidth of the telephone voice
235. i in semitone steps Keyboard Level 0 127 Volume of the entire live set Output gain from the live set s Output When for example there are relatively few voices 12 12dB being sounded boosting the output gain can Changes you ve made to the system settings will return to their original state when you turn off the power If you want to keep the changes you ve made you must save them as follows let you attain the most suitable output level for recording and other purposes X UE Preview Keyboard Output Gain 2 Press the 6 WRITE button The notes specified by Preview 1 4 Note SINGLE System Write Completed massage will appear and the settings will Number will sound successively one by one be saved CHORD The notes specified by Preview 1 4 Note Preview Mode Number will sound simultaneously When the settings have been saved you will return to the previous screen The phrase specified by the Live Set s PHRASE Preview Type p 38 and Preview Phrase p System Parameters __ sound when the Preview Mode is set to This section explains what the different System parameters do and Preview 1 4 Note SINGLE or CHORD also how these parameters are organized Number If PHRASE is selected for the Preview Mode parameter these settings will have System Menu 1 GENERAL no effect Specify the velocity of the four notes that 1 N will sound when the Preview Mod
236. ick Sound type of the click TYPE 1 A conventional click sound A bell will sound on the first beat TYPE 2 Clicks Beeps TYPE 4 Cowbell Song Click 0 127 Volume of the output from the SONG CLICK Output Level OUT jack 2 PLAYER Parameter Value Explanation Audio Level 0 127 Sets the volume at which audio files will be played by the USB memory song player SMF Level 0 127 Sets the volume at which SMF will be played by the USB memory song player System Menu 5 D BEAM 1 GENERL Parameter Value Explanation suonpunj This sets the D Beam controller s sensitivity D Beam Sens 0 127 Increasing this value will make the D Beam controller more responsive 2 SYNTH Parameter Value Explanation Level 0 127 Volume Level of the Solo Synth Chorus send 0 127 Level of the signal sent to chorus Level Reverb seng 0 127 Level of the signal sent to reverb Level 2 4 Range in which the pitch of the solo synth will Range 80CT vary 3 3 14 2 Waveform Osc 1 Waveform SAW Sawtooth wave SOR Square wave Osc 1 Pulse Pulse width of the waveform 0 127 By cyclically modifying the pulse width you can Width create subtle changes in the tone Osc 1 Coarse Pitch of the tone s sound in semitones 4 48 48 Tune octaves Osc1FineTune 50 50 Pitch of the tone s sound in 1 cent steps Osc 2 Waveform Osc 2 Pulse Width same as O
237. ickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value Use this setting if you want the TVA envelope times T2 T4 to be affected by the keyboard location A Env Time KF Time Keyfollow 100 100 Based on the TVA envelope times for the C4 key center C positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times Larger settings will produce greater change TVA envelope times T1 T4 A Env Time2 64 63 Higher settings will lengthen the time until the next volume level is reached A Env Time4 R A Env Level TVA envelope levels L1 L3 A Env Level2 64 63 Specify how the volume will change at each A Env Level3 S point relative to the Tone Level value Time Time Keyfollow C1 C2 C4 C5 C6 C7 ney TVA Envelope 1 T2 T3 T4 D Time L1 L2 L3 Note Note off 7 LF01 8 LFO2 Parameter Rate Key Trigger Pitch Depth TVF Depth TVA Depth Pan Depth Value 0 127 Note TONE OFF ON TONE OFF 63 63 OFF 63 63 OFF 63 63 OFF 63 63 Explanation Modulation speed of the LFO If you want the LFO rate to be synchronized with the tempo this should be set in terms of a note value The setting of the tone assigned to the layer will be used Specifies whether the LFO cycle will be synchronized to begin when the key is pressed ON or not OFF The setting of the t
238. idth of midrange larger values make the region narrower 147 High Freq 2000 4000 8000 Hz Frequency of the high range EQ EQ High Gain 15 15 dB Amount of high range boost cut Level 0 127 Output Level 75 un On gt 00 Vo 3 Lam jake xipuaddy Chorus Parameters The JUNO Gi s Chorus effect unit can also be used as a stereo delay unit These settings allow you to select chorus or delay and the characteristics of the selected effect type Parameter Chorus Type Chorus Level Value Selects either Chorus or 00 OFF 01 CHORUS 02 DELAY 03 GM2 CHORUS 0 127 Explanation Delay Neither Chorus or Delay is used Chorus is used Delay is used GM2 Chorus is used Volume of the chorus sound Filter Type Cutoff Freq Pre Delay Rate Depth Phase Feedback Type of filter OFF LPF HPF 200 8000 Hz 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 0 127 No filter is used Cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Freq Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Basic frequency of the filter Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Spatial spread of the sound Adjusts the amount of the chorus sound that is fed back into the effect Delay Left Delay Right Delay Center Center Feedback HF Damp Left Level Right Level Center Level
239. iga m rgitud tooteid ei tohi ra visata koos olmepr giga is simbolis rodo kad ES alyse is produktas turi b ti surenkamas atskirai nuo buitiniy atlieky kaip nustatyta kiekviename regione Siuo simboliu paZenklinti produktai neturi b ti i metami kartu su buitin mis atliekomis Sis simbols nor da ka ES valst s o produktu jaievac atsevi i no m jsaimniec bas atkritumiem noteikts katr regiona Produktus ar So simbolu nedrikst izmest ar majsaimniecibas atkritumiem simbol ozna uje da je treba proizvod v dr avah EU zbirati lo eno od gospodinjskih odpadkov tako kot je doloceno v vsaki regiji Proizvoda s tem znakom ni dovoljeno odlagati skupaj z gospodinjskimi odpadki To avt vOSNAVEL OTL YMOES vo ovyxexou vo TEOLOV va OVAAEYETAL YWOELOTH TA OLXLAXG ue ztoopA xovrou oe ABE neovoyf Ta xov ovyxexoui vo MOETEL uoti TA omooo puoa 149 sayy 1 02 23161 xipuaddy For the USA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement Model Name JUNO Gi Type of Equipment Synthesizer Keyboard Responsible Party Roland Corporation U S Address 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 Telephone 323
240. ill avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For information on cable specifications contact the manufacturer of the cable The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit If it does not function as you expect adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual Microsoft Windows and Windows
241. ime NORM Portamento will always be applied press D4 key press D4 key lt ang press C5 key press C5 key F pavements LEGT ete will be applied only when you play press C4 key press C4 key Mode egato a gt TONE The setting of the tone assigned to the layer will be used Speed of pitch change is uniform the time 2 PITCH ENV RATE required for the pitch change will correspond to the distance of the pitch change SA mE Parameter Value Explanation gw Portamento Type TIME The time it takes will be constant regardless of oz how far apart in pitch the notes are Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to 23 control the depth of the pitch envelope oo The setting of the tone assigned to the layer will lt V Sens 64 63 If you want the pitch envelope to have more ef fect for strongly played notes set this parameter SICH Starts a new portamento when another key is to a positive value pressed while the pitch is changing This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the T1 of gt Bu Poe the Pitch envelope ortamento Start ortamento will begin anew from the pitc NOTE where the current change would end P Env T1 V Sens 64 03 If you want T1 to be speeded up for strongly 2 played notes set this parameter to a positive The setting of the tone assigned to the layer will value be used 39 Parameter P Env T4 V Sens P Env Time KF Time Keyfollow P
242. ings for JUNO Gi gt computer If you connect the JUNO Gi to your computer via a USB cable the sound of the JUNO Gi and of the equipment connected to the USB cable JUNO Gi s INPUT jacks can be played through your computer Sounds Supports USB 2 0 Hi Speed played by your computer will follow the System settings USB Audio To connector Computer p 80 uci E eec Settings for computer JUNO Gi Sounds from the computer can be heard via an amp speaker system connected to the JUNO Gi s OUTPUT jacks or recorded on the JUNO Gi s Digital Recorder If you want to record these sounds on the Digital Recorder choose USB AUDIO in Selecting an Instrument to Record REC SOURCE SELECT p 93 I T Roland MODEL JUNO GI C Whenever the USB Song Player is playing something USB Audio the sound from a computer connected to the JUNO Gi s USB COMPUTER connector will not be produced For details on operating requirements refer to the Roland website http www roland com U 5 D If the JUNO Gi is connected via USB to your computer your DAW For some models of computer the system might not operate software can record the JUNO Gi s performance data MIDI data and correctly Refer to the Roland website for the operating systems performance
243. ings invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Stereo location of Delays 1 4 Output level of Delays 1 4 Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the effect sound W Output Level 65 spunos gt 197159 3yj3 bunip3 E gt oO La 1 rn F 5 7 Japsoray 23161 1 33 4 FEY CP oweW 950 xipuaddy 50 REVERSE DELAY This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and delayed sound to the input sound A tap delay is connected immediately after the reverse delay L in Hin Parameter Threshold Rev Delay Time Rev Delay Feedback Rev Delay HF Damp Rev Delay Pan Rev Delay Level Delay 1 3 Time Delay 3 Feedback Delay HF Damp Delay 1 Pan Delay 2 Pan Delay 1 Level Delay 2 Level Low Gain High Gain Balance Level 66 Value 0 127 0 1300 msec note 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS L64 63R 0 127 0 1300 msec note 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS L64 63R 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Explanation Volume at which the reverse delay will begin to be applied Delay time from when sound is input into t
244. intervals and is the most widely used type of tuning particular in Western music Just intonation tonic of C Compared to equal temperament the principal triads have a more pure sound in just intonation However this is the case only in one key and triads will sound ambiguous if you play in a different key Arabian scale Compared to equal temperament this scale pitches the E and B notes a quarter tone lower and the C F and G notes a quarter tone higher There is a natural third an interval between a major third and a minor third between G and B C and E F and G Bb and C and Eb and F Example Tonic of C If you want to use Just intonation with a tonic of C or an Arabian scale set the Scale Tune Switch to and set Patch Scale Tune for C B as shown in the table Equal Just temperament intonation 0 8 4 Note name Arabian scale C C D 14 2 10 2 16 12 3 MST EQ Value OFF ON Parameter Explanation On Off Switch of the master equalizer EQ 15 15dB 40Hz 1 6kHz Low Gain Gain of the low range Low Freq Frequency of the low range Japsoray 23161 Mid Gain 15 15dB Gain of the middle range Mid Freq 20Hz 10kHz Frequency of the middle range Width of the middle range Mid Q 0 5 16 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the
245. ion and press the 6 EXEC button To The move destination time location or measure The display will ask Move OK 4 _ If you re sure you want to execute press the 5 EXEC button If you decide to cancel press the 6 CANCEL button 99 spunos gt suonpunj 1 ZIS Y U 32 3 et gt iM et ie 2 Jap10ray 216 sayy u1 d 4 Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Track Erase Erasing Data 1 2 This operation erases data from the specified region If you use this operation to erase data any data located later than the erased data will not be moved forward In other words this operation is comparable to recording silence over an unwanted portion of recording tape Don t leave sounds shorter than 1 0 seconds before or after the erased region Any remaining sound that is shorter than 1 0 seconds cannot be played START END Time Choose Recorder Menu 2 Track Edit Track Erase p 98 The TRACK ERASE screen will appear Specify the erasing Source Track Source V Track Start and End for the Erase operation and Press the 6 EXEC button TEHLE J Tu IP au Source Y Start End Function Button Edit Region 1 ALL The edit region will be the entire track you specified The edit region will be the
246. ion begins Ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 100 1 Compression ratio Post Gain 0 18 dB Adjusts the output gain Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level 42 GATE Cuts the reverb s delay according to the volume of the sound sent into the effect Use this when you want to create an artificial sounding decrease in the reverb s decay Parameter Value Explanation Threshold 0 127 Volume level at which the gate begins to close Type of gate The gate will close when the GATE volume of the original sound decreases cutting the original Mode sound The gate will close when the DUCK Ducking volume of the original sound increases cutting the original sound Adjusts the time it takes for the Attack 0 127 gate to fully open after being triggered Adjusts the time it takes for the _ gate to start closing after the Hola 9 57 source sound falls beneath the Threshold Adjusts the time it takes the gate Release oi to fully close after the hold time Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W D0 100W direct sound D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 43 DELAY This is a stereo delay When Feedback Mode is NORMAL Balance D erm b 2 Feedback Feedback 61 H CY Balance W fj SS J Balance D L in Hin When Feedback Mode is CROSS Balance D L in L out Feedback Feedback Hin out Balance D Parameter
247. is prohibited by law e No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI OUT connector lt suonpunj Synthesizer un lt fD ue N D sbuljjas 42410 ENT RECORDER OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT BACKUP OUT PHONES CONTRAST PHANTOM GUITAR MIG LEVEL KEYBOARD DIGITAL RECORDER SOUND MODIFY RECORDER TRACKMIXER MIDI CTRL e VIEW C REC SOURCE SELECT REVERB HIGH ON OFF CHORD UNDG AUDIO PEAK ARPEGGIO MEMORY 220779 We KEYBOARD INPUT 2 l C SOLO lt a 44 REPEAT OO T T T T T T C C C CUTOFF RESONANCE R i Japsoray 23161 1293 i i i B E E 4 gt TRANS OSTAVE FAVORITE GUITAR STRINGS BRASS VOCAL ETRA 4 ASSIGNABLE POSE DOWN ON OFF BANK PIANO KEYBOARD BASS SLUCKED ORCHESTAA WIND B spec saa amp USB MEMORY SONG PLAYER ASSIGNABLE SONG PLAYER Oo SONG RLAY
248. l Recorder during the song Indicates the Rhythm Set group Rhythm Set Arrange Mode 4 Rhythm Set number and Rhythm Set name Arrange This mode is used to play an arrangement As the song progresses the patterns will switch according to how they have been placed in the arrangement Selecting a Pattern Button Explanation Page 1 ARG EDIT Opens a screen for editing the arrangement p 123 1 Inthe RHYTHM PATTERN screen specify Pattern mode 2 PTN EDIT Opens a screen for editing the pattern p 124 2 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor and use the Imports a Standard MIDI File SMF from your computer into the pattern VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the pattern group and pattern number Setting the Recorder Tempo Selecting Drum Sounds Rhythm Set 1 Inthe RHYTHM PATTERN screen use the cursor buttons to Ab h move the cursor and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC out e tempo buttons to specify the Rhythm Set group and Rhythm Set 3 number 3 IMPORT 126 The JUNO Gi has two types of tempo keyboard tempo and recorder tempo Keyboard tempo is used for the Synthesizer s arpeggio performance etc and recorder tempo is the tempo of the Digital Recorder Caution when changing the recorder tempo Changing the recorder tempo will change the playback tempo of the rhythm pattern but will not change the playback tem
249. le you continue holding down the button This button is used for Repeat Playback Recording and for Auto Punch In Stops song playback recording Plays the song Enters recording standby mode Recording will start when you then press the gt button Adjust the volume of each track Adjusts the volume of the entire digital recorder Turns the Rhythm Pattern on off Mute each track or select the recording track Switches the set of tracks controlled by the TRACK MIXER buttons and sliders When unlit Tracks 1 4 are controlled When lit Tracks 5 8 are controlled Use these knobs to adjust the sound Adjusts the amount of reverb for the Synthesizer section Adjust the three band equalizer This applies to both the Synthesizer section and the Digital Recorder To turn off the equalizer press the ON OFF button so its indicator goes out Use these to make realtime changes to the sound of the Synthesizer section You can assign various parameters or functions to these buttons Modifies the pitch or applies vibrato Page p 18 p 18 p 18 p 18 p 86 p 96 p 93 p 92 p 87 87 87 90 87 87 94 p 88 p 88 p 121 p 88 p 88 p 29 p 28 p 29 11 spunos bulajas 1971594 e gt Ma 5 3 3 14 2 Japsoray 23161 UJ933ed wy uy 1
250. lect a Live Set To select a live set use the cursor buttons and the VALUE dial to 1 change the value in the LIVE SET PLAY screen BATTERY 2 1 Inthe LIVE SET PLAY screen use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the live set group PRESET SPECIAL or USER 3 2 Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired live set group PRESET SPECIAL or USER 4 3 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the live set number 4 Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired live set Selecting live sets by category category lock The lock icon dm shown in the LIVE SET PLAY screen specifies whether you ll be selecting live sets within the selected category or across categories If you move the cursor to the lock icon and use the VALUE dial or DEC INC buttons to select the position you ll be able to select live set numbers across categories If you select the ik LOCK position you ll be able to change the live set number within the currently selected category Selecting Live Sets by Number 1 INUMERIC Button 1 Follow steps 1 through 3 of Using the VALUE dial to Select a Live Set 2 Press the NUMERIC button so it s lit The 0 9 buttons will light my 3 Use the 0 9 buttons to enter the desired live set number and press the ENTER button When you finalize the input the 0 9 buttons will return to their previ
251. lected by AUDIO INPUT p 93 The System Menu screen will appear processed by the insert effect 3 Press one of the function buttons to select the setting that MEURE The effect will not be applied unless the insert effect s LOCATION you want to edit p 108 is set to INPUT Button Explanation Page Center Cancel OFF ON Switch of the Center Cancel p 129 1 GENERAL Settings for the entire JUNO Gi p 80 MID HI Mid frequency and high frequency sounds 2 KBD CTRL Keyboard and pedal settings p 81 localized in the center will be eliminated 3 MIDI SYNC MIDI and synchronization settings 82 Center Cancel LOW Low frequency sounds localized in the Type center will be eliminated 4 CLICK PLAYER USB Memory Song Player and click settings 83 Ae ALL All sounds localized in the center will be 5 D BEAM D Beam controller settings p 83 eliminated 6 INFORMATION Version information p 84 If necessary press a function button again to access the desired setting 2 SO U N D S cr e en Parameter Value Explanation 4 Use the cursor buttons to select to the parameter that you i want to set SoundGenerator S 415 3 Overall tuning of the JUNO Gi the frequency 5 Usethe VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the Master Tune 466 2Hz af the value Master Key Shift E NUT Shifts the overall pitch of the JUNO G
252. ll be used Frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on the waveform s frequency components Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound Excessively high settings can produce oscillation causing the sound to distort Use this parameter if you want the cutoff frequency to change according to the key that is pressed Relative to the cutoff frequency at the C4 key center C positive settings will cause the cutoff frequency to rise for notes higher than C4 Larger settings will produce greater change Curve that determines how keyboard playing dynamics velocity will affect the cutoff frequency Set this to FIX if you don t want the Cutoff frequency to be affected by the keyboard velocity CLE Uwe 4 TVF ENVELOPE Use this parameter when changing the cutoff frequency to be applied as a result of changes in Parameter Value Explanation TS playing velocity utoff V Sens 64 If you want strongly played notes to raise the Depth of the TVF envelope cutoff frequency set this parameter to positive F Env Depth 63 463 Higher settings will cause the TVF envelope to settings produce greater change Negative settings ill invert the shape of the envelope This allows keyboard velocity to modify the 2 d amount of Resonance Use this setting if you want the TVF envelope esonance 64 63 If
253. ll be modulated Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Selects whether the left and right phase of the modulation will be the same or the opposite Parameter Polarity Resonance Cross Feedback Step Rate Mix Low Gain High Gain Level 13 MULTI STAGE PHASER Value Explanation Selects whether the left and right phase of the modulation will be the same or the opposite INVERSE SYNCHRO 0 127 98 98 0 10 20 00 Hz note 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 127 The left and right phase will be opposite When using a mono source this spreads the sound The left and right phase will be the same Select this when inputting a stereo source Amount of feedback Adjusts the proportion of the phaser sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Rate of the step wise change in the phaser effect Level of the phase shifted sound Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Output Level spunos bun e og suonpung 197159 The left and right phase will be Extremely high settings of the phase difference produce a deep phaser effect Polarity INVERSE opposite When using a mono Lin source this spreads the sound Multi Stage dix The left and right phase will SYNCHRO be the same Select this when inputting a stereo source
254. mes sub frames 3 Current time One frame is 1 30th of a second Asub frame is 1 10th of a frame 4 Recorder Indicates the tempo of the digital recorder tempo 2 Setting the Recorder Tempo p 122 Mode indication use the 1 MODE button to switch unlit This means you re in Normal Recording mode 5 BOUNCE This means you re in Bounce mode p 97 MASTERING This means you re in Mastering mode p 118 Level meter INPUT The input from the input jack LINE IN GUITAR MIC IN or keyboard is shown in the level meter RHYTHM The output level of the Rhythm Pattern is shown in the level meter 1 8 The output level from each track is shown in the level meters The level of the entire Digital Recorder is shown In UR bounce mode or mastering mode the individual recording levels bounce level mastering level will be shown 86 Num ber Button Name Indicator D A PUNCH PROTECT EFFECTS 1 MODE 3 MENU 4 TRK SET 5 RHYTHM 6 EFFECT Explanation specify the end time B specified Function buttons Explanation Changes the mode Opens the Recorder menu Opens the track settings screen Opens the Rhythm Pattern screen Opens the recorder effect screen This is displayed when Repeat is enabled This is displayed when you use the REPEAT A lt gt B button to specify the A B region used by Repeat or Auto Punch In It will blink when yo
255. n and press the key that you want to specify as the split point The key you pressed will become the new split point The split point key is included in the Upper area 2 Toclose the setting window press the EXIT button Changing the Keyboard Settings Changing the Pitch in One octave Steps OCTAVE DOWN UP Button Octave Shift is a function that changes the pitch of the keyboard in steps of an octave If you re using your right hand to play a low pitched part such as a bass line you ll find it easier to play if you shift the keyboard down one or two octaves Press the OCTAVE DOWN or UP button TRANS POSE ___ _ DOWN UP C Pressing the DOWN button will lower the pitch by one octave and pressing the UP button will raise the pitch by one octave You can change the pitch as much as three octaves down 3 or three octaves up 3 A setting window will open when you press one of these buttons and will close shortly after you release the button When set to any value other than 0 either OCTAVE DOWN or UP will light By pressing OCTAVE DOWN and UP simultaneously you can reset the value to 0 There is a single Octave Shift setting for the entire JUNO Gi The changed setting will be remembered even if you switch live sets This setting cannot be saved The value will be reset to 0 when you power up the JUNO Gi If you want to change the octave setting for each
256. n of the high range Volume balance of the original sound D and pitch shifted sound W Output Level You can use multi effect control to make the step sequence play again from the beginning p 46 64 REVERB Adds reverberation to the sound simulating an acoustic space Lin R in Parameter Type Pre Delay Time HF Damp Low Gain High Gain Balance Level LJ Balance D Balance D Value Type of reverb ROOM1 ROOM2 STAGE1 STAGE2 HALL1 HALL2 0 0 100 msec 0 127 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 65 GATED REVERB This is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant sound is cut off before its natural length Lin R in Parameter Type Pre Delay J Balance D Balance D Value Type of reverb NORMAL REVERSE SWEEP1 SWEEP2 0 0 100 msec Explanation Dense reverb with short decay Sparse reverb with short decay Reverb with greater late reverberation Reverb with strong early reflections Reverb with clear reverberance Reverb with rich reverberance Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Time length of reverberation Adjusts the frequency above which the reverberant sound will be cut As the frequency is set lower more of the high frequencies will be cut resulting in a softer and more muted reverberance If you do not want
257. nd This models an ACETONE FUZZ This models an Electro Harmonix Big Muff rr Value Explanation 0 120 Adjusts the depth of distortion 50 50 Adjusts the tone 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the OD DS sound WAH Parameter Mode Type 1 Pedal Position 1 Sens 2 Frequency 2 Peak 2 Value Selects the wah MANUAL T UP T DOWN Selects the type CRY WAH VO WAH FAT WAH LIGHT WAH 7STRING WAH RESO WAH 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 Explanation mode If you set Control Pedal Assign p 81 to INSERT FX CTRL you can use an expression pedal connected to the PEDAL CONTROL jack to control wah This produces a wah effect matched to the intensity of picking of wah This models the sound of the CRY BABY wah pedal popular in the 705 This models the sound of the VOX V846 This is a wah sound featuring a bold tone This wah has a refined sound with no unusual characteristics This expanded wah features a variable range compatible with seven string and baritone guitars This completely original effect offers enhancements on the characteristic Adjusts the position of the wah pedal This parameter will change when you operate the expression pedal This sets the sensitivity of response to the input sound Adjusts the center frequency of the Wah effect This sets the intensity of the wah sound 1 Setting available with MODE set to MANU
258. nd lever Switch images Controls the hue and brightness Controls the saturation Controls the image switching time Controls the playback speed 2 With the V LINK screen shown press the V LINK button again The V LINK button will go dark and the V LINK setting will be off What is V LINK V LINK Settings Press the V LINK button to access the V LINK screen The V LINK screen will appear Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter you want to edit Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the value Parameter Value Explanation MIDI channel that will control the V LINK device 0 1 2 0 5 1 2 0 1 4 0 5 1 4 Range of video playback 0 1 8 0 5 1 8 speed The three values 0 1 16 0 5 1 16 are the playback speeds Been 0 1 32 0 5 1 32 multiples of normal speed 0 2 4 0 4 8 at the left center and right 0 8 16 0 16 32 positions of the pitch bend 1 0 1 2 1 4 6 1 8 To save the settings press the 6 WRITE button 135 spunos gt suonpunj 1 ZIS Y U 3jj3 bunip3 fb et 5 Q Japsoray 23161 1293 1 k ejd DUOS Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Chord Memory List 06 Blues Assign Key Chord Name Constituent Notes of Chord Forms 7 9 C3 D4 E4 C C 7 9 C 3 F3 B3 D 4 D D7 9 D3 F 3 C4 E4
259. nd the sound of a connected guitar or microphone on recorder tempo The keyboard tempo is used for the synthesizer s E separate tracks You can also save your completed song as an audio file arpeggio playback etc and the recorder tempo is the tempo of the 3 on an SD card and then use your computer to create a CD from it or digital recorder p 32 m distribute it via the Internet About the USB Memory Song Player Tracks and V tracks UA The USB Memory Song Player plays back audio files E 2 The digital recorder provides eight tracks Each track consists of eight WAV MP3 AIFF or Standard MIDI Files SMF that 5 virtual tracks V tracks and you can select one of these V tracks for you ve copied from your computer to USB memory playback and recording In other words you can use 8 8 64 tracks to record your performance and choose eight of these for playback Copy to USB drive a 2 3 V Track 8 n V Track 7 E V Track 6 V Track 5 ee V Track 4 V Track 3 4 V Track 2 a V Track 1 12345678 Rhythm Pattern The digital recorder has eight tracks and can also play rhythm patterns like a rhythm machine SD Ca rds In addition to playing a single rhythm pattern as a guide while you oo bane aden ee Gece ee record you can also arrange different rhythm patterns as suitable for the structur
260. nected to the PEDAL CONTROL jack or to the PEDAL HOLD jack On some pedals the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of other pedals If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect set this parameter to REVERSE If you are using a Roland pedal that has no polarity switch set this parameter to STANDARD 81 D D A ct 5 5 suonpunj 197159 32 3 3 133 6 42410 spay 1 33 4 FEY CP Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Parameter Continuous Hold Value OFF ON 3 CTRL Parameter Sys Ctrl 1 4 Source Source Select Value OFF 01 31 33 95 PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYSTEM LIVE SET Selects the MIDI me Explanation Determines whether the HOLD PEDAL jack will provide support for half pedaling ON or not OFF When this is set to support use of half pedaling techniques you can then connect an optional expression pedal DP 10 etc and employ pedal work to achieve even finer control in performances in which piano tones are used Explanation ssage used as the System Control The system control knob will not be used Controller numbers 1 95 Pitch Bend Aftertouch Sys Ctrl 1 4 Source settings will be used for tone control Tone Ctrl 1 4 Source p 38 settings of each Live Set will be used
261. nector Using the Local Switch When you re using the JUNO Gi with external sequencer software leave the Local Switch turned off Read the following for details Typically things are hooked up so the data travels as follows the JUNO Gi s keyboard your external sequencer software the JUNO Gi s sound generator Normally the JUNO Gi s keyboard section is internally connected to its sound generator section this internal connection is controlled by the Local Switch If you turn the Local Switch off the JUNO Gi s keyboard and sound generator sections will be independent allowing you to use the connection described with your external sequencer software Connecting the JUNO Gi to an external sequencer JUNO Gi Keyboard 2 TX Parameter Transmit Program Change Transmit Bank Select Transmit Active Sensing Transmit Edit Data Soft Through 3 RX Parameter Receive Program Change Receive Bank Select Receive Exclusive Receive GM System On Receive GM2 System On Receive GS Reset Value OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Value OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Local Off JUNO Gi gt Sound Generator External Sequencer Explanation Specifies whether Program Change messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Specifies whether Active Sensing messa
262. nel Does the transmitting unit s Device ID number match the JUNO Gi s Device ID number Some sequencer software does not soft thru system exclusive messages Action Since the JUNO Gi s internal effects are stereo applying an insert effect will allow effect sound to be heard from the opposite side even if the source sound is panned all the way to one side This is usually because you have exceeded the highest note that the JUNO Gi is able to produce and won t occur with the notes you would normally use This does not indicate a malfunction If USB Song Sync Mode is set to SLAVE the JUNO Gi must be receiving MIDI clock from an external device Set USB Song Sync Mode to MASTER unless you re synchronizing the JUNO Gi with an external device Check the on off setting of each effect p 44 With the factory settings the Output Assign of some are not set Set the Output Assign to The effect won t be obtained if the send level to that effect is set at 0 Even if the send levels to the effect is set above 0 the effect won t be applied if the multi effect output level chorus level or reverb level are set to 0 Check each of these settings Since the delay time has an upper limit specifying the delay time as a note value and then slowing down the tempo may reach this upper limit The maximum delay time is the highest value that can be specified numerically i e other
263. ng a song for the first time please read the Quick Guide separate On the Digital Recorder each of your compositions is managed as a document which provides the explanations in the order of the song song You ll need to create a song before you begin recording a new production workflow composition 1 Inthe RECORDER screen press the 3 MENU button UA 1 Create anew song p 91 2 Usethe VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select 2 1 Song Edit and press the ENTER button Q The SONG EDIT MENU will appear A 2 Specifythetempo and select a Rhythm Pattern to play p 121 3 Use the cursor V buttons to select Create New Song and press the ENTER button 3 Record your performances p 94 4 Press the 5 EXEC button 2 new song will be created and you will return to the RECORDER screen 2 4 Adjust the volume balance and effects for each track p 89 CHa You can create up to a maximum of 99 songs with one SD card 197159 5 Master your song to create the final version p 118 6 Useacomputer d song s to a CD et gt Ua et 2 Jap10ray 216 sayy u1 d FEY CIP Kiowa 950 xipuaddy 91 Connecting the Equipment to Record and Adjusting the Input Level To the rear panel AUDIO INPUT jacks connect the equipment that you want to record in the Digital Re
264. ng Track Data to an Audio File Here s how track data recorded on a track can be converted to an audio file WAV formats If you want to combine all tracks and export the result as a single audio file execute the Mastering procedure as described in Mastering MASTERING Mode p 118 Exported audio files The data in the following formats can be exported e WAV format e Sampling Frequency 44 1 kHz e 16 bit 1 Choose Recorder Menu gt 2 Track Edit gt Track Export p 98 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the Source Track and Source V Track you want to export to audio file CHED If you select Track 1 8 the data will be created to a monaural audio file and if you select Track 1 2 7 8 the data will be created to a stereo audio file For example if you select Track 1 2 Track 1 will be exported to the left channel and Track 2 will be exported to the right channel of a stereo audio file 3 Press the 6 NEXT button 4 Assign a name to the audio file For details on how to enter a name refer to Assigning a Name p 19 5 After assigning a name press the 6 EXEC button The display will ask Export OK 6 If you re sure you want to export press the 5 EXEC button If you decide to cancel press the 6 CANCEL button The track data will be exported to the audio file The exported audio file will be sav
265. nge High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W D0 100W direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 30 3D FLANGER This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound The flanger sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right 3D Flanger LJ H R out Parameter Value Explanation Type of filter OFF No filter is used Filter Type Cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Freq HPF Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Center frequency when using the Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz filter to cut a specific frequency range Adjusts the delay time from Pre Delay 0 0 100 msec when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Parameter Feedback Output Mode Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Parameter Filter Type Cutoff Freq Pre Delay Rate Depth Phase Feedback Step Rate Output Mode Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Value 98 98 Explanation Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase The optimal 3D effect will be achieved SPEAKER PHONES 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 31 3D STEP FLANGER This applies a 3D effect to
266. nges Anti Phase Low Sw OFF ON When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal Adjusts the level settings for the Low frequency ranges Adjusting this level for certain Anti Phase Low Level 0 127 frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source Settings of the Anti Phase func tion for the Middle frequency ranges The parameters are the same as for the Low frequency ranges Anti Phase Mid Sw OFF ON Anti Phase Mid Level 0 127 Turns Low Booster on off Low Boost Sw OFF ON This emphasizes the bottom to create a heavy bass sound Increasing this value gives you a heavier low end Low Boost Level 0 127 Depending on the Isolator and filter settings this effect may be hard to distinguish Level 0 127 Output Level 04 LOW BOOST Boosts the volume of the lower range creating powerful lows L in 2 Band EQ L out Parameter Value Explanation Boost 50 125 Hz Center frequency at which the Frequency lower range will be boosted Boost Gain 0 12 dB Amount by which the lower range will be boosted Boost Width WIDE MID NARROW Width of the lower range that will be boosted Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Level 0 127 Output level 05 SUPER FILTER This is a filter with an extremely sharp slope The cutoff frequency can be vari
267. nitiating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the condensation has completely evaporated Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on which you place the unit its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to prevent this from happening If you do so please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit
268. nu Hold down this button to audition the currently selected Live Set or Tone While this button is on the 0 9 buttons can be used to enter numeric values Turns the Favorite function on off While this button is on the 0 9 buttons will select Favorite banks Information about the current operation is shown here Select the Live Set category group The six buttons located below the display are also used to execute the function indicated at the bottom of the screen Selects special Live Sets Indicates the amount of battery power remaining p 128 p 128 p 128 p 28 p 16 p 133 p 26 32 32 31 135 27 27 19 23 19 24 24 17 22 p 18 p 23 14 Number 10 Name DEC INC buttons A VY lt gt Cursor buttons VALUE dial SHIFT button EXIT button ENTER LIST button DIGITAL RECORDER area RECORDER VIEW button UNDO REDO button REC SOURCE SELECT KEYBOARD AUDIO INPUT button PEAK indicator I 4 SONG TOP button lt REWIND button gt gt FAST FORWARD button REPEAT A 4 gt B button STOP button gt PLAY button 6 REC button TRACK MIXER sliders MASTER slider RHYTHM PATTERN button 1 5 4 8 buttons TRACK 1 4 5 8 button SOUND MODIFY area REVERB knob EQ knobs CUTOFF RESONANCE knobs S1 S2 buttons Pitch Bend Modulation Lever
269. o Punch In Out Auto punch in out is the method in which punch in out begins automatically at the time locations you specify beforehand This is convenient when you want to punch in out at precise points or if you want to punch in out automatically so that you can concentrate on your playing When using auto punch in out you must set the punchin and punch out points at least 1 0 seconds apart Specify the punch in and punch out locations the A B region as described in steps 1 2 of Specifying the A B Region p 90 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the REPEAT A 4 gt B button The A B SETTING screen will appear Press the 2 AUTO button The region you specified will be the auto punch in out region Press EXIT button to close the A B SETTING screen Move to a location slightly earlier than the point at which you want to begin rerecording Select the track that you want to punch into as described in steps 2 3 of Selecting the track to record 94 Press the PLAY button At the location you specified for punch in the 8 REC button will automatically turn red and recording will begin When you reach the punch out point you will automatically return to playback When you ve finished recording press the W STOP button 95 spunos gt suonpunj 1971594 ct gt iM e 31 3 14 2 3 Jap
270. o keep the live set you modified you must save it to internal user memory Japsoday A confirmation message will appear 6 Press the 5 EXEC button to save the live set uyn When you edit the settings of a live set Live set mode an will be wn shown in the LIVE SET PLAY screen To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button z When you save the data that previously occupied the save Never turn off the power while data is being saved destination will be overwritten 1 Pressthe WRITE button The LIVE SET NAME screen will appear OC 2 Assign a name to the live set tz For details on how to enter a name refer to Assigning a Name p 19 80 D 3 When you ve finished assigning a name press the 6 NEXT button A screen allowing you to select the save destination will appear What the saved Live Set data contains gt 4 Use the VALUE dial the DEC INC buttons or the cursor LIVE SET EDIT parameters p 36 5 A buttons to select the save destination live set Chord Memory settings 31 number Arpeggio settings 32 If you press the 4 COMPR button to apply a check mark you ll be able to play the save destination live set Compare function 35 LIVE SET EDIT Parameter For details on how to edit in each screen refer to Basic Operations in the LIVE SET EDIT Screen p 34 LIVE SET EDIT 1 Screen
271. o select to the parameter that you Controlling the Pa rameters of Two Tracks want to set 3 Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the Sim ulta neo usly Ste reo Lin k value D In some cases you may wish to adjust the parameters of two tracks v Parameter Value Explanation simultaneously such as when you re using two tracks to record or play _ Level 0 127 Volume of each track back a stereo source You can do this using the Stereo Link function p Pan left right position of each track 1 Inthe TRACK SETTING screen move the cursor to the M parameter for which you want to enable or disable stereo Reverb 0 127 Level of signal sent from each track to reverb link a 9 Equalizer switch for each track T OFF 2 Pressthe 2 ST LINK button lt EQ ON Press the 1 EQ SET button to open the rH equalizer setting screen for each track The indication is shown for parameters that are stereo linked V Track number e When you use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to modify the The status of the V track is shown in the screen value of a track parameter that is stereo linked the two values will V Track 1 8 Bl indicates that data exists change together The Rhythm Pattern does not have 5 m V tracks CHD gt The value will not change immediately when you en
272. of each frequency band This suppresses high level signals to prevent distortion This makes settings that affect the overall output Page p 120 p 120 p 120 120 p 120 109 spunos gt MITTEN 1971594 3jj3 bunip3 62 Las 1 Ua gt Japsoray spay u1 d 1 4 ows 45 xipuaddy Parameter On Off Type CRUNCH TW CLEAN JC CLEAN COMBO BG LEAD MATCH R FIER MS MODERN MS CLASSIC T AMP 110 Value BOSS CLEAN JC 120 JAZZ COMBO FULL RANGE CLEAN TWIN PRO CRUNCH TWEED DELUXE CRUNCH BOSS CRUNCH BLUES WILD CRUNCH STACK CRUNCH VO DRIVE VO LEAD VO CLEAN MATCH DRIVE FAT MATCH MATCH LEAD BG LEAD BG DRIVE BG RHYTHM MS1959 MS1959 I II MS HIGAIN MS SCOOP R FIER VINTAGE R FIER MODERN R FIER CLEAN T AMP LEAD T AMP CRUNCH T AMP CLEAN Explanation Turns the AMP OFF ON Explanation This is a clean sound that is smooth and warm This is the sound of the Roland JC 120 This is a sound suited to jazz This is a sound with flat response Good for acoustic guitar This models a Fender Twin Reverb This models a Fender Pro Reverb This models a Fender Bassman 4 x 10 Combo This models a Fender Deluxe Reverb This is a crunch sound that faithfully reproduces picking nuance
273. off Freq HPF Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Center frequency when using the Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz filter to cut a specific frequency range Adjusts the delay time from Pre Delay 0 0 100 msec when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back 0 into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Step Rate 0 10 20 00 Hz note Rate period of pitch change Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W D0 100W direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 57 spunos gt suonpunj 197159 3yj3 bunip3 gt E gt a gt Lan Ua ES e Japsoray wy uy 1 Kiowa gsfi xipuaddy 26 HEXA CHORUS Uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to give richness and spatial spread to the sound 28 SPACE D This is a multiple chorus that applies two phase modulation in stereo It gives no impression of modulation but produces a transparent chorus effect L in Balance D J Balance W gt R in O R out Balance D Parameter Value Ex
274. onds to your playing touch Press the MENU button Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select 4 System and press the ENTER button The System Menu window will appear Press the 2 KBD CTRL button Press the 1 KBD button Use the cursor A V buttons to select a parameter Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired value For details on the parameters and values that you can assign refer to 11 KBD p 81 If you want to keep your settings press the 6 WRITE button Press the EXIT button a number of times to return to the previous screen Changing the Temperament to an Arabian or Other Scale Scale Tune Equal temperament is the method of tuning used by most music today including Western music However the JUNO Gi lets you recreate other temperaments by individually altering the pitches of the notes Using this feature you change the temperament of the instrument to that used for Baroque or other classical music or set it for tuning used in Arabian music This feature is called Scale Tuning Scale tuning allows you to modify the pitch of each note in one cent steps 1 100th of a semitone relative to the equal tempered pitch Press the MENU button Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select 4 System and press the ENTER button The System Menu window will appear Press the 1 GENERAL button Press the 2 SOUND button
275. one assigned to the layer will be used How deeply the LFO will affect pitch If you choose the OFF setting the tone s value will be set to 0 How deeply the LFO will affect the cutoff frequency If you choose the OFF setting the tone s value will be set to 0 How deeply the LFO will affect the volume If you choose the OFF setting the tone s value will be set to 0 How deeply the LFO will affect the pan If you choose the OFF setting the tone s value will be set to 0 43 spunos gt suonpunj 1971594 et gt Las Ua et Japsoray 23161 1293 FEY CPUs Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Applying Effects EFFECT EDIT You can apply two multi effects MFX1 MFX2 one chorus and one reverb to each live set The two multi effects can not only be used individually but also as a combination of multi effects Turning Effects On Off Effect Switch The JUNO Gi s onboard effects can be switched on off as a whole Turn these OFF when you want to listen to the unprocessed sound as you create a sound or if you want to use an external effects processor instead of the built in effects The effect on off settings cannot be saved 1 Press the MENU button 2 Usethe VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select 2 Effect Edit and press the ENTER button The EFFECT ROUTING screen will appe
276. ontroller mode 133 Meu ooo 121 123 MIDI CTRL button 133 3 EE 84 DELETE 5 123 MIDI implementation chart 144 ASSIGNABLE button 28 2 KBD MIDUSYNC e eene 82 evite lD PP 82 MID 29 Assignable Switch 38 we KBD CTRL 81 35 Attack Time o 37 digital 86 KEYBOARD button 93 Mid E 81 89 S AUDIO INPUT button 17 80 e E AUDIO INPUT jacks 92 Keyboard Output Gain 80 MODE 94 es i keyboard tempo 32 dd dr Lid 5 2 SELECT window 22 EFFECT 44 251 d 2 27 modulation lever 29 effect 105 37 ay Auto Power Off 16 80 Keyboard Velocity Curve 81 EFFECT ROUTING 45 move in steps of hours minutes n Keyboard Velocity Sens 81 jl 44 KEYBORD 36 econds frames sub frames 87 backlight 17 EFFECT SWITCH window
277. or Is the volume of the external device adjusted correctly Is the INPUT LEVEL knob adjusted correctly p 92 Check the connection Set the phantom power supply appropriately p 92 Check the rear panel MIC IN LEVEL knob Turn on the AUDIO INPUT SELECT setting Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor Adjust the volume of your external device to an appropriate level Adjust the INPUT LEVEL knob No sound from a specific track Can t hear the input source Can t record Noise and distortion is heard in the recorded sound Could the track s volume level Track Level parameter have be lowered p 89 Could the V track setting have selected the wrong V track p 89 Is the INPUT LEVEL knob set appropriately p 92 Could the INPUT screen s Level be set to a low value p 93 Could the AUDIO INPUT SELECT setting have been turned off p 93 Could the song be protected p 104 Is the SD inserted Could the SD card be locked Is there insufficient free space on the SD card Is the mode Normal mode Bounce mode Mastering mode selected correctly p 94 Was the input sensitivity appropriate If the input sensitivity is too high the recorded sound will be distorted if the input sensitivity is too low the recorded sound will be buried in noise Is the track output level appropriate Raise the volume level Track Level parameter Select a V track that contain
278. order s Effects Screen 1 Inthe RECORDER screen 6 EFFECT button The recorder s effects screen will appear LIRMI ERI BAHE GUITAR PRS THIS 381 5 Le TL MERE EDIT STH Function Buttons Button Explanation Page 1 INS FX Opens the INSERT FX screen p 106 only in Mastering mode 1 MASTER p 118 Opens the Mastering Tool Kit 2 REVERB Opens the Reverb screen p 117 only when an insert effect is selected 4 LOC Changes the insert effect connection p 108 location only when an insert mastering effect is 5 EDIT selected p 107 Edits the effect 6 SWITCH Turns each effect on off p 106 2 Use the 1 INS FX 2 REVERB buttons to switch to the effect screen that you want to see Turning each Effect On Off SWITCH 1 Intherecorder s effects screen press the 6 SWITCH button 2 Pressthe 1 INS FX 2 REVERB buttons to turn each effect on off LIRMI ERI MILD GUITAR PRST 661 GLUEST CRUNCH RECORDER EFFECT SWITCH REVERB CLOSE Button Effects 1 INS FX Insert Effects Mastering mode only MASTER Mastering Tool Kit 2 REVERB Reverb 3 To close the setting window press the 6 CLOSE button or the EXIT button 106 Selecting an Insert Effect 1 Inthe recorder s effects screen press the
279. ortcut to the corresponding screen SYNTH FX PAD SPECIAL OTHERS LIVE SET ENTER For example if you hold down the SHIFT button and press the SOLO SYNTH button the Solo Synth setting screen will appear VALUE dial Turning the VALUE dial clockwise increases the value counterclockwise decreases the value For details refer to the page where a particular function is explained In some screens pressing the SHIFT button will change the operation of the function buttons In this case pressing the SHIFT button will change the name of the functions displayed at the bottom of the screen To execute a function hold down the SHIFT button and press the corresponding function button The value will change in larger steps if you hold down the SHIFT button while turning the VALUE dial DEC and INC buttons Pressing the INC button increases the value and the DEC button decreases it e Keep the button pressed for continuous adjustment e For faster value increases keep the INC button pressed down and press the DEC button For decreasing value faster keep the DEC button pressed down and press the INC button e The value will change in larger steps if you hold down the SHIFT button while you press the INC or DEC button 18 Assigning a Name Entering a Value NUMERIC Button If you turn the N
280. ou connect a guitar or bass set this to GUITAR Output jack of your digital audio player If you re using a condenser microphone connect it to the balanced XLR jack and choose the PHANTOM setting Phantom power is not supplied to the phone jack OUT jacks of your stereo system If you re using a dynamic microphone choose the PHANTOM setting Alwaysturn the phantom power off when connecting any device other than condenser microphones that require phantom power You risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply phantom power to dynamic microphones audio playback devices or other devices that don t require such power Be sure to check the specifications of any microphone you intend to use by referring to the manual that came with it This instrument s phantom power 48 V DC 10 mA Max 7 7 TIT This instrument is equipped with balanced XLR TRS type jacks Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below Make connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other EX Ti COLD SLEEVE GND equipment you intend to connect e To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections e When connection cables with resistors are used the volume level of equipment connecte
281. ounce Recording 1 Press the 1 MODE button a number of times to select Normal mode Make sure that the display does not indicate BOUNCE or MASTERING 2 Press the 4 TRK SET button The TRACK SETTING screen will appear 3 Move the cursor to the V Track field of the track that you bounce recorded and use the VALUE dial to specify the number of the V track you bounce recorded Example If you bounce recorded to V track 2 of tracks 1 and 2 set the V Track field to 2 for tracks 1 or 2 4 Setthe Level field values to 0 for all tracks other than the bounced tracks and set Reverb field values to 0 for all tracks Alternatively you can use the track buttons to mute all tracks other than the bounced tracks see Muting Tracks p 88 If the Target Track is stereo set the pan of the bounce destination tracks 1 and 2 to far left and far right respectively 5 Press the EXIT button 6 Press the 14 Song Top button to move to the beginning of the song 7 Press the PLAY button to hear the bounce recorded sound 8 Ifyou want to save the settings to the currently selected song press the WRITE button 97 spunos gt suonpunj 1 ZIS Y U 3jj3 bunip3 ct gt iM et ie 7 2 sayy 1 33 4 1 k ejd DUOS Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Editing
282. ous state of illumination If you press the NUMERIC button without pressing the ENTER button the 0 9 buttons will return to their previous state without changing the live set number Selecting Special Live Sets SPECIAL LIVE SET Button Press the SPECIAL LIVE SET button BATTERY m KEYBOARD GUITAR 6 65 BRASS VOCAL SYNTH 2 94 RHYTHM PIANO ORGAN BASS PLUCKED ORCHESTRA WIND CHOIR PAD OTHERS SEAL Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the live set number Press the ENTER LIST button The SPECIAL LIVE SET LIST screen will appear Use the VALUE dial the 4 buttons or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired special live set and press the ENTER button If you press the EXIT button instead of pressing the ENTER button you ll return to the previous screen without the live set number being changed Gn You can select a special live set as described in Selecting Live Sets from the List Using the VALUE dial to Select a Live Set or Selecting Live Sets by Number or by selecting the SPECIAL live set group Auditioning a Live Set IPREVIEW Button If you hold down the PREVIEW button the selected live set will be played using an appropriate phrase Press and hold the PREVIEW button A phrase will play using the live set that s selected in the screen The phrase will stop playing when you release the PREVIEW button e If
283. ously Itis not possible for the settings of all layers to total an amount greater than 64 The remaining number of available voices will be displayed at rest Pay attention to this readout as you make Voice Reserve settings JUNO Gi is able to play up to 128 notes simultaneously The polyphony or the number of voices sounds does not refer only to the number of live sets actually being played but changes according to the number of tones used in the live sets and the number Explanation Pitch of the layer s sound in 1 octave units Note that when a rhythm set is assigned to a layer you cannot modify this parameter Pitch of the layer s sound Amount of pitch change in semitones 2 octaves that will occur when the Pitch Bend Lever is moved The amount of change when the lever is tilted is set to the same value for both left and right sides The bend range setting specified by the tone will 4 OUTPUT Parameter Asgn Output Assign Output MFX Select Output Output Level Chorus Chorus Send Reverb Reverb Send Value 0 127 0 127 0 127 5 KEYBORD Level The layer sounded in the lower range Key Fade Lower Parameter K L Key Range K U Key Range Upper F L Key Fade Lower F U Key Fade Upper Key Range Lower Value C Upper Lower G9 0 127 0 127 Explanation Specifies for eac
284. ove the cursor left right When the cursor reaches an is shown at the left side of the live set group Cursor lt q gt the edge of the screen the screen will scroll to the If you turn off the power or switch to a different live set while this is LU displayed the changes you made will be discarded If you want to keep SHIFT lt q Scroll the screen left right your changes you must save the live set Function Buttons 8 Press the WRITE button and proceed as described in Jump to the screen indicated by the button 1 5 Saving a Live Set WRITE p 35 Moves between pages in the order shown below 6 PAGE gt LIVESET EDIT 1 2223 19 5 PRO EDIT LIVE SET EDIT 3 Moves to the PRO EDIT screen screen only LIVE SET EDIT 1 LIVE SET EDIT 2 LIVE SET EDIT 3 34 Initializing a Live Set Copying Exchanging Layers Here s how to return initialize the settings of the currently selected Here s how to exchange the Upper and Lower layers or to copy the live set to their default values Upper layer settings to the Lower layer 1 Select the live set that you want to edit Initialization will affect only the currently selected live set If you want 2 Pressthe MENU button to return all settings to their factory set state execute the Factory Reset operation p 78 3 Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select 1 Live Set n it h he ENTER
285. ox 6 hours 8 GB Approx 48 hours 2 GB Approx 12 hours 16 GB Approx 96 hours 4 6405 JSN 4 Approx 24 hours 32GB Approx 192 hours jake The maximum recording time storage used for one song is approximately 12 hours 2 GB The above recording times are approximate The above recording times are for when only one track is used For example if you record using all eight tracks the available time for each track will be one eighth of the time listed xipuaddy Since the 2 GB SD card included with the JUNO Gi contains a demo song the available recording time will be shorter than listed above With the Track Export function a maximum of approximately 6 hours and 40 minutes worth of monaural data approximately 3 hours and 20 minutes worth of stereo data can be output Turning the Power On Once the connections have been completed p 12 turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices Tu i ng the Power Off in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to e ee speakers and other devices 1 Minimize the volume of the JUNO Gi and your speakers 2 Turn off the power of your speakers 3 Turn the JUNO Gi s POWER switch OFF 1 Minimize the volume of the JUNO Gi and your speakers 2 Au Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before switching on power Even with the volume all the way down
286. per range Adjusts the length time of reverberation The high cut filter adjusts the amount of high frequencies in the reverb sound When FLAT is selected the high cut filter will have no effect This sets the volume level of the effect 115 jake 1971594 3jj3 bunip3 Japsoray 4 JSN spunos suonpunj b zt 5 Q SITE u1 d xipuaddy COMPRESSOR Parameter On Off Sustain Attack Level 116 Value OFF ON 0 100 0 100 0 100 Explanation This parameter turns the compressor effect on off This sets the sustain for the sound This sets the attack onset of the sound This sets the volume level of the effect Parameter On Off Sens Freq Mix Level Low Mix Level Level Value OFF ON 0 100 1 0 10 0 kHz 0 100 0 100 0 100 ENHANCER Explanation This parameter turns the enhancer effect on off Adjusts the manner in which the enhancer will be applied relative to the input signals Adjusts the frequency at which the enhancer effect will begin to be applied The effect will be made apparent in the frequencies above the frequency set here Adjusts the amount of phase shifted sound of the range set by Frequency that is to be mixed with the input Adjusts the amount of phase
287. phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Spatial spread of the sound Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the delay sound W Output Level 47 3IAP PAN DELAY Produces three delay sounds center left and right Lin Parameter Delay Left Right Center Center Feedback HF Damp Left Right Center Level Low Gain High Gain Balance Level Value 0 2600 msec note 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 48 4TAP PAN DELAY This effect has four delays Lin Balance D Explanation Adjusts the time from the original sound until the left right and center delayed sounds are heard Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you do not want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Volume of each delay Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the delay sound W Output Level Balance D Balance D Stereo location of each delay Parameter Delay 1
288. pie ne will want to edit and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to 1 4 Multi sleet choose the desired value Control Effacte Parametafe The type of parameters that can be selected MR will depend on the type of multi effect Destination MFX1 2 p 48 Parameter Value Explanation you ve selected in MFX Type Selects the type of multi effect used Specifies the depth of multi effect control 00 THRU by MFX Specify a positive value if you want to DIES 79 VOCODER Choose 00 THRU if you don t want to Sens nange valu Br We este iva m lti effact 1 4 tion in a positive direction larger toward apply i 63 63 the right faster etc or specify a negative Parameters for Edit the parameters of the MFX type you ve selected Refer to Contro value if you want to change the value in each MFX type Multi Effects Parameters MFX1 2 p 48 Sensitivity a negative direction smaller toward the left slower etc Larger values will allow a greater amount of control Controlling a Multi Effect via MIDI MFX1 2 CTRL Specifying How Multi Effects are Combined In the MFX screen press the 4 CTRL 1 button or the 5 CTRL 2 M FX STRU CTU RE button the MFX CTRL screen will appear Here you can specify how MFX 1 2 will be combined Lv 1 aei Sa p In the MFX screen or MFX CTRL screen press the 3 STRUCT button Eben MeL to
289. planation P Adjusts the delay time from the Pre Delay 0 0 100 msec direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Pre Delay Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation nate Adjusts the differences in Pre Depth Pre Delay Deviation 0 20 Delay between each chorus Phase Low Gain Adjusts the difference in Hiah Gain Depth Deviation 20 20 modulation depth between each 3 chorus sound Adjusts the difference in stereo Balance 0 20 location between each chorus sound Level Ban Devistion 0 All chorus sounds will be in the center Each chorus sound will be 20 spaced at 60 degree intervals relative to the center Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W DO0 100W direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output Level Balance D Balance D Value 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 180 deg 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Explanation Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Spatial spread of the sound Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Output Level 27 TREMOLO CHORUS This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo cyclic modulation of volume Tremolo Rate Tremolo Separation Tremolo Phase Balance Level 58 0 05 10 00 Hz note
290. po of the audio data recorded in the Digital Recorder This means that if you change the tempo after recording the sound of the tracks and the sound of the rhythm pattern will play back out of time with each other To avoid such problems you should decide on the recorder tempo before you start recording tracks and avoid changing it later 122 Placing Patterns to Create an Arrangement ARRANGE EDIT Here s h by placi tt in the desired order from the intro through the ending The arrangement you create CLEAR ALL Clear Alll Steps is saved in the song This operation clears all of the steps that you input returning them to the blank condition Use this when you want to create an arrangement Displaying the ARRANGE EDIT screen from scratch 1 Press the 1 CLR ALL button 1 Inthe RHYTHM PATTERN screen press the 1 ARG EDIT A confirmation message will appear 2 Pressthe 5 EXEC button To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button About the ARRANGE EDIT screen DELETE STEP The ARRANGE EDIT screen will appear spunos gt This operation deletes an unwanted step and joins the two sections STEF FBIS 2 1 m F aZO RDOCEA4 V1 5 Paz3 ROCK4 F2 ne etu 2 5 mm ber Name Explanation 1 Use the cursor 4 V buttons to select the step that you o want to delete
291. r L out R in Step Filter Parameter Value Step 01 16 0 127 Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Attack 0 127 Filter type LPF Filter Type BPF HPF NOTCH 12 dB Filter Slope 24 dB 36 dB Filter Resonance Filter Gain 0 12 dB Level 0 127 H out Explanation Cutoff frequency at each step Rate of modulation Speed at which the cutoff frequency changes between steps Frequency range that will pass through each filter Frequencies below the cutoff Frequencies in the region of the cutoff Frequencies above the cutoff Frequencies other than the region of the cutoff Amount of attenuation per octave Gentle Steep Extremely steep Filter resonance level Increasing this value will emphasize the region near the cutoff frequency Amount of boost for the filter output Output level You can use multi effect control to make the step sequence play again from the beginning p 46 07 ENHANCER Controls the overtone structure of the high frequencies adding sparkle and tightness to the sound Lin Hin Parameter Sens Mix Low Gain High Gain Level Ri Mix Value 0 127 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 127 Explanation Sensitivity of the enhancer Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Output Level 51 spunos gt 110494 1971594
292. r Value Explanation PA Receive Poly Key Press 2 Sns CA Receive Channel Press D Adjusts the velocity sensitivity The higher the 2 Sens 63 463 value the greater the sensitivity Md Receive Modulation 01 Ex Receive Expression 11 Velocity curve for each layer enone gt Selects for each layer one of the four following BSS a OFF ON specific MIDI Velocity Curve types that best matches the Br Receive Breath Type 02 Messages Olt y TN touch of the keyboard Set this to OFF if you meaner F each MIDI OFF are using the keyboard s own velocity curve channel 5 Velocity Curve 1 4 Po Receive Portamento 5 CC65 Type ii Receive Filter Offset CC71 CC74 d Tes cas lik be bas ne Ev Receive Envelope Offset CC72 CC73 CC75 a 1 2 3 4 uA a a uu a Ef Receive Effect Send CC91 CC93 v D V L 100 Specifies the lowest velocity at which the layer as Range Uppen wil amd ower V U Lower Specifies the highest velocity at which the layer Velocity Range 157 will sound gt Upper Determines what will happen to the tone s 2 F L level when the tone is played at a velocity Velocity Fade 0 127 lower than Velo Range Lower If you don t want Lower the tone to sound at all set this parameter to o 37 LIVE SET EDIT 3 Screen Parameter 1 COM
293. rained so that even the loudest portions of keyboard oru audio the songs are handled appropriately on the CD However this often results in an overall lowering of the volume resulting in a CD that lacks excitement and impact With the Mastering Tool Kit however you can smooth out the differences in volume that occur over the course of a What IS G rou song while also correcting the balance Effect patch settings you ve edited be saved in the USER or SONG groups Group Explanation Edit Write What is the COSM 3yj3 bunip3 PRESET Patches that cannot be rewritten d fb 5 Q Technology that simulates existing physical structures materials b di and the like using different virtual means is called modeling USER d internal memory technology Patches that can be saved in COSM Composite Object Sound Modeling is a technical SONG d innovation from Roland that combines a number of such sound modeling technologies to create new and unique sounds 31 3 14 2 The Insert Effects and the Mastering Tool Kit cannot be used simultaneously Japs0ray 1 sayy u1 d FEY CIP Kiowa 950 xipuaddy 105 Using Insert Effects Displaying the Rec
294. range Adjusts the tone for the ultra high frequency range When you set the TYPE parameter to VO DRIVE VO LEAD VO CLEAN MATCH DRIVE FAT MATCH or MATCH LEAD the PRESENCE parameter functions as the high cut filter found in the original amps Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp Be careful not to raise the LEVEL setting too high Turns the bright setting OFF ON The Bright parameter setting is only partially available with some JC CLEAN TW CLEAN CRUNCH or BG LEAD settings in TYPE Bright is not used Bright is switched on to create a lighter and crisper tone Provides for selection from three levels of distortion Distortion will successively increase for settings of LOW MIDDLE and HIGH Set SOLO SW to ON to add a boost in volume that s suitable for solos Adjusts the volume level when the SOLO SW is ON Select the speaker type This turns off the speaker simulator This is the built in speaker of the amp you selected with AMP TYPE This is a open back speaker cabinet with one 8 inch speaker This is a open back speaker cabinet with one 10 inch speaker This is a open back speaker cabinet with one 12 inch speaker This is a open back speaker cabinet with two 12 inch speakers This is a closed back speaker cabinet with four 10 inch speakers This is a closed back speaker cabinet with four 12 inch speakers This is a double stack of two closed back cabinets each with four 12 inch spe
295. rase in octave steps 2 CONTROL Parameter Value Explanation Split Switch Split Point Arpeggio Destination Tone Ctrl 1 4 Source OFF ON OFF 9 Specifies the Split setting p 26 Specifies the Split Point p 26 Specifies the layer played by the arpeggio The Upper layer will be played by the arpeggio The Lower layer will be played by the arpeggio The Upper and Lower layers will be played by the arpeggio UPPER LOWER BOTH If Split is on the Upper layer will be played by the arpeggio Selects the MIDI message used as the tone Control OFF The tone control will not be used 01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH Pitch Bend Aftertouch Explanation The function assigned to the S1 S2 buttons TRANSPOSE UP TRANSPOSE DOWN TAP TEMPO MONO POLY PORTAMENTO HOLD MFX1 2 SW CHORUS SW REVERB SW SYS CTRL 1 4 SRC LAYER 1 SW LAYER 2 SW LAYER 3 SW LAYER 4 SW U1 U2 L1 L2 Shift the pitch of the keyboard upward in semitone steps a maximum of six semitones Shift the pitch of the keyboard down ward in semitone steps a maximum of five semitones Used to set the keyboard tempo to the interval at which you press the button Specify whether the tone will play polyphonically POLY or monophoni cally MONO Turn the Portamento on off Turn the Hold on off Switch th
296. reate New Song Creates a new song p 91 Information Displays information about the song p 103 Song Name Edit Edits the name of the song p 103 Song Remove Deletes the selected song p 103 Song Copy Copies the song p 103 START TO Time Song Protect Turns the song s Protect setting on off p 104 END Song Optimize Deletes unneeded e If the copy destination contains data that data will be overwritten e The copy region you specify must be longer than 1 0 seconds If the TRACK EDIT Men U region is shorter than 1 0 seconds the sound won t be heard even if the data was copied Menu Explanation Page Track Copy Copies track data p 98 Track Move Moves track data p 99 Track Erase Erases track data p 100 Track Exchange Exchanges track data p 100 Imports audio files WAV or AIFF from Track Import the SD card into a track p 101 Exports a track s data to an SD card as an Track Export audio file p 102 98 1 Choose Recorder Menu gt 2 Track Edit Track p 98 The TRACK COPY screen will appear Specify the Source Track Source V Track Start and End for the Copy operation and press the 6 NEXT button I REALE Source Source Y Start E Engg Function Button Edit Region 1 ALL The edit region will be the entire track you specified The edit region will be the region between the points A and B you specified 2 AB If you
297. reen Rhythm Pattern function is on Unlit Track contains no recorded data Lit green Track contains recorded data Blinking Muted green 1 5 4 8 Lit red Recording track p 94 Selecting the track to record liking ren You can select the track to record by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing a TRACK 1 5 4 8 button Muting tracks 1 8 1 Use the TRACK 1 5 4 8 buttons to mute or unmute the tracks If the TRACK 1 4 5 8 button is lit you ll be controlling tracks 5 8 Turning the Rhythm Pattern on off 1 Press the RHYTHM PATTERN button to turn the Rhythm Pattern on off 88 Adjusting the Volume of the Tracks AITAL RECORDER TRACK MIXER p a gt S r r po a Adjusting the volume of tracks 1 8 1 Usethe TRACK MIXER 1 5 4 8 sliders to adjust the volume If the TRACK 1 4 5 8 button is lit you ll be controlling tracks 5 8 By holding down the SHIFT button and moving a slider you check the current value without modifying the setting e If aslider is lowered all the way the sound of that track will not be heard e For tracks for which Stereo Link p 89 is enabled moving one slider will simultaneously change the volume of the two stereo linked tracks Adjusting the Rhythm Pattern volume
298. ress the EXIT button When you execute Redo the display will indicate Redo Completed and the Undo operation you just executed will be cancelled Bounce Recording 1 Putting Multiple Tracks Together BOUNCE Mode Although the JUNO Gi allows the simultaneous playback of eight tracks when you run out of tracks the JUNO Gi also lets you copy the recordings of multiple tracks together onto one track V Track This is called bounce also known as bounce recording or ping pong recording By combining multiple tracks in this way you can free up other tracks in order to record additional performances In Bounce mode you can play back eight tracks simultaneously and record them all to a single separate V Track When the KEYBOARD or AUDIO INPUT buttons are on you can have those sounds recorded together Furthermore you can include the sounds from the Rhythm Pattern p 121 in the recording KEYBOARD AUDIO INPUT Track 1 8 Rhythm Pattern Track 1 V2 In the RECORDER screen press the 1 MODE button a number of times until BOUNCE appears in the display Tm S of m A g EFFECTS SET EFFEGI FHYTTHH TELITA MOL L PEHY Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Target Track field and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the bounce destination track and V track
299. reverberation Type ROOM1 HALL2 Delay time Type DELAY PAN DELAY Adjusts the frequency above which the high frequency content of the reverb sound will be cut or damped If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Adjusts the amount of delay feedback when the Type setting is DELAY or PAN DELAY Amount of delay sound returned to the input this setting is valid only if Type is DELAY or PAN DELAY Pre Delay Time Size High Cut Density Diffusion 0 0 100 msec 0 127 1 8 160 12500 Hz BYPASS 0 127 0 127 Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Time length of reverberation Size of the simulated room or hall Adjusts the frequency above which the high frequency content of the reverb will be reduced If you do not want to reduce the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Density of reverb Adjusts the change in the density of the reverb over time The higher the value the more the density increases with time The effect of this setting is most pronounced with long reverb times Parameter LF Damp Freq LF Damp Gain HF Damp Freq HF Damp Gain Character Pre LPF Level Time Delay Feedback Value 50 4000 Hz 36 0 dB 4000 12500 Hz 36 0 dB Type of reverb 0 5 6 7 0 127 0 127 0 127 Explanation Adjusts the frequency below which the low frequency
300. rl 1 4 Source LAYER 1 4 SW Turns the Layer Switch On Off for the specified layer The way in which the S1 S2 buttons will operate when pressed Depending on the Assign setting this may not be available Type i LATCH The on off status will alternate each time you press the button The assigned function will turn on MOMENTARY while you press the button and will turn off when you release it Press the EXIT button to return to the previous screen The S1 S2 settings are saved as live set settings If you want to keep these settings press the WRITE button to save them in the live set 35 Parameter Value Explanation Pitch Bend Modulation Lever Knob While holding down a key moving the lever to the left will lower the pitch and moving it to the right will raise the pitch This is called pitch RESONANCE knob Boosts the sound in the vicinity of the cutoff frequency adding a distinctive character to the sound Resonance 64 Offset 63 Turning the knob toward the right will strengthen this character and turning the knob toward the left will weaken it Gn The Cutoff and Resonance effects apply only to the Synthesizer They do not affect the sound of the Digital Recorder or the USB Memory Song Player Adding Reverberation REVERB Knob You can add reverb reverberation to the sounds that you play from the synthesizer Pushing the lever away from
301. roduce sound place your hand above the D Beam controller and move it slowly up and down To turn off the D Beam controller once again press the button you pressed in step 1 it will go out Gn When you turn on the power the D Beam controller will be off The usable range of the D Beam controller The following diagram shows the usable range of the D Beam controller Waving your hand outside this range will produce no effect SOLO SYNTH EXPRESSION Operates the function assigned to the D Beam The usable range of the D Beam controller will become extremely small when used under strong direct sunlight If it does not function as you expect adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location Beam Sens p 83 D Beam Controller Settings to assign N Use the cursor V buttons to select a parameter 3 Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired value For details on the parameters and values that you can assign refer to System Menu 5 D BEAM p 83 4 If you want to keep your settings press the 6 WRITE button Setting for the D Beam controller are saved for system settings You can use the function buttons shown below the screen move to other setting screens of the D Beam controller 5 Press the EXIT button a number of times to return to the previous screen 28 Hold down the SHIF
302. rough the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Output Level Balance D Explanation Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Volume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Output Level 73 spunos suoIpuny WOJd 197159 3yj3 bunip3 gt M ua oO gt Q Japsoray 950 xipuaddy 76 FLANGER DELAY Balance D Lin R in Balance D Parameter Value Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 msec Flanger Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Flanger Depth 0 127 Flanger Feedback 98 98 Flanger Balance Delay Time Delay Feedback Delay HF Damp Delay Balance Level 74 D100 0W D0 100W 0 2600 msec note 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS D100 0W DO0 10
303. rpeggio By using the following procedure you can produce arpeggios even without continuing to press the keyboard 1 Press the ARPEGGIO button so it s lit The ARPEGGIO STYLE screen will appear 2 Press the 1 HOLD button to add a check mark v 3 Playa chord on the keyboard 4 If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is being held the arpeggio will change accordingly 5 To cancel Arpeggio Hold press the 1 HOLD button once again When Using a Hold Pedal i you play an arpeggio while pressing hold d pedal p 3 30 die arpeggio will continue to be played even if you release the chord 1 Connect an optional pedal switch DP series etc to the PEDAL HOLD jack 2 Press the ARPEGGIO button to turn on the arpeggio 3 Playa chord while pressing the hold pedal 4 If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is being held the arpeggio will change accordingly 32 Determining the Tempo for Arpeggio Performances This sets the arpeggio tempo 1 Press the TEMPO button The TEMPO window will open Keyboard Tempo Recorder Temra 127 TAF B CLOSE 2 Use either of the following methods to set the tempo e Press the 4 TAP button three or more times at the desired tempo The tempo will be set to the interval at which you pressed the button e Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to change the desired value About tem po MEN The JUNO
304. rus General purpose effects 3 Pedal Knob D Beam NRPN LSB MSB RPN LSB MSB MIDI controller 1 31 33 95 98 99 100 101 1 31 33 127 OeslOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOQOOQOOOOOOOOOQOOOQ Ol o X oooooocooooooooooooOoOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 1 Program Change True Number NO N Program No 1 128 System Exclusive UJ Song Position Song Select Tune Request System Clock Real Time Commands All Sound Off Reset All Controllers Aux Local On Off Messages All Notes Off Active Sensing System Reset 123 127 AXOO xXOO 1 is selectable Notes 2 Recognized as M 1 even if M1 3 Transmitted only when Transmitted Edit Data is ON or is received Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No Index A 82 MASTERING eurer EE En 94 CUITENE s cess ther d ions 87 MASTERING mode 118 2 1 Cursor BUTTONS 18 d ies MEME a iid mastering tool kit 105 118 AC S 1 13 CHE 84 knob 29 mastering tool kit parameters 120 42 Cutoff Frequency 40 HOLD oeda Master Key Shift 80 EnV Levels Iag CHOFE keyfollow sse 40 Hold Pedal Polarity el 80 AcEnv Levels S 42 CUTOFF 29 MA
305. s This is a sound suited to blues This is a crunch sound with wild distortion This is a crunch sound with high gain This models the drive sound of a VOX AC 30TB This is a sound that it suited to sixties style British rock This models the lead sound of the VOX AC 30TB This models the clean sound of the VOX AC 30TB This models the sound produced using the left input on a Matchless D C 30 a modern tube amp widely used in styles from blues to rock This models the sound of a Matchless modified for high gain This models the sound produced using the right input on a Matchless D C 30 This models the lead sound of the MESA Boogie combo amp a tube amp that was very popular in the late 705 and 805 This models a MESA Boogie with TREBLE SHIFT SW on This models the rhythm channel of a MESA Boogie combo amp This models the sound produced using Input on a Marshall 1959 Super Lead amp This is a trebly sound suited to hard rock The sound of connecting Inputs and II of the Marshall 1959 amp in parallel creating a sound with a stronger low end than This models the sound of a Marshall modified with a midrange boost This is a Marshall sound that s been tweaked for a metal sound Models the sound of the Channel 2 VINTAGE Mode on the MESA Boogie DUAL Rectifier Models the sound of the Channel 2 MODERN Mode on the MESA Boogie DUAL Rectifier Models the sound of the Channel 1 CLEAN Mode on the MESA Boo
306. s 35 OVERDRIVE p 61 36 DISTORTION p 61 37 VS OVERDRIVE p 61 38 VS DISTORTION p 61 39 GUITAR AMP SIMULATOR p 62 40 COMPRESSOR p 62 41 LIMITER p 63 42 GATE p 63 DELAY 13 types 43 DELAY 63 44 LONG DELAY p 64 45 SERIAL DELAY p 64 48 About Note Some effect parameters such as Rate or Delay Time be set in terms of a note value Such parameters have a num note switch that lets you specify whether you will set the value as a numerical value or as a note value If you want to set Rate Delay Time as a numerical value set the num note switch to Hz msec If you want to set it as a note value set the num note switch to NOTE num note switch l 05 AUTO HAH M Peak Sanz Se Polarity Lr x OST If the Rate is specified as a note value the modulation will be synchronized with the keyboard tempo note Sixty fourth Thirty second Thirty second 3 triplet note 3 note triplet note Sixteenth note Dotted thirty A Sixteenth note Eighth note triplet e second note 3 triplet e note triplet note note Whole note J Dotted half note Whole note Double note triplet triplet gt Dotted whole m Double note note f a parameter whose num note switch is set to NOTE is specified as a destination for multi effect control you will not be able to us
307. s MIDI controller mode settings System settings Completed Turn the Power off and on again 3 Turn the power of the JUNO Gi off then on again Following digital recorder settings e Insert effects user patches e Mastering tool kit user patches e User rhythm patterns 78 Formatting USB Memory USB Memory Format You can initialize format USB memory If the USB memory contains important data that you ve created be aware that all of this data will be lost when you execute this operation In the UTILITY MENU screen use the cursor buttons to select USB Mem Format and press the ENTER button A confirmation message will appear a 1 ee EI E Message from JUN isi are You sure All the data on the USE Memory will be 1051 Press CESECI EXEC CAMCEL To execute the format operation press the 5 EXEC button To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button Formatting SD Card SD Card Format 1 You can initialize format SD card e Do not format the SD card that is included with the JUNO Gi Formatting the SD card included with the JUNO Gi will erase all of the demo song data on the card Back up to your computer before you format Formatting will erase all of the data If the SD card contains important data you should first back it up as described in Backing up SD card data to your computer In the UTILITY MENU screen use the cursor buttons to select SD Card Form
308. s such as ballpoint pens necklaces hairpins etc Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with whatever regulations for their safe disposal that may be observed in the region in which you live Keep any screws the SD card or the SD card protector you may remove and the included USB memory protector in a safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally Always turn the phantom power off when connecting any device other than condenser microphones that require phantom power You risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply phantom power to dynamic microphones audio playback devices or other devices that don t require such power Be sure to check the specifications of any microphone you intend to use by referring to the manual that came with it This instrument s phantom power 48 V DC 10 mA Max eeooo e o o A 147 spunos gt suonmpunj 110494 1 ZIS Y U z gt Ua ES FEY CP 950 xipuaddy IMPORTANT NOTES P P ower Supply Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter such as a refrigerator washing machine microwave oven or air conditioner or that contains a motor Depending on the way in which t
309. s will require longer times Volume of the low frequency rotor Settings of the high frequency rotor The parameters are the same as for the low frequency rotor Spatial dispersion of the sound Output Level This effect features the same specifications as the VK 7 s built in rotary speaker L in Hin Parameter Speed Brake Woofer Slow Speed Woofer Fast Speed Woofer Trans Up 56 Value 2 Band EQ 2 Band EQ L out H out Explanation Rotational speed of the rotating speaker SLOW FAST OFF ON 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 Slow Fast Switches the rotation of the rotary speaker When this is turned on the rotation will gradually stop When it is turned off the rotation will gradually resume Low speed rotation speed of the woofer High speed rotation speed of the woofer Adjusts the rate at which the woofer rotation speeds up when the rotation is switched from SLOW to FAST Parameter Woofer Trans Down Woofer Level Tweeter Slow Speed Tweeter Fast Speed Tweeter Trans Up Tweeter Trans Down Tweeter Level Spread Low Gain High Gain Level 23 CHORUS Value 0 127 0 127 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 0 127 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 127 Explanation Adjusts the rate at which the woofer rotation speeds up when the rotation is switched from FAST to SLOW Volume of the woofer Settings of the tweeter The p
310. s data Adjust the INPUT LEVEL knob Adjust the Level value Turn on the AUDIO INPUT SELECT setting Remove protection from the song Check the SD card Check the SD card Use an SD card that has enough free space remaining Delete unneeded songs p 103 Increase the amount of free space on the SD card by executing the Song Optimize function which deletes unneeded data from the SD card p 104 Check the mode Adjust the level until it is as high as you can get it without causing the PEAK indicator to light red If you hear noise or distortion after bouncing the track output levels were too high Data on the SD card was damaged Can t back up to SD card 142 If data on the SD card is damaged the following reasons are possible Could you have turned off the power while the recorder was operating Could a strong physical shock have been applied to the SD card Could the power have been turned off while accessing the SD card While using the system on batteries could it have been subject to a physical shock such as being dropped A strong physical shock may break the contact between batteries causing the power to turn off Could you have formatted the card on a computer or digital camera Could the SD card be write protected Is there sufficient free space on the SD card Check the format of the SD card The JUNO Gi can use SD cards that are formatted in FAT format Re format the SD c
311. s will be spaced evenly As the value is increased the note timing will have more of a dotted shuffle feel This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms With a setting of 50 the notes will be spaced evenly As the value is increased the note timing will have more of a dotted shuffle feel Parameter Value Explanation Specifies the layer played by the arpeggio The Upper and Lower layers will be played by the arpeggio BOTH Destination If Split is on the Upper layer will be played by the arpeggio LOWER The Lower layer will be played by the arpeggio UPPER The Upper layer will be played by the arpeggio Saving Arpeggio Settings WRITE The arpeggio settings including ON OFF setting are saved as live set settings If you want to keep these settings press the WRITE button to save them in the live set p 35 p A 5 t 5 Importing SMF on Your Computer to an Arpeggio Style You can create your own original Arpeggio Style USER 01 64 by importing SMF on your computer Gn You ll need a commercially available SD card reader in order to perform this procedure 197159 3jj3 bunip3 1 Using your computer and a commercially available SD card reader copy your Standard MIDI File MID into the SD card s IROLAND IMPORT folder 2 Insert the SD card into the JUNO Gi and switc
312. sages from an external device but will use its own keyboard tempo If this is ON the JUNO Gi will transmit MIDI clock to an external MIDI device This cannot be set if USB Song Sync Mode is SLAVE REMOTE MIDI Clock OFF ON If this is ON switching live sets will make the keyboard tempo change to the LiveSet Tempo p 38 specified for that live set LiveSet Tempo Switch oe If this is ON the keyboard tempo will match the recorder tempo This is convenient when you want to play arpeggios in time with the tempo of the recorder s song p 32 Tempo Link OFF ON The JUNO Gi s Digital Recorder cannot synchronize to an external MIDI device If the Tempo Link is on the JUNO Gi cannot synchronize to an external MIDI device p 134 System Menu 4 CLICK PLAYER 1 CLICKOUT Parameter Explanation Output from the SONG CLICK OUT jack When the USB Memory Song Player is playing back a click tone at the tempo of the USB CLICK memory song will be output from the SONG CLICK OUT jack it will not be output from the OUTPUT L R jacks Song Click The sound from the Digital Recorder will be RECORDER output from the SONG CLICK OUT jack it will not be output from the OUTPUT L R jacks The sound from the USB Song Player and USB USB SONG audio of your computer will be output from the SONG CLICK OUT jack it will not be output from the OUTPUT L R jacks Click Level 0 10 Volume of the cl
313. sc 1 Osc 2 Coarse Tune Osc 2 Fine Tune Osc 2 Level 0 127 Level of the OSC2 Turning this switch on produces a complex sound with many harmonics This is effective See OFERON when the OSC1 pitch is higher than the OSC2 pitch spunos gt 197159 r D D 5 Q Japsoray 23161 1293 FEY CIP Kiowa gSA xipuaddy Parameter Explanation Type of filter OFF No filter is used LPF This reduces the volume of all frequencies above the cutoff frequency Cutoff ilter BPF This leaves only the frequencies in the region of Filter Type side Pass the cutoff frequency and cuts the rest ilter HPF This cuts the frequencies in the region below High Pass the cutoff frequency Filter PKG This emphasizes the frequencies in the region of Peaking the cutoff frequency Filter Cutoff 0 127 Frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on the waveform s frequency components Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the Resonance 0 127 region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound LFO Rate 0 127 Modulation speed of the LFO LFO Osc 1 Pitch Depth to which the LFO will modulate the Osc 63 63 Depth 1 pitch LFO Osc 2 Pitch Depth to which the LFO will modulate the Osc 63 63 Depth 2 pitch Depth to which the LFO will modulate the pulse LFO Osc 1 Pulse width of the Osc 1
314. sea Target Track 172 00 00 00 66 6 ERE EFFECTS LAHYTHH EFFECT THPUT RHYTHH eR LIBE SETI Example If you want to bounce record to V track 2 of tracks 1 and 2 you would specify Target Track 1 2 and V Track 2 e To bounce in stereo choose Target Track 1 2 7 8 e To bounce in monaural choose Target Track 1 8 e If the V track contains data symbol is shown beside the V track column 1231567 Liki TAE FHYIHM EFFEGI 3 Play back the song and use the MASTER slider to adjust the master level Raise the volume level until it is as high as you can get it without causing the level meter to reach the maximum the point at which distortion would occur EELORELDErR J P Us ctp EN rack 1 2 tT 00 89 2 IHPUT RHYTHH 4 Press the 19 Song Top button to move to the beginning of the song 5 Press the REC button and then the PLAY button bounce recording will begin 6 When you ve finished recording press the STOP button You can apply reverb 117 or the insert effects 106 during bounce recording If you want to use the insert effects on a specific track refer to Changing the Location of the Insert Effects LOCATION p 108 Listening the Result of the B
315. sec note NORMAL INVERSE 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS L64 63R 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 45 SERIAL DELAY This delay connects two delay units in series Feedback can be applied independently to each delay unit allowing you to produce complex delay sounds Lin Feedback 1 Parameter Delay 1 Time Delay 1 Feedback Delay 1 HF Damp Delay 2 Time Delay 2 Feedback Delay 2 HF Damp 64 Value 0 1300 msec note 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 0 1300 msec note 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS H out Explanation Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard Phase of the delay NORMAL non inverted INVERT inverted Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Frequency at which the high frequency content of the delayed sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Panning of the delay sound Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance of the original sound D and delay sound W Output Level Explanation Delay time from when sound is input to delay 1 until the delay sound is heard Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of delay 1 negative values invert the phase Frequency at which the high frequency content of the delayed sound of delay 1 will be cut BYPASS no cut Proportion of the delay soun
316. seful when you want to check the mix balance repeatedly or can be used in conjunction with punch in out to perform Loop Recording p 96 Specifying the A B Region 1 90 Move to the point where you want to begin repeating point and press the REPEAT A 4 gt B button The A B indication will blink in the display and that location will be registered as the starting point A of the repeated region Move to the point where you want to stop repeating point B and press the REPEAT A lt B button At this time the A lt P indication will light indicating that the A B region has been assigned When specifying the repeat end point B pressing the REPEAT A 4 gt B button point that is earlier than the repeat start point A will cause that point to be reassigned as the repeat start point A There must be at least one second between the repeat start point A and end point B You can t specify an end point that s less than one second away from the start point CED You can also set the A B region by pressing the REPEAT 4 B button while the song is playing Using the A B SETTING Screen To Specify the Repeat Region 3 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the REPEAT 4 B button A B SETTING screen will appear Current Time SETTING Current 1 1 A GEIF Si 955 B mas a1 aa Location of point A Location of point
317. set this parameter to a positive value E gt La 1 Ua ES E e Use this parameter when you want key release speed to affect the T4 value of the TVF envelope F Env T4 V Sens 63 63 If you want T4 to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive a value ES Resonance m LPF BPF HPF PKG Level High TVF Envelope i e Cutoff frequency T1 T2 T3 4 5 D 1 2 f 52 5 P L Cutoff gt Frequency 10 Time L2 L3 A L4 a iN Note on Note off Low a D Cutoff Keyfollow Octave FEY CIP 45 xipuaddy 41 5 VA PARAMETER Parameter Value Explanation Curve that determines how keyboard playing dynamics velocity will affect the volume Set this to FIX if you don t want the volume of Level V Curve UU CLE Set this when you want the volume of the tone to change depending on keyboard playing dynamics Set this to a positive value to have the changes in tone volume increase the more forcefully the keys are played to make the tone play more softly as you play harder set this to a negative value Level V Sens 63 63 Bias Bias causes the volume to be affected by the keyboard position This is useful for changing volume through keyboard position pitch
318. shifted sound of the lower range that is to be mixed with the input The frequency range in which the effect is applied is fixed Adjusts the volume of the enhanced sound LIMITER Explanation Parameter On Off Threshold Attack Release Value OFF ON 24 0dB 0 100ms 50 5000ms Sets the limiter to ON or OFF Adjust this parameter to match the signal Limiting will be applied to input levels in excess of this level This sets the time it takes for the limiter to go into effect once the input level exceeds the threshold level Adjusts the time until when the limiter will turn off after the input level falls below the threshold level Using Reverb Effect Here we will explain how to edit the reverb settings parameters Selecting the Reverb Effect 1 Inthe RECORDER screen press the 6 EFFECT button The recorder s effects screen will appear 2 Pressthe 2 REVERB button The REVERB screen will appear ad TOP EU H E HALL 2 i Choosing the reverb type 3 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Type field and use the VALUE dial or DEC INC buttons to choose the type Editing the reverb settings 4 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter that you want to edit and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to edit the value For details on the reverb parameters refer to Reverb Paramet
319. smit control change messages refer to Detailed Settings in MIDI Controller Mode 2 Toexit MIDI controller mode press the MIDI CTRL button to turn off the button s illumination The Digital Recorder D Beam controller 51 S2 buttons Arpeggio and Chord Memory will not operate when you re in MIDI controller mode About MIDI Specifying the Transmit Channel Set the JUNO Gi s transmit channel so it matches the channel your external MIDI device is using for reception In the MIDI CONTROLLER screen use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the MIDI Ch value Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the value Value Gn For details on how to set the receive channel of your external MIDI device refer to its owner s manual Detailed Settings in MIDI Controller Mode 1 2 3 In the MIDI CONTROLLER screen use the cursor buttons to select the parameter that you want to edit Use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the value Parameter Local Sw MIDI Ch Button PC MSB LSB Controller MIDI Message Value OFF ON 1 16 0 9 1 128 0 127 OFF 0 127 OFF RHYTHM SLIDER TRACK 1 4 SLIDER MASTER SLIDER SONG TOP SWITCH BWD SWITCH FWD SWITCH STOP SWITCH PLAY SWITCH REC SWITCH RHYTHM SWITCH TRACK 1 4 SWITCH 1 4 5 8 SWITCH KNOB 1 6 1 31 CC33 127 PITCH BEND AFTER TOUCH Explanation Specifies whe
320. soray 23161 2343 u1 d 1 Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Repeatedly Recording the Same Region Loop Recording 1 3 96 Loop recording is when you use the Repeat function and the Auto Punch In Out function together to record repeatedly If you record on the A B region during the first pass of the loop that recorded content will play back on the second and subsequent passes of the loop allowing you to check the content that was recorded Repeat Recorded in first pass played back in subsequent passes EMA B Time If you re not satisfied with the recorded content you can press the 8 REC button and re record from the beginning A of the next pass While the loop plays back after has been recorded you can select a different track hold down the SHIFT button and press a TRACK button while loop playback continues this lets you record smoothly on other tracks without having to stop the song Specify the locations A B region at which you want to auto punch in out and loop as described in steps 1 2 of Specifying the A B Region p 90 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the REPEAT lt B button The A B SETTING screen will appear Press the 3 R amp A1 or 4 R amp A2 button Button Explanation The region you specified A B will be assigned as the auto punch in out region The A B region will be
321. sound D and the effect sound W Output Level 57 LOFI COMPRESS This is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound quality for creative purposes L in Compressor in 4 Compressor Parameter Pre Filter Type LoFi Type Post Filter Type Post Filter Cutoff Low Gain High Gain Balance Level 58 LOFI RADIO In addition to a Lo Fi effect this effect also generates radio noise Lo Fi Value 2 Band ROM 2 Band R did Explanation Selects the type of filter applied to the sound before it passes through the Lo Fi effect 1 2 6 1 9 Type of filter OFF LPF HPF 200 8000 Hz 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Compressor off Compressor on Degrades the sound quality The sound quality grows poorer as this value is increased No filter is used Cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Basic frequency of the Post Filter Gain of the low range Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct sound D and the effect sound W Output Level Parameter LoFi Type Post Filter Type Post Filter Cutoff Radio Detune Radio Noise Level Low Gain High Gain Balance Value 1 9 Type of filter OFF LPF HPF 200 8000 Hz 0 127 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W Explanation Degrades the sound quality The sound quality grows poorer as t
322. stments to the keyboard sensitivity following the Velo Curve selection Higher settings for this value will increase the velocity value that is transmitted according to your playing strength Explanation Function of the pedal connected to the PEDAL CONTROL jack CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 The pitch will rise in semitone steps maximum 4 octaves each time you press the pedal The pitch will fall in semitone steps maximum 4 octaves each time you press the pedal Aftertouch Each pedal press raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher Each pedal press lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower The USB memory song player will start stop The digital recorder will start stop The same operation as the Digital Recorder s REC button Tap tempo a keyboard tempo specified by the interval at which you press the pedal Select the next numbered live set Select the previous numbered live set The favorite of the next number or bank will be selected The favorite of the previous number or bank will be selected Arpeggio Rhythm Pattern function on off Chord memory function on off Controlsthevolumeoftheinserteffect p 106 When WAH p 113 is selected and Mode is set to MANUAL the pedal will control the wah WhenROTARY p 114 isselected thepedal will switch the speaker s rotation speed Speed Select Selects the polarity of the pedal con
323. t HD OMM UE f What are Layers and Tones Each Live Set has four Layers Upper 1 2 Lower 1 2 and a Tone is assigned to each of these Layers A tone is the lowest level unit of sound you can t play a tone by itself Layer Upper 1 Layer Upper 2 Layer Lower 1 Layer Lower 2 Tone HI Digital Recorder SOUND MODIFY What is a Split A Split is a setting in which you can play different tones with your left and right hands When you turn Split on your left hand will play the tones of the lower layer and your right hand will play the tones of the upper layer Saving a Live Set If you ve created a live set and then select a different live set without saving the one you created your changes will be lost After creating a live set you must save it as a User Live Set so that it can be used again later For details on saving refer to Saving a Live Set WRITE p 35 What is a Special Live Set A Special Live Set is a particularly rich sounding live set that uses layers to take full advantage of the JUNO Gi s functionality About the Digital Recorder About the Recorder Tempo The JUNO Gi s digital recorder lets you record the JUNO Gi s The JUNO Gi uses two types of tempo the keyboard tempo and the performance a
324. t p 35 2 Press the MENU button 3 Use the VALUE dial or cursor buttons to select 1 Live Set 5 You can turn each layer on off by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the 1 4 buttons Edit and then press the ENTER button puso EAs SHIFT 1 U1 U 1 On Off The LIVE SET EDIT screen will appear sac id SHIFT 2 U2 Upper 2 On Off Layer U indicates Upper L indicates Lower SHIFT 3 L1 Lower 1 On Off Tone Humber SHIFT 4 L2 Lower 2 On Off Humber Tone 2ST 4 1 cokear ancd 1 PHO Uz Tone 641 eokeus arand 1 PHO Li To cB 2tri Aa STE nte ri nga LE 198 Mood Strings STR 6 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter that you want to edit and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to change the value Use the cursor gt buttons to scroll the LIVE SET EDIT screen to left or right If the screen shown in the illustration does not appear When you fin ished edi iting continue pressing the cursor button until the screen appears v 22 243 a 7 When you ve finished editing press the EXIT busto Moving within the LIVE SET EDIT screen NEM You will return to the LIVE SET PLAY screen 4 Usethe filono buftons to move within ie LIVE SET EDIT Button Explanation pes return to e LIVE SET PLAY s screen saving your Hx s M
325. t DELAY with the exception of the following two Lin Hin Overdrive Drive Distortion Drive O Balance D LJ i CY Balance W Feedback Overdrive Pan gt Distortion Pan Lin L out Balance W R in R out Balance D 72 ENHANCER CHORUS L in Parameter Enhancer Sens Enhancer Chorus Pre Delay Chorus Rate Chorus Depth Chorus Balance Level L in Parameter Enhancer Sens Enhancer Mix Flanger Pre Delay Flanger Rate Flanger Depth Flanger Feedback Flanger Balance Level 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Value 0 127 0 127 0 0 100 msec 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 98 98 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Balance D Balance D L out H out Explanation Sensitivity of the enhancer Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the chorus W and the sound that is not sent through the chorus D Output Level 73 ENHANCER FLANGER Balance D L out H out Explanation Sensitivity of the enhancer Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Frequen
326. t Level Mater 2 Selecting the Sound of the Synthesizer i KEYBOARD 2 Press the 1 GUITAR 5 USB AUDIO button to select the input source 8 lt 1 If you want to record your Synthesizer performance press Button Explanation 2 the KEYBOARD button so it s lit Sound of a guitar or bass connected to the GUITAR 1 GUITAR The KEYBOARD INPUT window will appear MIC jack E Sound of a microphone connected to the GUITAR MIC KEYTBORRD INPUT 2 MIC jack E INP ME Level 3 LINE Sound of the device connected to the LINE IN jack A 4 USB SONG Sound of the USB Memory Song Player uH Sound of the USB audio from the computer connected IHPLT 5 USB AUDIO to the USB COMPUTER connector 2 Input Level Mater When you press a button the input corresponding to the button you pressed will be switched on 2 Press 2 KEYBOARD to record just the synthesizer m i b T T a performance or press 4 KEYBOARD INS FX to record the synthesizer performance with the insert effect applied to it Multiple buttons cannot be on at the same time x ETE If you re not recording anything turn off all of the inputs in order to 5 minimize the noise from the input jacks 2 KEYBOARD Synthesizer performance recorded D 3 Setthe input level reverb Use the cursor buttons to lt FX Synthesizer performance and insert effect
327. t in poor insulation and lead to fire Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit Before moving the unit disconnect the AC adaptor and all cords coming from external devices Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet p 16 Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet If used improperly batteries may explode or leak and cause damage or injury In the interest of safety please read and observe the following precautions p 14 e Carefully follow the installation instructions for batteries and make sure you observe the correct polarity Avoid using new batteries together with used ones In addition avoid mixing different types of batteries from the battery compartment Then install new batteries To avoid inflammation of the skin make sure that none of the battery discharge gets onto your hands or skin Exercise the utmost caution so that none of the discharge gets near your eyes Immediately rinse the affected area with running water if any of the discharge has entered the eyes Never keep batteries together with metallic object
328. t s suppose that you re performing punch in recording and have recorded twice over the same region You could then execute Undo to cancel the second recording and revert to the first recording After you ve executed Undo you could execute Redo if you wanted to cancel the Undo and revert to the state following your second recording After executing Undo you ll only be able to execute Redo If after executing Undo you then record or execute a track editing operation you will no longer be able to execute Redo Undo applies only to the audio data recorded on the tracks Parameters such as track settings rhythm settings and effect settings cannot be restored to their original state If you execute Song Optimize p 104 the operating history for all data will be cleared This means that you won t be able to execute Undo immediately after executing Song Optimize Reverting to the Previous State Undo Press the UNDO REDO button If you want to execute Undo press the 6 EXEC button If you decide not to execute Undo press the EXIT button When you execute Undo the display will indicate Undo Completed and the most recently executed recording or editing operation will be cancelled Canceling the Undo Redo You can execute Redo if you decide to cancel the Undo operation you just executed Press the UNDO REDO button If you want to execute Redo press the 6 EXEC button If you decide not to execute Redo p
329. tal Recorder 2 Effects spunos gt suonpunj 1 ZIS Y U 3jj3 bunip3 b 5 Q Japsoray 12913 1 Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Digital Recorder 3 Rhythm Pattern Playing a Rhythm 121 About Patterns and 121 Turning the Rhythm Pattern 121 Editing the Pan Reverb and EQ of the Rhythm Pattern 121 Displaying the RHYTHM PATTERN 122 About the RHYTHM PATTERN screen 122 Setting the Recorder Tempo 122 Switching between Pattern Mode and Arrangement Mode 122 Selecting a 122 Selecting Drum Sounds Rhythm 122 Placing Patterns to Create an Arrangement ARRANGE EDIT rh er aec we ace es 123 Displaying the ARRANGE EDIT screen 123 About the ARRANGE EDIT screen 123 SWITCHING Patterns 123 CLEAR ALL Clear All Steps 123 DEBETESIBIS cess secures tu te pq de Ns 123 INSERT STEP ceps anti CEU NOT EUR 123 WRITE Saving the Arrangement
330. tandby condition In recording standby mode one of the TRACK 1 5 4 8 buttons the track to record will blink red 3 Pressthe 1 5 4 8 button of the track you want to record Button Explanation When TRACK 1 4 5 8 is unlit 1 5 4 8 Select tracks 1 4 When TRACK 1 4 5 8 is lit 1 5 4 8 Even when you re not recording standby mode you can select the track to record by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing a TRACK 1 5 4 8 button Select tracks 5 8 94 Selecting stereo tracks for recording _ If INPUT is set to KEYBOARD LINE or USB Since the input is stereo this will normally be stereo recording using two tracks If you press the TRACK 1 or 2 button recording will take place in stereo on tracks 1 and 2 Similarly if you press the 3 or 4 button recording will take place in stereo on tracks 3 and 4 However if you want to mix the sound from the L channel and R channel of the input and record it on track 1 press the TRACK 1 button once again from the state in which tracks 1 and 2 are selected Track 1 will be selected as the recording destination You can use the same operation to specify a different track as the recording destination If INPUT is set to GUITAR or MIC If you want to record in stereo so that the insert effects will sound better you can simultaneously press the TRACK 1 and 2 buttons or 3 and 4 buttons to specify stereo recor
331. ten 2 REGIST button Changes the registration number If a favorite has already been registered at the move destination number the selected favorite will be inserted at the move destination Hold down SHIFT button and press button t take several seconds for the move to be carried out Selecting Tones LAYER SPLIT Each Live Set has four Layers Upper 1 2 Lower 1 2 and a Tone is assigned to each of these Layers A tone is the lowest level unit of La er On Off sound you can t play a tone by itself Each layer s on off setting is indicated as shown below v means on Layer Upper 1 Layer Upper 2 PEPPPTTTTTTELTTEEETTTTTTTTTTTTTTEITTTTTTITTTTIT 35 1 IIT Layer Lower 2 1 1 PRST Tone Strings 5 SE t6KeyGrand 1 103 Ton ILI 14 s 7 198 PRST Tone amp 1541 PRST Tone m Hood Strings 55 G amp KeyGrand 1 10 E 3 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor and use the VALUE dial or the DEC INC buttons to turn layer on off a The JUNO Gi has the following types of tones Cnm Tone Type You can turn each layer on off by holding down the SHIFT button These are instruments such as piano or strings All and pressing the 1 4 buttons suonpunj keys will play the sound of the same instrument BR T RHYTHM These
332. the 6 CANCEL button The Copy operation will be executed Once the copy has been completed Completed appears in the display If the message SD Card Full appears If this message appears before you copy data either the number of songs has exceeded 99 or the SD card has insufficient free space Use either of the following methods to increase the free space on the SD card e Execute Song Optimize p 104 e Execute Song Remove p 103 103 spunos gt suonpunj 1971594 3jj3 bunip3 ct gt Ma et ie 2 Jap10ray 1 sayy u1 d FEY CIP Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Song Protect Even after you ve finished the work of creating a song you could lose your song by accidentally recording over it or erasing it To prevent such accidents the Song Protect setting lets you protect a song so that it cannot be erased or modified If you ve protected a song the RECORDER screen will indicate PROTECT and the following operations will not be possible e Recording e Track editing Changing the song name Removing the song Song optimize Writing a song Writing or editing a rhythm arrangement Writing an effect song patch Writing a song rhythm pattern Choose Recorder Menu gt 1 Song Edit gt Song Protect p 98 The display will ask Protect Song Press the 5
333. the HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Left Level Right Level 0 127 Output level of the delay sound Center Level The optimal 3D effect will be achieved Output Mode SPEAKER When using speakers PHONES When using headphones Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W D0 100W direct sound D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 53 TIME CTRL DELAY A stereo delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly C 2 Band EQ L out Time Ctrl Delay T Pan L Feedback Feedback L in b Time Ctrl Delay y Q Ne Parameter Value Explanation R in Adjusts the time until the delay 0 1300 msec note is heard Delay Time Adjusts the speed which the Delay Time changes from the Acceleration nis setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Adjusts the amount of the delay that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you do not want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS to BYPASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain
334. the range to be affected Mid2 Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency of the middle range 2 Mid2 Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range 2 Width of the middle range 2 Mid2 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be affected High Freq 2000 4000 8000 Hz Frequency of the high range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level 02 SPECTRUM This is a stereo spectrum Spectrum is a type of filter which modifies the timbre by boosting or cutting the level at specific frequencies L in Hin Parameter Band1 250 Hz Band2 500 Hz Band3 1000 Hz Band4 1250 Hz Band5 2000 Hz Band6 3150 Hz Band7 4000 Hz Band8 8000 Hz Q Level 50 Spectrum Value 15 15 dB 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 0 127 L out H out Explanation Gain of each frequency band Simultaneously adjusts the width of the adjusted ranges for all the frequency bands Output Level 03 ISOLATOR This is an equalizer which cuts the volume greatly allowing you to add a special effect to the sound by cutting the volume in varying ranges Parameter Value Explanation Boost Cut Low These boost and cut each of the High Middle and Low frequency ranges Boost Cut Mid 60 4 dB At 60 dB the sound becomes inaudible 0 dB is equivalent to Boost Cut High the input level of the sound Turns the Anti Phase function on and off for the Low frequency ra
335. ther MIDI messages will be sent to the JUNO Gi s own internal sound generator when you operate the JUNO Gi When Local Sw is ON the volume will be the value specified by SMF Level p 83 Specifies the channel on which MIDI messages will be transmitted Selects the number of the button for which you ll assign an MSB LSB and PC Program Change number that is transmitted MSB that is transmitted If this is OFF LSB will also be turned OFF LSB that is transmitted OFF will be automatically selected if MSB is OFF Selects the controller for which the setting is to be changed Specifies the MIDI message assignment for the controller To save your settings press the WRITE button 133 spunos gt suonpunj 1971594 3jj3 bunip3 ct gt i 4 3 3 14 2 Japsoray 23161 1293 1 xipuaddy Playing the JUNO Gi from an External MIDI Device Synchronizing with an External MIDI Device Connection example MIDI keyboard EE MIDI OUT connector MIDI IN connector Setting the Receive Channel You ll need to match your external MIDI device s transmit channel with the JUNO Gi s receive channel 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the VALUE dial or the cursor button to select 4 System and press the ENTER button 3
336. thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and Data 1 Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up on an SD card or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data 48 Using SD cards USB memories Carefully insert the SD cards or USB memories all the way in until it is firmly in place Never touch the terminals of the SD cards or USB memories Also avoid getting the terminals dirty The SD cards or USB memories are constructed using precision components handle the cards carefully paying particular note to the following To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity be sure to discharge any static electricity from your own body before handling the cards Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the contact portion of the cards Do not bend drop or subject cards to strong shock or vibration Do not keep cards in direct sunlight in closed vehicles or other such locations e Do not allow car
337. tion of your hand above the D Beam controller is lower than this value Upper limit of the range of the D Beam controller The effect will be applied when the position of your hand above the D Beam controller is above this value By setting Range Max below Range Min you can invert the range of change System Menu 6 INFORMATION Here you can view the JUNO Gi s software version amp USB MEMORY SONG PLAYER ASSIGNABLE 51 52 SONG PLAYER OO SONG PLAY LIST STOP Digital Recorder use RECORDER POWER COMPUTER BACKUP KEYBOARD MIDI CTRL CHORD ARPEGGIO MEMORY SOLO TEMPO SYNTH EXPRESSION TRANS OCTAVE ASSIGNABLE POSE DOWN UP SONG OUTPUT LcD CLICKOUT PHONES Lj CONTRAST Mibi AUDIO INPUT LEVEL PEDAL HOLD CONTROL w Sur PHANTOM GUITAR MIC NUMERIC DEC INC O00 FAVORITE ON OFF BANK piano KEYBOARD Bass CJ CJ 000 GUITAR STRINGS BRASS VOCAL PLUCKED ORCHESTRA WIND CHOIR PAD SHIFT EXIT ENTER OOO LIST UNE TEVEL DIGITAL RECORDER RECORDER VIEW REC SOURCE SELECT AUDIO PEAK UNDO hebo KEYBOARD INPUT j gt gt REPEAT OOO0g SOUND MODIFY
338. to be played as a backing phrase This is especially effective when applied to sustain type sounds Lin L out Value 0 127 Parameter Step 01 16 Explanation Level at each step Rate at which the 16 step Rate sequence will cycle 0 05 10 00 Hz note Speed at which the level changes Attack between steps 0 127 Specifies whether an input note will cause the sequence to resume from the first step of the sequence ON or not OFF Input Sync Sw OFF ON Volume at which an input note d will be detected Input Sync Threshold Sets the manner in which the volume changes as one step progresses to the next The change in volume from one step s level to the next remains unaltered If the level of a following step is the same as the one preceding it there is no change in volume LEGATO Mode The level is momentarily set to 0 before progressing to the level of the next step This change in volume occurs even if the level of the following step is the same as the preceding step SLASH Timing of volume changes in levels for even numbered steps Shuffle 0 127 step 2 step 4 step 6 The higher the value the later the beat progresses Level 0 127 Gn You can use multi effect control to make the step sequence play again from the beginning p 46 Output level 55 spunos gt suonpunj 197159 gt Ua
339. to select the desired value Parameter Style Variation Motif Velocity Oct Range Accent Shuffle Rate Shuffle Resolution Value P001 P128 0001 0064 Explanation Specifies the basic way in which the arpeggio will be played You can create your own original Arpeggio Style by importing SMF or phrase data into an arpeggio user style For details refer to Importing SMF on Your Computer to an Arpeggio Style p 33 The arpeggiator provides several variations performance patterns for each arpeggio style This parameter selects the variation number The number of variations will differ according to the arpeggio style Sets the order in which notes of the chord will sound UP DOWN UP amp DOWN RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO CHORD AUTO1 AUTO2 PHRASE REAL 1 127 0 100 0 100 416 48 Notes you press will be sounded beginning from low to high Notes you press will be sounded from high to low Notes you press will be sounded from low to high and then back down from high to low Notes you press will be sounded in random order Notes you press will be sounded in the order in which you pressed them By pressing the notes in the appropriate order you can produce melody lines Up to 128 notes will be remembered Each chromatic step between the highest and lowest notes you press will sound in succession repeating upward and downward Press only the low
340. trol Pedal Assign 81 GN2 ide 128 36 Control Pedal Polarity coping nic 35 92 PAN Great NEW SONG 91 GUITAR MIC Jack brani 92 MainChannel 82 PATTERN EDIT screen 124 92 30 PEDA 81 P Env 40 P Env 0 40 P Env 1 40 P Env Level 40 P Env Level3 5 40 P Env 4 40 T1 lt 39 4 V SenS 40 P Env 1 A 40 P Env Time2 40 Time3 0 40 P Env Time4 R 40 P Env 39 92 phantom power 92 Phase 38 114 PHONES JACK c 13 PICH T 36 pitch 29 Pitch Bend Range 36 Pitch 43 PITCH 39 83 PLAY STOP button 129
341. tton All user data will be rewritten when you execute the User Restore operation If the JUNO Gi contains important data that you want to keep you must save it to a separate SD card device before you execute Y User Restore User Backup USE Format 1 Inthe UTILITY MENU screen use the cursor buttons to select TE m Card Format User Restore and press the ENTER button The following screen will appear The UTILITY MENU screen will appear Factory Reset BrT EI Mom at Item Explanation Message from 051 i eztore all user data on the SD Card User Backup Backs up user data to an SD card User areas are Sure press ESEC Returns backed up data from an SD card into the JUNO Gi Restore Returns all of the JUNO Gi s settings to their User Restore Factory Reset factory set state 2 Press the 5 EXEC button USB Mem Format Formats initializes the USB memory To cancel press the 6 CANCEL button SD Card Format Formats initializes the SD card When the restore operation has been completed the following screen will appear 3 Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select the item and press the ENTER button Completed Turn the Power off and on again 3 Turn the power of the JUNO Gi off then on again Backing Up JUNO Gi Settings to SD Card User Backup Here s how to back up user data to SD card 1 IntheUTI
342. u 4 For details on how to enter a name refer to Assigning a Name p 19 12 When you ve finished assigning a name press the 6 EXEC IHPUT 7234 56 7TH Lek PUDE E display will ask Export OK Example If you want to use V track 2 of tracks 1 and 2 you would specify Target Track 1 2 and V Track 2 13 If you want to execute press the 5 EXEC button If you want to cancel this operation press the 6 CANCEL button If the V track contains data a symbol is shown beside the V track field The mastering data will be exported to the audio file The exported audio file will be saved in the ROLAND EXPORT folder on the SD 3 Inthe RECORDER screen press the 6 EFFECT button card The mastering tool kit selection screen will appear Exported audio files Exported audio files will be in the following format WAV format e 44 1 kHz sampling frequency e 16 bit 118 GE Saving the Mastering Tool Kit Settings You can audition an exported WAV file in the TRACK IMPORT screen p 101 by pressing the 5 PREVIEW button WRITE e With the Export function a maximum of approximately 6 hours and 40 minutes worth of monaural data approximately 3 hours and 20 Here s how you can assign a name patch name to the kit settings minutes worth of stereo data can be output you ve edited and save them as a new patch 1 Inthe MAST
343. u specify the start time A and will display when you Displayed when a song is protected This is displayed when Auto Punch In Out has been This is displayed when the insert effect p 106 is on Page p 94 p 98 p 89 p 122 p 106 Playing a Song Selecting and Playing a Song Changing the Current Position You can use any of the following methods to change the current position within the song Song Select When the JUNO Gi is shipped from the factory an SD card containing demo songs are installed Here s how to play these demo songs IT REC SOURCE SELECT Inthe RECORDER screen press the 3 MENU button m PEAK 2 Usethe VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select 1 Song Edit and press the ENTER button The SONG EDIT MENU will appear 3 Usethecursor A V buttons to select Song Select and press the ENTER button The SONG SELECT screen will appear 4 Use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to select the song je 5 Press the 6 SELECT button h EXEC b Operation Explanation ESS UNES Fast forward The song will fast forward while you hold down 7 Press the PLAY button the gt gt button The song will begin playing RECORDER VIEW Rewind Move to the beginning of the song The song will rewind while you hold down the 4 4 button Press the 1 button REC SOURCE SELECT PEAK Move to the end of the Hold
344. ue 0 100 BPM 0 100 0 100 When set to BPM Explanation This parameter adjusts the SPEED SELECT of rotation when set SLOW This parameter adjusts the SPEED SELECT of rotation when set to FAST This sets the richness of the effect This parameter changes the simulated speaker s rotating speed If you set Control Pedal Assign 81 to INSERT FX CTRL you can use an expression pedal or a foot switch to change SLOW FAST of the speaker s rotating speed Explanation This sets the speed of the effect This sets the richness of the effect This sets the volume level of the effect Explanation This sets the speed of the effect This sets the richness of the effect Adjusts the sound character of the volume level changes imparted with the pan effect When set to BPM the value of the RATE parameter is set according to the value of the Recorder Tempo p 122 This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song DELAY REVERB Parameter On Off Type Delay Time Feedback Effect Level CHORUS Value OFF ON Parameter On Off Explanation Turns the DELAY OFF ON Use this to choose the type of delay SINGLE PAN STEREO REVERSE ANALOG TAPE MODULATE HICUT 1 3400 msec BPM 0 100 0 120 This is a simple monaural delay This delay is specifically for stereo output This provid
345. utton of the bank 0 9 in which you want to register the sound When you press the FAVORITE BANK button the button of the currently selected bank will blink Pressing one of the 0 9 buttons will select the Favorite bank in which the sound will be registered You can also change the Favorites bank even if the FAVORITE ON OFF button is off 3 3 Hold down the FAVORITE ON OFF button and press the button 0 9 to which you want to register the currently selected sound The screen will indicate Live set registered to Bank will be the number in which you registered the live set and the live set will be registered in the selected favorite number It s a good idea to register your favorites in the order in which they ll be used in your song or live set Calling Up a Favorite Sound If you leave the FAVORITE ON OFF button turned on you ll be able to switch between favorites simply by pressing the 0 9 buttons 1 Press the FAVORITE ON OFF button so it s lit Now you can use the 0 9 buttons to select favorites 2 If you want to switch Favorites banks hold down the FAVORITE BANK button and press the button 0 9 for the desired Favorites bank When you press the FAVORITE BANK button the button corresponding to the currently selected bank will blink When you press one of the 0 9 buttons the corresponding Favorites bank will be selected You
346. w use bouncing to combine tracks erase and then delete data of tracks SD Card Busy Y This is more likely to occur if you ve been using you re not playing back and then play back operations such as track editing and punch in out Reduce the number of tracks being recorded simultaneously recording to connect phrases recorded data several seconds in length Use an SD card that has sufficient free space There is insufficient free space on the SD card Derete unneeded Songs H 102 SD Card Full Increase the free space on the SD card by executing the Song Optimize command to delete unneeded data from the card p 104 Thenuberorsongshasexeeedad 09 4 99 songs can be saved an SD card Delete unneeded 138 Message SD Card Locked SD Card Not Ready USB Memory Not Ready SD Card Read Error USB Memory Read Error SD Card Write Error Song Protected Sys Memory Damaged Too Much Data Unsupported Format User Memory Full Meaning Writing or erasure are not possible because the SD card is locked The SD card or USB memory is not inserted or is inserted incompletely The SD card or USB memory was removed after you selected data that was on the SD card or USB memory Failed to load data from SD card USB memory It may be that the file is damaged This file cannot be loaded since its format is incorrect Failed to write data to SD card The file or the SD card itself is write protected
347. waveform 63 63 Width Depth The Pulse Width is activated when SQR is selected with Osc 1 waveform Depth to which the LFO will modulate the pulse LFO Osc 2 Pulse width of the Osc 2 waveform 63 63 Width Depth The Pulse Width is activated when SQR is selected with Osc 2 waveform 3 EXP Parameter Value Explanation Lower limit of the range of the Active Expression Range Min 0 127 The effect will be applied when the position of your hand above the D Beam controller is lower than this value Upper limit of the range of the Active Expression The effect will be applied when the position of your hand above the D Beam controller is above this value By setting Range Max below Range Min you can invert the range of change Range Max 0 127 84 4 ASSIGN Parameter Type Range Min Range Max Explanation Function controlled by the D Beam controller CC01 31 33 95 BEND UP BEND DOWN USB SONG START RECORDER START TAP TEMPO AFTERTOUCH 0 127 0 127 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 Controls the pitch Controls the pitch The USB memory song player will start stop The digital recorder will start stop Tap tempo a keyboard tempo specified by the interval at which you move your hand over the D Beam controller Produce the same effect as aftertouch Lower limit of the range of the D Beam controller The effect will be applied when the posi
348. when playing acoustic instruments Angle of the volume change that will occur in 100 the selected Bias Direction Bias Level 100 Larger settings will produce greater change TONE Negative values will invert the change direction Bias Position C G9 Key relative to which the volume will be TONE modified Direction in which change will occur starting from the Bias Position The volume will be modified for the keyboard i area below the Bias Point The volume will be modified for the keyboard UPR area above the Bias Point Bias Direction L amp U The volume will be modified symmetrically toward the left and right of the Bias Point ALL The volume changes linearly with the bias point at the center TONE The setting of the tone assigned to the layer will be used Level 27 Bias Position Bias Position mr m mw L amp U ALL Level Bias Position mr Bias Position mr mm 42 the tone to be affected by the keyboard velocity A Env Time1 A 6 IVA ENVELOPE Parameter Value Explanation This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the T1 of the TVA envelope 1 V Sens 63 63 If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value Use this parameter when you want key release speed to affect the T4 value of the TVA envelope 4 V Sens 63 63 If you want T4 to be speeded up for qu
349. within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be Z N WARNING Do not open or modify in any way the unit or its AC adaptor Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Never install the unit in any of the following locations Subject to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heat generating equipment or are e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are e Exposed to steam or smoke or j T e Subject to salt exposure or are oN e Humid or are e Exposed to rain or are e Dusty or sandy or are e Subject to high levels of vibration and shakiness This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that is recommended by Roland When using the unit with a rack or stand recommended by Roland the rack or stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain stable If not using a rack or stand you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly support the unit and keep it from wobbling e Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to sure to use only
350. you want strongly played notes to have a EM T4 to be affected by the keyboard greater Resonance effect set this parameter to F Env Time KF i positive settings 100 100 Based on the TVF envelope times for the C4 key Time Keyfollow rn center C positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times Curve that determines how keyboard playing dynamics velocity will affect the TVF envelope Set this to FIX if you don t want the TVF Envelope to be affected by the keyboard spunos gt F Env Time1 A velocity F Env Time2 TVF envelope times T1 T4 23 64 63 Higher settings will lengthen the time until the gt FIX SERV Tmes next cutoff frequency level is reached 5 F Env V Curve 1 7 TONE F Env Time4 R m 1 2 3 4 F Env Level 9 F Env Level1 TVF envelope levels LO L4 F Env Level2 64 463 Specify how the cutoff frequency will change m at each point relative to the Cutoff Frequency x 5 6 7 F Env Level3 S value F Env Level4 Specifies how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the depth of the TVF envelope F Env V Sens 63 63 ui Time Keyfollow Positive settings will cause the TVF envelope to have a greater effect for strongly played notes 3yj3 bunip3 This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the T1 of the TVF envelope F Env T1 V Sens 63 63 If you want T1 to be speeded up for strongly played notes
351. you want to change how the phrase plays when you press the PREVIEW button refer to the system setting Preview p 80 the live set setting Preview Type p 38 and Preview Phrase p 38 e If you hold down the SHIFT button while you press the PREVIEW button the phrase will continue playing even after you remove your finger from the PREVIEW button which will remain lighted Press the PREVIEW button once again to turn off its light and playback of the phrase will stop 23 spunos gt suonpunj 197159 e gt Ma ES z 31 3 14 2 13p102 23161 1293 Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Registering and Calling Up Favorite Live Sets FAVORITE If you register frequently used live sets as favorites you ll later be able to call them up instantly Each bank of favorites lets you register a total of ten live sets You can create ten of these banks For example if the sounds you use in your performance are registered in their order of appearance it will be easy for you to select each sound as necessary Here s how to register a live set in Favorites You can register a sound in Favorites regardless of the FAVORITE ON OFF button status 1 Selectthe live set that you want to register 2 If you want to switch Favorite banks hold down the FAVORITE BANK button and press the b
352. ype Time High Cut Effect Level Value Explanation Use this to choose the type of reverb AMBIENCE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 PLATE 0 1 10 0 s 700Hz 1 1 0kHz FLAT 0 100 Simulates an ambience microphone off mic placed at a distance from the sound source used in recording and other applications Rather than emphasizing the reverberation this reverb is used to produce a sense of openness and depth Simulates the reverberation in a small room Provides warm reverberations Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall Provides clear and spacious reverberations Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall Provides mild reverbera tions Simulates plate reverberation a studio effect unit that uses the vibration of a large metal plate to produce reverberation Provides a metallic sound with a distinct upper range Adjusts the length time of reverberation The high cut filter adjusts the amount of high frequencies in the reverb sound When FLAT is selected the high cut filter will have no effect This sets the volume level of the effect 117 spunos gt suonpunj 1971594 3jj3 bunip3 fb 5 Q 3 3 14 2 Japs0ray 216 sayy u1 d FEY CIP Kiowa 950 xipuaddy Mastering MASTERING Mode You can apply the Mastering Tool Kit to thos

Roland JUNO-Gi User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents